Extracted text (via pymupdf)
785873 characters
Project Name: Dr. A.J. Chandler Park Renovation Phase 1
Page i
Project No.: CA2402.401
Rev 1-16-2024
CITY OF CHANDLER, ARIZONA
DR. A.J. CHANDLER PARK RENOVATION PHASE 1
CITY PROJECT NO.: CA2402.401
CONSTRUCTION SERVICES AGREEMENT
(CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AT RISK)
__________________________________________________
Daniel Haskins, P.E.
CIP City Engineer
Project Name: Dr. A.J. Chandler Park Renovation Phase 1
Page ii
Project No.: CA2402.401
Rev 1-16-2024
CITY OF CHANDLER, ARIZONA
DR. A.J. CHANDLER PARK RENOVATION PHASE 1
CITY PROJECT NO.: CA2402.401
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARTICIPANTS AND PROJECT..............................................................................1
AGREEMENT DOCUMENTS ..................................................................................3
PRE-CONSTRUCTION SERVICES ...........................................................................3
CONSTRUCTION SERVICES...................................................................................3
CITY RESPONSIBILITIES........................................................................................5
AGREEMENT TIME ................................................................................................5
AGREEMENT PRICE...............................................................................................8
FORCED LABOR OF ETHNIC UYGHURS PROHIBITED .......................................8
EXHIBIT A – PROJECT SPECIFIC SPECIAL PROVISIONS ......................................................A-1
EXHIBIT B – GENERAL CONDITIONS...................................................................................B-1
EXHIBIT C – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS..........................................................................C-1
EXHIBIT D – ACCEPTED GMP/PRICE PROPOSAL ................................................................D-1
EXHIBIT E – SUBCONTRACTOR’S LIST FORM...................................................................... E-1
EXHIBIT F – GIS / GPS DATA DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS (IF APPLICABLE)....................... F-1
EXHIBIT G – SUBCONTRACTOR DOCUMENTS WITH CM@RISK ........................................G-1
Project Name: Dr. A.J. Chandler Park Renovation Phase 1
Page 1
Project No.: CA2402.401
Rev. 1/16/2024
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AT RISK
CONSTRUCTION SERVICES AGREEMENT
PROJECT NO.: CA2402.401
This Agreement (the “AGREEMENT”) is made and entered into on the ______day of _______________,
2025, (“Effective Date”) by and between City of Chandler, an Arizona municipal corporation,
hereinafter called “City” and Willmeng Construction, Inc. the “Construction Manager at Risk” or
“CM@Risk” designated below (City and CM@Risk may individually be referred to as “Party”
and collectively referred to as “Parties”).
City and CM@Risk agree as follows:
PARTICIPANTS AND PROJECT
CITY:
CIP City Engineer: Daniel Haskins, P.E.
Public Works & Utilities Department
P.O. Box 4008, Mail Stop 407 Chandler, AZ 85244-4008
Phone: 480-782-3335
Email:
Daniel.haskins@chandleraz.gov
CITY:
Construction Project Manager: Scott Riter
Public Works & Utilities Department
P.O. Box 4008, Mail Stop 407 Chandler, AZ 85244-4008
Phone: 480-782-3328
Email:
Scott.Riter@chandleraz.gov
CM@RISK:
Legal Company Name:
Willmeng Construction, Inc.
Mailing Address:
1702 East Highland Avenue, Suite 450
Phoenix, AZ 85016
Physical Address:
1702 East Highland Avenue, Suite 450
Phoenix, AZ 85016
Arizona Roc No.:
082904
Federal Tax Id No.:
86-0410806
State Where Organized:
Arizona
Business Organization:
Corporation
Statutory Agent Name:
Brian Flaherty
Statutory Agent Mailing Address:
1702 East Highland Avenue, Suite 450
Phoenix, AZ 85016
Statutory Agent Physical Address:
1702 East Highland Avenue, Suite 450
Phoenix, AZ 85016
CM@Risk’s Authorized Project Representative:
Name:
Michael Mongelli
Title:
President
Phone:
480-968-4755
Email:
mmongelli@willmeng.com
Project Name: Dr. A.J. Chandler Park Renovation Phase 1
Page 2
Project No.: CA2402.401
Rev. 1/16/2024
PROJECT DESCRIPTION:
The project scope of work consists of the demolition of existing pavements, water features and
structures, and construction of new decorative hardscape plazas, relocated and new public art, shade
tree infrastructure including below-ground soil improvements, event lawns, seasonal plazas with
social activities, seating and site furniture, park lighting, power infrastructure, two large shade
canopies, storage rooms, two new restroom buildings, two park pavilions, and a new HAWK signal at
the existing Arizona Avenue pedestrian crossing.
PROJECT LOCATION:
3 South Arizona Avenue, Chandler, AZ 85224
Project Name: Dr. A.J. Chandler Park Renovation Phase 1
Page 3
Project No.: CA2402.401
Rev. 1/16/2024
AGREEMENT DOCUMENTS
2.1
AGREEMENT DOCUMENTS
The Agreement between City and CM@Risk will consist of the following Agreement
Documents:
1.
This Construction Services Agreement and all of its Exhibits, including Project
Plans and Technical Specifications.
2.
General Conditions and General Conditions Appendices, incorporated by
reference.
3.
Project Specific Special Provisions as set forth in Exhibit A, incorporated by
reference.
4.
Accepted GMP/Price Proposal as set forth in Exhibit D, incorporated by reference.
2.2
In the event of any inconsistency, conflict, or ambiguity between or among the
Agreement Documents, the Agreement Documents will take precedence as described in
Section 14.1.4 of the General Conditions.
2.3
DEFINITIONS
The definitions in Sections 2 and 15 of the General Conditions apply to all the
Agreement Documents, including this Agreement.
PRE-CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
Although CM@Risk has performed Pre-Construction Services pursuant to a separate
Agreement between City and CM@Risk, the completion, quality and accuracy of those services
and the deliverables provided by City thereunder directly impact CM@Risk’s performance of
its obligations under this Agreement.
Therefore, all of CM@Risk’s obligations, duties, and
warranties in relation to Pre-Construction Services and deliverables survive completion of the
Pre-Construction Services Agreement and are incorporated herein. Any breach of any of
CM@Risk’s duties, obligations, or warranties under the Pre-Construction Services Agreement
will likewise be considered a breach of this Agreement.
CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
4.1
GENERAL
4.1.1
CM@Risk agrees at its own cost and expense, to do all work necessary and required to
fully, timely and properly complete the construction of the Project in strict accordance
with the Agreement Documents in a good and workmanlike manner, free and clear of
all claims, liens, and charges whatsoever, in the manner
and under the conditions
specified, and within the schedule, stated in attached Exhibit A.
Project Name: Dr. A.J. Chandler Park Renovation Phase 1
Page 4
Project No.: CA2402.401
Rev. 1/16/2024
4.1.2
CM@Risk must provide all of the labor and materials, and perform the Work in
accordance with Section 4 of the General Conditions. Some, but not all, of the major
components of the Construction Services and the corresponding subsections of Section
4 of the General Conditions are set forth below.
4.1.3
This is an Agreement for complete construction services in accordance with the
Construction Manager at Risk method of delivery of construction services. CM@RISK has
participated in the design process and been an active member of the Project Design
Team and is fully aware of any issues and constraints involved in this Construction
Project.
4.1.4
CM@RISK is the CITY’s fiduciary responsible for undertaking all necessary action
contemplated under the Agreement documents to construct the Project and ensure
timely and quality completion of the Project at a cost within the Guaranteed Maximum
Price (GMP).
4.1.5
At all times relevant to this Agreement and performance of the Work, the CM@Risk must
fully comply
with all Laws, Regulations, or Legal Requirements applicable to City, the
Project and the Agreement,
including, without limitation, those set forth on attached
Exhibit A.
4.1.6
CM@Risk must perform the Work under this Agreement using only those firms, team
members and individuals designated by CM@Risk consistent with the Statement of
Qualifications dated March 6, 2025, the GMP Proposal, or otherwise approved by City
pursuant to the General Conditions. No other entities or individuals may be used without
prior approval of the Project Manager
4.1.7
CM@Risk will comply with all terms and conditions of the General Conditions.
4.1.8
In the event of a conflict between this Agreement and the General Conditions or an exhibit
hereto or appendix thereto, the terms of this Agreement will control.
4.1.9
Ownership of Work Product. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this
Agreement, all Work Product prepared or otherwise created in connection with the
performance of this Agreement, including the Work, are to be and remain the property
of City. For purposes of this provision, “Work Product” will include all designs, drawings,
plans, specifications, ideas, renderings and other information or matter, in whatever form
created (e.g., electronic or printed) and in all media now known or hereinafter created.
All Work Product will be considered Work Made for Hire as defined in the United States
Copyright Act 17 U.S.C. § 101 (Copyright Act). If for any reason, any such Work is found
not to be a Work Made for Hire, CM@Risk hereby transfers and assigns ownership of the
copyright in such Work to City. The rights in this Section are exclusive to City in perpetuity.
Project Name: Dr. A.J. Chandler Park Renovation Phase 1
Page 5
Project No.: CA2402.401
Rev. 1/16/2024
4.2
CM@RISK’S PRE-AGREEMENT AND PRE-WORK DELIVERABLES
4.2.1
The CM@Risk must provide the Deliverables in accordance with Section 4.2 of the
General Conditions.
4.3
PRE-CONSTRUCTIONCONFERENCE
Refer to Section 4.3 of the General Conditions.
4.4
PERFORMANCE
OF
THE
WORK
(INCLUDING
FIELD
MEASUREMENTS,
SUBCONTRACTORS, AND SUPPLIERS)
Refer to Section 4.4 of the General Conditions.
4.5
CONTROL OF THE PROJECT SITE
Refer to Section 4.5 of the General Conditions.
4.6
PROJECT SAFETY
Refer to Section 4.6 of the General Conditions.
4.7
MATERIALS QUALITY, SUBSTITUTIONS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
Refer to Section 4.7 of the General Conditions.
4.8
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Refer to Section 4.8 of the General Conditions.
4.9
WARRANTY AND CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK
Refer to Section 4.9 of the General Conditions.
CITY RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1
City will have the responsibilities, and provide the information specified in, and subject
to the conditions set forth in, Section 5 of the General Conditions.
AGREEMENT TIME
6.1
GENERAL
6.1.1
The Agreement Duration is 455 Calendar Days.
6.1.2
The Agreement Time will start with the Notice to Proceed (NTP) and end with Final
Acceptance, as set forth in Article 6.4 below. The Notice to Proceed cannot be issued until
approval and acceptance by City of the GMP or Fixed Price.
Project Name: Dr. A.J. Chandler Park Renovation Phase 1
Page 6
Project No.: CA2402.401
Rev. 1/16/2024
6.1.3
The Agreement Time will be as set forth in the Project Schedule. CM@Risk agrees that
it will
commence performance of the Work and complete the Project through Final
Acceptance within the Agreement Time.
6.1.4
Time is of the essence of this Agreement for the Project, and for each phase and
designated Milestone thereof.
6.2
PROJECT SCHEDULE
6.2.1
The Project Schedule approved as part of the GMP Proposal and incorporated herein as
part of the attached Exhibit D must be updated and maintained throughout CM@Risk’s
performance under this Agreement in accordance with Section 6.2 of the General
Conditions.
6.2.2
Failure on the part of CM@Risk to adhere to the approved Project Schedule will be
deemed a material breach and sufficient grounds for termination of this Agreement by
City.
6.3
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Substantial Completion must be achieved no later than the Substantial Completion Date
set forth in the Project Schedule. Substantial Completion will be determined in
accordance with Section 6.3 of the General Conditions.
6.4
FINAL ACCEPTANCE
6.4.1
Final Acceptance will be obtained within the time period set forth in the Project Schedule.
6.4.2
Final Acceptance will be issued pursuant to Section 6.5 of the General Conditions.
6.5
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
6.5.1
Substantial Completion Liquidated Damages. CM@Risk acknowledges and agrees that
if CM@Risk fails to obtain Substantial Completion of the Work within the Agreement
Time, City will sustain extensive damages and serious loss as a result of such failure. The
exact amount of such damages will be extremely difficult to ascertain. Therefore, City
and CM@Risk agree that if CM@Risk fails to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work
within the Agreement Time, City will be entitled to retain or recover from CM@Risk, as
liquidated damages and not as a penalty, the sum per calendar day as indicated in MAG
§ 108.9.
6.5.2
Final Acceptance Liquidated Damages. For the same reasons set forth in Article 6.5.1
above, City and CM@Risk further agree that if CM@Risk fails to achieve Final Acceptance
of the Work within the Agreement Time, City will be entitled to retain or recover from
Project Name: Dr. A.J. Chandler Park Renovation Phase 1
Page 7
Project No.: CA2402.401
Rev. 1/16/2024
CM@Risk, as liquidated
damages and not as a penalty, the sum per calendar day as
indicated in MAG § 108.9 commencing from the actual date of Substantial Completion or
Final Acceptance as required under the Agreement.
6.5.3
MAG Liquidated Damages. If no liquidated damages are specified in Articles 6.5.1 or 6.5.2
above, then the liquidated damages provisions in MAG § 108.9 will apply.
6.5.4
City may deduct liquidated damages described in this Article 6.5 from any unpaid
amounts then or thereafter due CM@Risk under this Agreement. Any liquidated damages
not so deducted from any unpaid amounts due CM@Risk will be payable to City at the
demand of City, together with interest from the date of the demand at the highest lawful
rate of interest payable by CM@Risk.
6.6
MUTUAL WAIVER OF CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ONLY
6.6.1
CM@Risk and City waive claims against each other for consequential damages arising
out of or relating to this Agreement. This mutual waiver includes:
6.6.1.1 Damages incurred by City for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing,
business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of
the services of such persons; and
6.6.1.2 Damages incurred by CM@Risk for principal office expenses including the compensation
of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss
of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work.
6.6.2
This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due
to either Party’s termination of this Agreement. Nothing contained in this Article 6.6
will be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated damages, when applicable, in
accordance with Article 6.5 above.
6.6.3
Nothing herein will be deemed to constitute a waiver of any other remedy available to
City in the event of CM@Risk’s default under this Agreement prior to full performance of
the Work including, as applicable, specific performance or completion of the Work on
behalf of CM@Risk, the cost and expense of which will be offset against any monies
then or thereafter due to CM@Risk (if any) and otherwise immediately reimbursed to
City by CM@Risk.
Project Name: Dr. A.J. Chandler Park Renovation Phase 1
Page 8
Project No.: CA2402.401
Rev. 1/16/2024
AGREEMENT PRICE
6.7
AGREEMENT PRICE
6.7.1
In exchange for CM@Risk’s full, timely, and acceptable performances and construction of
the Work under this Agreement, and subject to all of the terms of this Agreement, City
will pay CM@Risk the “Agreement Price,” which:
The sum of the CM@Risk’s Fee and reimbursable Cost of the Work, as defined in Section
15 of the General Conditions, which the CM@Risk guarantees will not exceed the GMP
set forth in Exhibit D in the amount of $17,980,956.36. Costs which would cause the
GMP to be exceeded must be paid by CM@Risk without reimbursement from City.
6.7.2
The Agreement Price is all-inclusive and specifically includes all fees, cost, insurance and
bond premiums, allowances, construction contingency, owner’s contingency, and taxes
of any type necessary to fully, properly and timely perform and construct Work.
6.8
CHANGES TO AGREEMENT PRICE
Shall be determined under Section 9 of the General Conditions.
FORCED LABOR OF ETHNIC UYGHURS PROHIBITED
7.1
FORCED LABOR OF ETHNIC UYGHURS PROHIBITED. By entering into this
Agreement, Contractor certifies and agrees Contractor does not currently use and
will not use for the term of this Agreement: (i) the forced labor of ethnic Uyghurs in
the People's Republic of China; or (ii) any goods or services produced by the forced
labor of ethnic Uyghurs in the People's Republic of China; or (iii) any contractors,
subcontractors or suppliers that use the forced labor or any goods or services
produced by the forced labor of ethnic Uyghurs in the People's Republic of China.
SIGNATURE PAGE TO FOLLOW
Project Name: Dr. A.J. Chandler Park Renovation Phase 1
Page 9
Project No.: CA2402.401
Rev. 1/16/2024
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties hereto have executed this Agreement through their duly authorized
representatives and bind their respective entitles as of the effective date.
“CITY” CITY OF CHANDLER
MAYOR
RECOMMENDED BY:
Daniel Haskins, P.E.
CIP City Engineer
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
City Attorney
ATTEST:
City Clerk
Seal
“CM@Risk”
WILLMENG CONSTRUCTION, INC.
Signature
Date
Print Name
Title
Signer Email Address
EXHIBIT A
Project Name: Dr. A.J. Chandler Park Renovation Phase 1
Page A-1
Project No.: CA2402.401
Rev. 1/16/2024
PROJECT SPECIFIC
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4.2.7 Aerial Construction Photography
General Conditions Section 4 Subsections 4.2.7.1 & 4.2.7.2 are not applicable to this
project.
4.2.8 Government Approvals and Permits
General Conditions Section 4 Subsection 4.2.8.1, City permit fees will be paid internally
by the City and all other fees will be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Subletting of Agreement
Contractor must perform, with his own organization, work amounting to not less than 50
percent of the total Agreement cost.
Failure to submit Subcontractor’s List Form, demonstrating self-performance not less than
50 percent of the total Agreement cost, will cause the bid to be deemed non-responsive.
Contractors should contact the Arizona Registrar of Contractors for information on license
requirements.
EXHIBIT B
Project Name: Dr. A.J. Chandler Park Renovation Phase 1
Page B-1
Project No.: CA2402.401
Rev. 10/23/23
GENERAL CONDITIONS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Approved date: July 20, 2022
Revised: 7/20/2022
GC-2 of 75
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 - SCOPE OF THESE GENERAL CONDITIONS............................................................................... 3
SECTION 2 - GENERAL DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................ 3
SECTION 3 - STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAILS........................................................................... 7
SECTION 4 - CONTRACT
RESPONSIBILITIES FOR CONSTRUCTION SERVICES .................................. 8
SECTION 5 - CITY RESPONSIBILITIES ..........................................................................................................27
SECTION 6 - AGREEMENT TIME ...................................................................................................................29
SECTION 7 - AGREEMENT PRICE..................................................................................................................35
SECTION 8 - PAYMENT .................................................................................................................................35
SECTION 9 - CHANGES TO THE AGREEMENT .............................................................................................40
SECTION 10 - SUSPENSION AND TERMINATION ......................................................................................43
SECTION 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS.....................................................................................................44
SECTION 12 - INDEMNIFICATION ............................................................................................................... 49
SECTION 13 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION..........................................................................................................49
SECTION 14 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS............................................................................................50
SECTION 15 - PROVISIONS APPLICABLE SOLELY TO GMP AND COST-BASED AGREEMENTS, CHANGE
ORDERS, AND JOB ORDERS .........................................................................................................................57
SECTION 16 - PROVISIONS APPLICABLE SOLELY TO JOB ORDER AGREEMENTS (JOC) ........................ 61
SECTION 17 - PROVISIONS APPLICABLE SOLELY TO PRE-CONSTRUCTION SERVICES FOR
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AT RISK..........................................................................................................66
SECTION 18 - APPENDICES ......................................................................................................APP-1 of 30
Appendix 1
Policy Statement for Calculating Delays and Damages
Appendix 2
Cost Reduction Incentive Proposals for Design Bid Build Agreements
Appendix 3
Affidavit Regarding Settlement of Claims
Appendix 4
Forms of Performance Bond
Appendix 5
Forms of Payment Bond
Appendix 6
Dispute Resolution
Appendix 7 Certificate of Completion
Appendix 8 Construction Sign Detail
Appendix 9 Cost of the Work (Applicable solely to Construction Manager at Risk and
Job Order Contracting)
Appendix 10 Landscape Establishment Period
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-3 of 75
SECTION 1 - SCOPE OF THESE GENERAL CONDITIONS
These
General
Conditions
encompass
provisions
that
apply,
and
are
incorporated
into all
construction Agreements entered into by the City of Chandler, unless otherwise specifically excluded in
the executed Agreement.
SECTION 2 - GENERAL DEFINITIONS
Allowance : A specific amount for a specific item of Work, if any, that City agrees has not been sufficiently
designed, detailed, or selected (including design changes from 90% to 100% as authorized by and at
the discretion of theCity)atthetimetheAgreementPrice isagreed tofor Contractortoprovide adefinitive
price.
Alternate Systems Evaluations or Alternative Analysis: Alternatives for design, means and methods or
other scope considerations that are evaluated using value analysis principles and have the potential to
reduce construction costs while still delivering a quality and
functional Project that meets City
requirements.
Change Order: A written instrument issued after execution of the Agreement Documents signed by
City and Contractor, stating their agreement upon all of the following: the addition, deletion or revision
in the scope of services or deliverables; the amount of the adjustment to the Agreement Price, the
extent of the adjustment to the Agreement Time, or modifications of other agreement terms. The
Agreement Price and the Agreement Time may be changed only by Change Order.
Consultant: Person or firm that provides professional services.
City (Owner or OWNER): City of Chandler, a municipal corporation, with whom Contractor has entered
into the Agreement and for whom the Work or Services are to be provided pursuant to the Agreement(s).
Contingent Bid Items: This is a minor bid item which is likely, but not certain, to occur during the course
of work. If the Engineer determines that this work is required, the Contractor will accomplish the work
and payment will be made based on the contingent unit bid price included in the proposal. Since the
quantity listed in the proposal is primarily for bid comparison, the amount of work required by the
Engineer may vary materially from this.
Agreement: The written agreement executed between City and Contractor, including all of the Agreement
Documents.
Agreement Documents: The documents which together form the Agreement between City and
Contractor, as identified in Article 2 of
the Agreement, or are otherwise incorporated into the
Agreement, including the Agreement, the exhibits thereto, these General Conditions, any Notice to
Proceed, and any Job Order (if applicable), the Plans and Specifications, Project Schedule, written
and properly executed Change Orders, MAG Specifications and
amendments thereto, and any
other documents so designated in the Agreement.
Agreement Price: The agreed-upon price to be paid to Contractor for full, timely, and acceptable
completion of the Work or Services under the terms of the Agreement.
Agreement Time(s): The number of calendar days or the dates related to the applicable phase,
Substantial Completion, or Final Acceptance as stated in Agreement Documents. Agreement Time starts
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-4 of 75
with the Notice to Proceed (NTP) and ends with Final Acceptance. The Agreement Time is set forth in
the Agreement and is based upon the Project Schedule agreed to by City in writing.
Contractor: The person or business association with whom City has entered into an agreement for
construction related Work or Services in relation to the Project at issue.
Contractor Payment Request: The form that is accepted by City and used by Contractor in requesting
progress payments or final payment
and which must include such supporting documentation as is
required by the Agreement Documents or City.
Construction Budget: The
budget for construction of the Project.
Construction Documents: The Plans, Specifications, and Drawings prepared and issued by the Design
Professional and approved by City for construction, meaning the documents are sealed by the
Design Professional (as required), acceptable for permitting and incorporated into the Agreement by
this reference. All amendments and modifications to the Construction Documents must be approved in
writing by City prior to incorporation into the Agreement.
Cost of the Work: The term Cost of the Work will mean costs necessarily incurred by Contractor in the
proper performance of the Work. Such costs will be at rates not higher than the standard paid at the
place of the Project except with prior consent of City.
Critical Path Method (CPM): A scheduling technique which identifies the logical sequence of the activities
occurring in a Construction Project, the anticipated time required to complete each activity in the
Project, and the activities that must be completed on schedule to finish the Project within the anticipated
time. Typically, activities are arranged in a network that shows both activities and their dependencies.
CPM is also used as a management
technique which enables contracting parties to predict when
activities may occur so that resources can be effectively used and limitations can be identified.
Critical Path: Critical Path is the sequence of project network activities which add up to the longest overall
duration. Once established in the Project Schedule, the Critical Path for the Project must not be
changed without prior written approval of City.
Day: Calendar day(s) unless otherwise specifically stated in the Agreement Documents.
Design Professional: The qualified, licensed person, firm or corporation who furnishes design and
construction administration services required under the Agreement Documents. These services may
include, but are not limited to: development of Construction Drawings and Documents, review of
Contractor Submittal(s), review of and
response
to
Requests for Information, approval and
certification of progress payment
applications,
construction administration, and construction
agreement close out.
Differing Site Conditions: Concealed or latent physical conditions or subsurface conditions at the Site
that, (i) materially differ from
the conditions indicated in the Agreement Documents, or (ii) are of an
unusual nature, differing materiallyfrom the conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized
as inherent in the Work at the general area of the Site. Caliche, rock, hard-digging or sandy/silty soil
encountered on a project is not considered a
Site
Drawings (Plans): Documents, which visually represent the scope, extent and character of the Work to
be furnished and performed by Contractor during the construction phase and which have been prepared
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-5 of 75
or approved by the Design Professional and City. These documents include Drawings that have reached
a sufficient state of completion and released by Design Professional solely for the purposes of review
and use in performing constructability or bid-ability reviews by Contractor and in preparing cost
estimates (e.g. Master Planning and Programming, Schematic Design, Design Development, and
Construction Drawings), but
for construction
Shop Drawings are not Drawings as so defined.
Final Acceptance: The
acceptance of the facility or project from the Contractor after all Work is
completed, tested, and inspected in accordance with the Agreement requirements. Final Acceptance
results in a Letter of Acceptance (LOA).
Fixed Price: A fixed price or amount for an Agreement Price, Scope of Work, materials, or other item
under an Agreement, Change Order, or other agreement, which City agrees, in writing, to pay instead
of the actual cost.
Float: The number of Days by which an activity can be delayed without lengthening the Critical Path and
extending the Agreement Time. Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing, all Float belongs to City.
Laws, Regulations, or Legal Requirements: Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances,
codes and orders applicable to the Project of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities
and courts having jurisdiction and any applicable provisions of the Development Agreement for the
Project (if any), including, without limitation, those provisions relating to the design and construction
of the Project.
Line Item: The individual elements of Work identified on a bid or other schedule and associated with a
price or a unit
price and quantity particular to that individual element of the Work.
Also refers to
individual items of work within the Schedule of Values.
Liquidated Damages: Designated damages for the City to collect as compensation upon a specific breach
(example: late delivery).
Long-Lead Item: Long-lead item refers to the equipment, product, or system that is identified at the
earliest stage of a project to have a delivery time long enough to affect directly the Critical Path/the overall
lead time of the project.
MAG: The Maricopa Association of Governments.
MAG Specifications: The most current version of the Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works
Construction published by MAG.
MAG Standard Details: The most current version of the Uniform Standard Details as published by MAG.
Minor change: A change in the Work having no impact on cost or time or the City-approved design intent,
as determined by City.
Notice to Proceed (NTP): A written notice given by City to Contractor fixing the date on which
Contractor will start to perform
obligations under the Agreement.
Project: The Project specified in the Agreement (including a Job Order).
Project Manager: The Project Manager designated in Article 1 of the Agreement, or any successor thereto
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-6 of 75
designated by City. The Project Manager has the authority to act on behalf of City, as delineated and
limited by the Agreement Documents and applicable law. And City will communicate with Contractor
through the Project Manager.
However, the Project Manager has no authority to bind City or City
Council in contravention of any City code, State or Federal statute or regulation, or these General
Conditions.
Project Schedule: The schedule for the completion of the Project agreed to and required by City.
Project Specific Conditions: Additional conditions which apply to the specific Project and Scope of Work
which are set forth in Exhibit D of the Agreement.
Project Team: The Project Team consisting of the Design Professional, Contractor, Project Manager, and
such others as City may designate.
Punch List: The list initially prepared by Contractor pursuant to the Agreement Documents, reviewed
and supplemented by the Project Manager (and at the sole option of the Project Manager, the Design
Professional) and
approved by City containing items of incomplete work not impacting Substantial
Completion, if allowed for under the Agreement, and to be completed or corrected by Contractor after
Substantial Completion and before Final Acceptance in accordance with the Agreement Documents.
Quality Assurance (QA) Testing: Testing performed to verify the accuracy and applicability of the QC
testing results and to ascertain that the
materials installed meet the specified levels of quality in
accordance with the Agreement Documents.
Quality Control (QC) Testing: Testing performed to assure that the materials installed comply with the
requirements in the Agreement Documents.
Requests for Information (RFIs): Formal written request from Contractor to City or Design Professional
for the Project
seeking
clarification or additional information needed for Contractor to properly
complete the Work or Services under the Agreement. City may require
to be submitted on a specific
form or in a specified format.
Schedule of Values (SOV): The specified document prepared by Contractor, and approved and accepted
by City, which divides the Agreement Price into pay items, such that the sum of all pay items equals
the Agreement Price for the construction phase Work, or for any portion of the Work having a separate
specified Agreement Price.
Scope of Work: The scope of work agreed to or required by City and incorporated into the Agreement as
Exhibit A.
Shop Drawings: All drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specifically prepared for the Work
by Contractor or a
Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to
illustrate some portion of the Work.
Site: The land or premises on which the Project is located.
Specifications: The part(s) of the Agreement Documents for the construction phase consisting of written
technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as
applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Where specified, the Project
must be constructed using the current Uniform Standard Specifications and Details for Public Works
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-7 of 75
Construction as furnished by the Maricopa Association of Governments, as amended by City.
Subconsultant: A person, firm or corporation having an Agreement with Consultant/Contractor to
furnish services required as its independent professional associate or consultant with respect to the
Project.
Subcontractor: An individual or firm having a direct Agreement with Contractor or any other individual or
firm having an Agreement with the aforesaid contractors at any tier, who undertakes to perform a part
of pre-construction services or construction phase Work at the Site for which Contractor is responsible.
Subcontractors must be selected
through the Subcontractor selection process described in the
Agreement Documents, if any.
Substantial Completion: The date when the City determines that the Work (or separable units of Phases
as provided in the Agreement Documents) is essentially and satisfactorily complete in accordance with
the Agreement Documents such that
the Project is ready for use by the City for its intended purpose,
opening to the general public,full occupancy or use by City (including, without limitation, all separate
units, or rooms, facilities, access, income-generating areas, and all areas serving the general public, as
applicable, must be ready for full operation without material inconvenience or discomfort), including, to
the extent applicable to the Work, the following: all materials, equipment, systems, controls, features,
facilities, accessories, and similar elements are
installed in the proper manner and in operating
condition, inspected, and approved; surfaces have been painted; masonry and concrete cleaned with
any sealer or other finish applied; utilities and systems
connected and functioning; site work
complete; permanent heating, ventilation, air conditioning, vertical transportation, and other systems
properly operating with proper controls; lighting and electrical systems
installed, operable and
controlled; paving completed, signage installed, and other work as applicable, has been performed to
a similar state of essential and satisfactory completion.
Supplier: A manufacturer, fabricator, distributor, or vendor having a direct Agreement with Contractor
or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the construction
phase Work by Contractor or any Subcontractor.
Total Float: Number of Days by which pre-construction services or construction phase Work or any part
of the same may be delayed without necessarily extending a pertinent Agreement Time or schedule
milestone in the Project Schedule.
Work: The entire completion of construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof,
required to be furnished during the construction phase. Work includes and is the result of performing
or furnishing labor
and furnishing and incorporating materials, resources and equipment into the
construction, and performing
or furnishing services and documents as required by the Agreement
Documents for the construction phase.
Writing: Typing, printing, photography and other modes of representing or reproducing words in a
visible form, including email, and expressions.
SECTION 3 - STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAILS
3.1
City operates under the latest revision of the MAG Specifications and MAG Standard
Details as amended by City.
current amendment to the MAG Specifications, part of
Unified Development Manual, may be found and downloaded from
website
at http://www.chandleraz.gov.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-8 of 75
3.2
Copies of the MAG Specifications and MAG Standard Details are available at the
Maricopa Association of Governments office, 302 N. 1st Avenue, Suite 300, Phoenix,
Arizona.
They
may
also
be
downloaded
from
their
website
at:
http://www.azmag.gov/Newsroom/Publications
3.3
The MAG Specifications and Standard Details and
amendments thereto are
incorporated into the Agreement by this reference.
SECTION 4 - CONTRACT
RESPONSIBILITIES FOR CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
4.1
GENERAL
4.1.1
Contractor must construct the Work in accordance with the Agreement Documents and as
outlined in Exhibit A of the Agreement to the satisfaction of City, exercising the degree of
professional care, skill, diligence, quality and judgment that a professional construction
manager engaged, experienced and specializing in the construction management of
construction and facilities of similar scope, function, size, quality, complexity and detail in
urban areas throughout the United States comparable to Chandler, Arizona would exercise
at such time, under similar conditions. Contractor must, at all times, perform the Work in
conformance with sound and generally accepted engineering principles and construction
management and construction contracting practices.
4.1.2
If Contractor observes errors, discrepancies or omissions in the Agreement Documents,
Contractor must promptly notify the Design Professional and City and request clarification.
If Contractor, with the exercise of reasonable care, should have recognized such error,
inconsistency, omission, or
difference and fails to report it to City, and if Contractor
proceeds with the Work affected by such
observed errors, discrepancies or omissions,
without receiving such clarifications, Contractor does so at its own risk and will be liable to
City for damages resulting from proceeding without clarification.
4.1.3
Project Team and agents of each of them, testing agencies and governmental agencies with
jurisdictional interests will be provided access to the Work at reasonable times for their
observation, inspection, and testing. Contractor must provide proper and safe conditions
for such access.
4.1.4
Contractor must comply with, and require all Subcontractors to comply with, the Arizona
license laws, including all requirements with respect to being duly registered
and licensed.
4.1.5
Contractor must ensure that all employees performing any Work for which Contractor is
responsible
have a legal right to live and work in the United States.
In addition, all
compensation of any such employee must meet all applicablerequirementsoftheFairLabor
Standards Act (FLSA) and Federal Minimum Wage laws.
4.1.6
Contractor must comply with the Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986 (IRCA).
Contractor understands and acknowledges the applicability of the IRCA activities.
Contractor agrees to comply with the IRCA while performing their work and to permit City
inspection of Contractor personnel records to verify such compliance.
4.1.7
Pursuant to MAG Specifications §§ 107.4, Contractor must report immediately any discovery
of archeological ruins or artifacts. Excavation must stop immediately so that City can decide
on the pertinent steps to follow such discovery.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-9 of 75
4.1.8
All property owners that may be affected by the proposed construction activities must be
notified of the scope, duration of the construction activities and possible interference with
their day-to-day activities by Contractor prior to start of construction. In addition, individual
residential or commercial interferences, such as driveway restrictions, water outages, and
all other Work adjacent to residence/business, require 48-hour notification in advance of
specific adjoining Work. Notification may be through door hangers or other procedures
approved by the City.
4.1.9
Access must be maintained to adjacent properties at all times during construction. Where
property has more than one point of access, no more than one access will be restricted or
closed at any one time. Access to adjacent private driveways will be maintained during all
non-working hours.
4.1.10
Contractor must furnish and erect construction signs in accordance with Project
Specifications. The signs must be professionally prepared and subject to approval by City,
must be maintained by Contractor for the duration of the project, and must be removed by
Contractor during the final project clean up.
4.1.11
The number of signs required, the size, shape, installation requirements and information to
be included for construction signs is established on the detail sheet, provided, however,
signs must be a minimum of 4 foot by 8 foot and must be installed so that the bottom of
the sign is at least 4 foot above grade. No direct payment will be made for furnishing and
erecting construction signs. The cost thereof must be included in other items for which
direct payment is made. Sign locations will be determined by City.
4.1.12
All required construction signs must be installed by Contractor within 7 Days of Notice to
Proceed.
4.1.13
The Work to be accomplished under these Agreement Documents has been designed for
City by a Design Professional retained by City for this purpose. It is understood that normal
construction Administration for the purpose of interpretation of the Agreement Documents
is provided by City. Should any services of the Design Professional be required to assist in
the corrections of errors or omissions by Contractor, or services of the Design Professional
be required because of changes in structure or equipment where Contractor has requested
approval of substitute methods or material, or any other items detailed herein below, those
services will be provided by the Design Professional at the standard hourly rates previously
negotiated with City and must be paid for by the Contractor.
4.1.14
Contractor must reimburse City for costs incurred by the Design Professional for additional
services to the Project through no fault of City or the Design Professional including, but not
limited to, the following conditions:
a.
Additional Site visits, investigations, inspections, design work or reports by
the Design Professional which are required due to damages to existing
facilities or completed Work caused by the Contractor in his performance,
C
negligence, or C
Work which is rejected as defective
or as failing to conform to the Agreement Documents;
b.
Design Professional construction phase services rendered on the project
during the time the project remains incomplete after the Agreement date of
final completion will be charged to Contractor at a rate previously negotiated
City; and
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-10 of 75
c.
All retesting required due to the failure of C
Work to meet the
requirements of the Agreement Documents will be at
expense.
All standby and travel time by the C
testing lab, the Design Professional
or City due to C
inability to be prepared for testing at the agreed
upon time will be at the C
expense.
4.1.15
City may withhold from any payment otherwise due to Contractor any amounts necessary
to pay the Design Professional for such additional services as provided herein above.
4.1.16
Contractor will not be required to bear additional costs incurred by City due to errors by the
Design Professional.
4.2
-AGREEMENT AND PRE-WORK DELIVERABLES
4.2.1
Prior to award of the Agreement, Contractor must execute Agreement and deliver to City.
Failure to do so may delay Agreement award. Contractor must als o provide to City its
License classification and number and its Federal Tax I.D. number.
4.2.2
Before beginning any Work under the Agreement, Agreement must be fully executed by
City.
4.2.3
After Agreement award, City will issue to Contractor an award letter. At that time Contractor
must deliver to City such bonds and certificates of insurance with endorsements in such
amounts (and other evidence of insurance requested by City) required under Section 11 of
these General Conditions, and as the Agreement requires.
4.2.4
As evidence of
Compensation Insurance, Contractor must, upon request,
provide a letter of certification from the Industrial Commission of Arizona that Contractor
is insured by the State Compensation Fund or is an authorized self-insurer or a certificate
of insurance issued by an insurance company authorized by the Insurance Department
of Arizona to write
Compensation and Occupational Disease Insurance in the
State of Arizona.
4.2.5
Within 10 Days of the date of the executed Agreement letter issued by City, Contractor must
submit to City for review and acceptance the following items:
4.2.5.1
Comprehensive construction Project Schedule including a Critical Path
Method (CPM)
diagram schedule as described in Section 6.2. Project Schedule must be in Microsoft Project
standard file format.
all required corrections, adjustments, and additions to complete the Project Schedule and
resubmit to City for review.
4.2.5.2
Preliminary schedule of submittals and Shop Drawings. Within 10 Days of
comments, Contractor must submit the corrected and completed schedule of Shop
Drawings submissions for approval
sample
submittals will be acceptable to City if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and
processing the required submittals.
4.2.5.3
Schedule of Values in a form specified by City reflecting the subcontracts and other
categories that will be used to submit Pay Applications for the Work. The total amount of
the Schedule of Values must not be greater than the Agreement Price. The Schedule of
Values will be reviewed at the Pre-Construction Conference and revised by Contractor within
10 Days after Pre-Construction Conference in response to comments and questions from
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-11 of 75
City.
Once accepted by City in writing, the Schedule of Values for the Project must not be
changed without the prior written approval of City.
4.2.6
Video Recording Requirement. Prior to performing any Work, Contractor must document
the existing conditions of the Site, all other areas where Work will occur and all adjacent
areas that may be impacted by the Work via digital video format. Contractor must video
record and index all areas, features, buildings and other public and private improvements
that could potentially be impacted by the Work. Video recording must be coordinated with
City. When video recording private property, Contractor must also coordinate the video
recording with the private property owner, if possible. Contractor must provide City with a
copy of said digital video format prior to performing any Work.
4.2.7
Aerial Drone Construction Photography.
4.2.7.1
If Agreement duration is greater than 90 calendar days, Contractor must engage a
professional unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV) aerial pilot to photograph the Site prior to
construction mobilization, at three-month intervals during construction, and following final
inspection. Drone camera specifications must meet the following minimum requirements:
a.
1-inch CMOS
b.
Pixels: 20M
c.
FOV 84 8.8 mm/24 mm (35 mm format equivalent) f/2.8-f/11 auto focus at 1 m-
d.
For photographing: 16.9 Aspect Ratio: 5472x3078
e.
For video shooting: MP4/MOV/H.264
f.
FHD: 1920x1080 120p @100Mbps
g.
File format: High Definition (HD) JPEG for digital photos and HD MPEG 4 for
digital video.
h.
All metadata to be recorded including GPS data and preserved with photographs
provided.
Interval
JPEG
3 month intervals
At an altitude (AGL) between
70-90 ft.
3 month intervals
Images to be taken every 50-
100 ft. to be determined based
on project scope.
4.2.7.2
Drone photos to be taken in sequential geographical order and then organized and provided in
the same manner unless otherwise specified.
4.2.7.3
Photos to be provided digitally via an online file share service and/or by a USB drive to contractor.
4.2.7.4
Drone pilots to obey ALL local (city, county, state) UAV regulations as well as FAA UAV
guidelines including, but not limited to, conducting all flights during daylight hours, not exceeding
maximum altitude ceilings (depending on area), not flying over people, yielding to other aircraft.
4.2.7.5
Drone pilots must fly drone within visual line of sight (VSOL) and have visual spotter when
needed. Drone pilots only to operate in favorable weather conditions when minimum visibility is
3 miles or greater.
4.2.7.6
Drone pilots to conduct a preflight checklist and visually inspect the entire flight path prior to flying
to ensure a safe flight.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-12 of 75
4.2.7.7
Airspace Authorizations. Operations in Class G airspace are allowed without air traffic control
(ATC) permission. Operations in Class B, C, D and E airspace need ATC authorization. Drone
pilots to schedule each flight in advance and based on airspace if required will notify nearby
airports/control towers, etc.
4.2.8
Government Approvals and Permits.
4.2.8.1
Contractor must obtain all necessary permits for the Work and pay all applicable fees,
unless otherwise noted on the Plans and in the Specifications. City permit fees will be paid
internally by City. For bidding purposes, an allowance for all permit fees is included in the
bid schedule under the item
for permit
The Contractor will be paid for
the actual cost of the permit fees upon submitting a receipt showing the fee Contractor
has paid. Excluded from the above allowance are items such as all costs incurred by the
Contractor in securing the permit except for the actual permit fee established by the
agency, cost for all shutdowns or outages, cost for pole bracing, cost of permits for
construction water, cost of construction water, cost for any additional insurance
requirements, cost for any licenses, and other similar type costs. Contractor is specifically
notified of the need to obtain the necessary environmental permits or file the necessary
environmental and regulatory permit notices.
4.2.8.2
Copies of all permits and the associated notices must be provided to City prior to starting
the permitted activity.
4.3
PRE-CONSTRUCTIONCONFERENCE
4.3.1
Prior to the commencement of any Work, City will schedule a Pre-Construction Conference.
4.3.2
The purpose of this Conference is to establish a working relationship between Contractor,
the utility firms, and various City agencies. The agenda will include critical elements of the
Work schedule, submittal schedule, cost breakdown of major lump sum items, Payment
Requests and processing, coordination with the involved utility firms, and emergency
telephone numbers for all representatives involved in the course of construction.
4.3.3
Minimum attendance by Contractor at any mandatory meeting with City must be (1)
Representative, who is authorized to execute and sign documents on behalf
of the firm, (2)
on-site Superintendent, and (3)
Safety Office,
or other employee responsible for safety.
4.4
PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK (INCLUDING FIELD MEASUREMENTS,
SUBCONTRACTORS, AND SUPPLIERS)
4.4.1
Unless otherwise provided in the Agreement Documents to be the responsibility of City or a
separate
Contractor, Contractor must provide through itself or Subcontractors the
necessary supervision, labor, inspection, testing, start-up, material, equipment, machinery,
temporary utilities and other temporary facilities to permit Contractor to complete the
Work consistent with the Agreement Documents.
4.4.2
Contractor must perform all construction activities efficiently and with the requisite
expertise, skill and competence to satisfy the requirements of the Agreement Documents.
Contractor must at all times exercise complete and exclusive control over the means,
methods, safety, sequences and techniques of construction.
4.4.3
must be present at the Site at all times that material Work
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-13 of 75
under this Agreement
must be
present at the Site at all times any other Work under this Agreement is taking place.
Superintendent must not be replaced without written notice to City. Whenever the
Superintendent is not present at a particular part of the Work where the City or Design
Professional may desire to inform the Contractor relative to interpretation of the Drawings
and Specifications or to disapproval or rejection of materials or Work performed, the City
or Design Professional may provide such information in writing to the foreman or other
worker in charge of the particular part of the Work in reference to which the information is
given. Information so given will be as binding as if given to the Superintendent.
4.4.4
All elements of the Work must be under the direct supervision of a foreman or his
designated representative on the Site who must have the authority to take actions required
to properly carry out that particular element of the Work.
4.4.5
Working Hours. Except in connection with the safety or protection of persons or the Work
or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated, all Work at
the Site must be performed during regular working hours, and Contractor will not permit
overtime work or the performance of Work on Saturday, Sunday or any legal holiday without
written consent given after prior written notice to City. If it will become absolutely
necessary to perform Work at night or on Saturdays, Sundays or legal holidays, the City
must be informed at least 24 hours in advance of the beginning of performance of such
Work. Only such Work will be done at night as can be done satisfactorily as determined by
the City. Good lighting and all other necessary facilities for carrying out and inspecting the
Work must be provided and maintained at all points where such Work is being done.
Further, unless such non-normal work hours are performed at
request or required by
the Agreement Documents, Contractor must pay to City all additional costs incurred by City
by reason of such non-normal working hours. Expenses incurred by City for overtime
compensation must be reimbursed by Contractor as follows: (i) City staff at the rate set forth
in current City Fee Schedule as published on City website, (ii) Design Professional and staff
at the standard hourly rates previously negotiated with City, and (iii) all others at actual cost
plus ten percent administrative overhead. Such costs may be deducted by City from any
payments due to Contractor. Provided, however, if overtime work or work during other
than normal hours is at the request of City and not due to Contractor delay, City will pay the
cost of City overtime expenses.
4.4.6
Where the Agreement Documents require that a particular product be installed or applied
by an applicator approved by the manufacturer, it is
responsibility to ensure
the Subcontractor employed for such work is approved by the manufacturer. All materials
and equipment must be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and
conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator,
supplier or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Agreement Documents; but no
provisions of any such instructions will be effective to impose on City of Design Professional
responsibility for the means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction or for safety precautions incident thereto.
4.4.7
Before starting the Work, Contractor must carefully study and compare the various
Plans, Drawings, other Agreement Documents, and Specifications relative to that portion
of the Work, as well as the information furnished by City, must take field measurements of
any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work and must observe any conditions
at the Site affecting it. The exactness of grades, elevations, dimensions, or locations given
on any Drawings, or the Work installed by other contractors, is not guaranteed by City.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-14 of 75
4.4.8
Before ordering materials or doing Work, Contractor and each Subcontractor must verify
measurements
at
the
Site
and
will
be
responsible
for
the
correctness
of
such
measurements. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed because of differences
between actual dimensions and the dimensions indicated on the Agreement Documents,
including the Drawings.
4.4.9
Ground Level Construction Photography.
4.4.9.1
The Contractor must furnish progress photographs of the project. The photographer
selected by the Contractor must be approved by the City and must be either a commercial
photographer or an individual experienced and equipped for such photography.
4.4.9.2
The Contractor must deliver to City all photographs taken during that period with each
application for payment. If the current photographs do not accompany the application, the
application will not be reviewed and will be returned to the Contractor as incomplete.
4.4.9.3
Photographs must be identified by use of typewritten labels affixed to the back of the
photograph. The label must provide a description of the view, the direction from which the
Contractor and the date of the photography. The stationing must also be included for all
pipeline installations.
4.4.9.4
Photographs must be taken during the construction period and must be of aesthetic
composition and depict the progress of the Work from the beginning of construction
through and including the finished product. City may vary the specified frequency so that
significant progress or changes can be recorded on the photographs.
4.4.10
Underground Facilities.
4.4.10.1
The existence and number of facilities as shown on the Plans are estimated from
information furnished by the particular utility. Contractor is responsible for field verification
and location of all utilities prior to the start of construction. No field work will be allowed to
start until Contractor has contacted Arizona 811 and all affected utilities have been located.
In addition, Contractor must expose and physically locate all potentially conflicting utilities
prior to construction. The actual locations of the utilities must be compared to locations
shown on the Plans and any required changes in alignment and grade must be made at the
time of construction in consultation with Project Manager. It is generally recognized and
Contractor should anticipate that information from Arizona 811 or information from utility
companies during project design, frequently fails to disclose all underground facilities. The
fact that more utility lines or other underground facilities are located in the Project Site than
undisclosed underground facilities do not differ materially from the conditions which
Contractor should expect. The provisions of Sections 105.4, 105.6, 107.11 and 109.8.1 of the
MAG Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction apply and are
incorporated herein by this reference.
4.4.10.2
Contractor is responsible for all coordination with utility companies. The provisions of
Sections 105.4, 105.6, 107.11 and 109.8.1 of the MAG Uniform Standard Specifications for
Public Works Construction strictly apply and no additional compensation will be paid to
Contractor for delays due to utility work on the project.
4.4.11
Relocation of Existing Water Meters. When a service line has been extended and a line
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-15 of 75
setter installed in a meter box, City forces will re-install meter. No compression fittings will
be utilized.
4.4.12
Water Turn-On or Turn-Off.
4.4.12.1
Contractor must coordinate all water line turn-ons and turn-offs through the City.
Application must be made to the Municipal Utility Division and Contractor must pay the
established charges. The City will close existing valves, but will not guarantee a bone-dry
Shutdown.
4.4.12.2
Contractor must notify all customers affected by the turn-off not less than 48 hours in
advance. Notification must be in writing, must give the reason for the turn-off and must
give the estimated time and duration that water service will be interrupted. Contractor is
also notified that water turn-off will not be permitted on the Day before and after
Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day.
4.4.12.3
No direct payment will be made to Contractor for turn-ons or turn-offs. Costs associated
therewith will be included in other items for which direct payment is made.
4.4.13
Tests and Inspections.
4.4.13.1
Contractor must give City timely (at a minimum, twenty-four hours) notice of readiness of
the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals. Contractor must give timely notice
to City in advance of backfilling or otherwise covering any part of the Work so that city
representative may, if desired, observe such part of the Work before it is concealed.
Whenever Contractor varies the normal period during which Work or any portion of it is
carried on each Day, Contractor must give timely notice to City so that city representative
may, if desired, be present to observe the Work in progress. If Contractor fails to give such
timely notice, any Work done in the absence of city representative will be subject to
rejection. If Contractor gives such notice to City, but then is not ready for such inspections,
tests, approvals or observations at the time so noticed, Contractor must reimburse City for
all costs incurred by the attendance of city representatives.
4.4.13.2
If any law, ordinance, rule, regulation, code, or orders of any public body having jurisdiction
requires any Work (or part thereof) to be inspected, tested or approved, Contractor (unless
another party is specified in the Agreement Documents) must assume full responsibility
therefor, pay all costs in connection therewith and furnish City the required certificates of
inspection, testing, or approval. Contractor must also be responsible for and must pay all
costs in connection with any inspection or testing required by the Specifications in
connection with City's acceptance of a manufacturer, fabricator, supplier or distributor of
materials or equipment proposed to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials or
equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation
in the Work. The cost of all other inspections, tests and approvals required by the
Agreement Documents will be paid by City (unless otherwise specified).
4.4.13.3
All inspections, tests or approvals other than those required by law, ordinance, rule,
regulation, code or order of any public body having jurisdiction must be performed by
organizations acceptable to City and by the Design Professional if so specified.
4.4.13.4
Neither observations by City, the Design Professional nor inspections, tests or approvals by
others will relieve Contractor from their obligations to perform the Work in accordance with
the Agreement Documents.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-16 of 75
4.4.14
Uncovering Work. If any Work that is to be observed, inspected, tested or approved is
covered without written concurrence of City, it must, if requested by City be uncovered for
observation. Unless Contractor has given City timely notice of Contractor's intention to
cover such Work and City has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such
notice, Contractor must furnish all necessary labor, material and bear all the expenses of
such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory
reconstruction, including compensation for additional professional services, and an
appropriate deductive Change Order will be issued.
4.4.15
In all cases of interconnection of its Work with existing or other Work, Contractor must verify
at the
Site all dimensions relating to such existing or other Work. Any errors due to
to so verify all such grades, elevations, locations or dimensions must
be promptly rectified by
Contractor without any increase in the Agreement Price. Any
design errors or omissions noted by
Contractor during this review must be reported
promptly to City.
4.4.16
Contractor must establish and maintain all construction grades, lines, levels, and
benchmarks, and will be responsible for accuracy and protection of same. This Work
must be performed or supervised by a licensed civil engineer or surveyor in the State of
Arizona.
4.4.17
Contractor must photograph all buried piping of greater than four (4) inches in diameter
prior to backfill.
4.4.18
Contractor is responsible for the proper performance of the work of Subcontractors and any
acts and omissions in connection with such performance.
Nothing in the Agreement
Documents is intended or deemed to create any legal or contractual relationship
between City and any Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor, including but not limited to any
third-party beneficiary rights.
4.4.19
Contractor
must
coordinate
the
activities
of
all
Subcontractors. Contractor
must
coordinate performance of the Work with
Public Works & Utilities Department and
other departments or agencies within City. The Design Professional and other contractors
or parties involved in the Project. If Cityperforms otherwork ontheProjector at theSitewith
separate contractors under
control, Contractor agrees to cooperate and coordinate
its activities with those of such separate contractors so that the Project can be completed
in an orderly and coordinated manner without unreasonable disruption.
4.4.20
Contractor will not substitute or change any Subcontractor or Supplier without the prior
written approval of City. Any substitute or replacement Subcontractor or Supplier must
be required to meet the same qualifications and selection criteria and process as the
original Subcontractor or Supplier. If a Subcontract/Supplier selection plan has been
approved by City, Contractor will
follow that plan unless otherwise approved by City in
writing.
4.4.21
Contractor must not change or replace any members of its Project team, including
Representative, Project Manager, or Superintendent, without an explanation for
the change being given to City, and receiving prior written approval of the change from City,
which approval will not be unreasonably withheld.
4.4.22
Subcontractors whose scope of work has a value greater than 15% of the total Agreement
Price are
required to furnish performance and payment bonds to Contractor, unless
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-17 of 75
otherwise approved in writing by City.
4.4.23
Contractor must comply with MAG Specification § 108.2 (E) unless otherwise specified in
Agreement Documents.
4.5
CONTROL OF THE PROJECT SITE
4.5.1
Throughout all phases of construction, including suspension of Work, Contractor must keep
the Site reasonably free from debris, trash and construction wastes to permit Contractor to
perform its
construction services efficiently, safely and without interfering with the use of
adjacent land areas.
Prior to Final Acceptance of the Work, or a portion of the Work,
Contractor must remove all debris,
trash, construction wastes, materials, equipment,
machinery and tools arising from the Work or applicable portions thereof to permit City
to occupy the Project or a portion of the Project for its intended use.
4.5.2
Contractor must take whatever steps, procedures or means necessary to prevent dust
nuisance due to construction operations. The dust control measures must be maintained
at all times to the satisfaction of City and in accordance with the requirements of the
Maricopa County Bureau of Air Pollution Control Rules and Regulations.
4.5.3
Contractor must maintain Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and American National
Standards
Institute (ANSI)
accessibility requirements during construction activities,
including
without
limitation
compliance
with
the
2010
regulations
governing
implementation of the ADA to the extent
applicable.
ADA and ANSI accessibility
requirements must include, but not be limited to, parking, building access, areas of refuge,
and emergency exit paths of travel. Contractor i s responsible for the coordination of all
Work to minimize disruption to residents and the public.
4.5.4
Only materials and equipment used directly in the Work will be brought to and stored on the
Site by Contractor. When equipment is no longer required for Work, it must be removed
promptly from
the Site. Protection of construction materials and equipment stored at the
Site from weather, theft, damage and all other adversity is solely the responsibility of the
Contractor.
4.5.5
Contractor agrees all persons working on the Site must act at all times in the best interest
of the Project and will comply with all applicable rules and regulations reasonably set forth
by City related to the Site. Notwithstanding the foregoing or anything in this Agreement to
the contrary, City may remove from the Site any individual who City deems in their
reasonable discretion to be creating a disturbance or causing any problem on the Site.
4.5.6
Contractor will
Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and any other person performing any of
the Work under an Agreement with Contractor, or claiming by, through or under Contractor,
for all damages, losses, costs and expenses resulting from such acts or omissions.
4.5.7
City may conduct criminal, drive history, and all other requested background checks of
Contractor
and Subcontractor personnel performing Work or who have access to
information, data, or facilities in accordance with
current background check policies,
or the provisions of the Project Specific Conditions. Any officer, employee or agent that
fails to background check must be replaced immediately.
4.5.8
City will have a final authority, based upon security reasons: (i) to determine when
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-18 of 75
security clearanceof
and
personnelisrequired;(ii)todetermine
the nature of the security clearance, up to and including fingerprinting personnel; and
(iii) to determine whether or not any individual or entity may provide Services or perform
Work under the Agreement.
4.5.9
If City objects to any personnel for any reasonable cause, then Contractor must, upon notice
from City, remove such individual from the Project.
4.6
PROJECT SAFETY
4.6.1
The Project and all Work performed in relation thereto is governed by applicable provisions
of the federal laws, including but not limited to, the latest amendments of the following:
a.
Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety & Health Act of 1970, Public Law, 91-596.
b.
Part 1910 and Part 1926
Occupational Safety and Health Standards,
Chapter XVII of Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations.
c.
Part 1518
Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, Chapter XIII of
Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations.
4.6.2
Contractor is responsible for safety of the job Site for employees of Contractor as well
as for members of the general public and others who may drive or walk through or be at
the Site.
4.6.3
Contractor recognizes the importance of performing the Work in a safe manner so as to
prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all individuals at the Site, whether working or visiting;
(ii) the Work, including materials and equipment incorporated into the Work and stored On-
Site or Off-Site; and (iii) all other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees,
shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for
removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction; and (iv) the owners or
tenants of adjacent property and their patrons, employees and invitees.
4.6.4
Contractor assumes responsibility for implementing and monitoring all safety precautions
and programs related to the performance of the Work.
4.6.5
Contractor must provide a
as required by O.S.H.A regulations. The
must be identified at the Pre-Construction Conference with City
advised in writing of any changes.
4.6.6
must make routine daily inspections of the Site and must hold
applicable.
4.6.7
Contractor and Subcontractors must comply with all legal and regulatory requirements
relating to safety, as well as any City specific safety requirements set forth in the Agreement
Documents, provided that such City-specific requirements do not violate any applicable
legal and regulatory requirements.
4.6.8
Contractor will immediately report in writing any safety-related injury, loss, damage or
accident arising from the Work to Project Manager and, to the extent mandated by Legal
Requirements, to all government or quasi-government authorities having jurisdiction over
safety-related matters involving the Project or the Work.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-19 of 75
4.6.9
responsibility for safety under this Section is not intended in any way to
relieve Subcontractors and Sub-Subcontractors of their own contractual and legal
obligations and responsibility for (i) complying with all Legal Requirements, including those
related to health and safety matters, and (ii) taking all necessary measures to implement
and monitor all safety precautions and programs to guard against injury, losses, damages
or accidents resulting from their performance of the Work.
4.6.10
As between City and Contractor, Contractor is responsible to City for any and all the safety
issues relating to the Work on the Project. Contractor must administer and manage the
safety program. This will include, but not necessarily be limited to review of the safety
programs
of
each
Subcontractor. Contractor must monitor the establishment and
execution of compliance with all applicable regulatory and advisory agency construction
safety standards.
responsibilityfor review, monitoring, and coordination of the
safety programs will not extend to direct control over execution of the
safety programs. Notwithstanding
safety obligations to City,
it is agreed and understood that each individual Subcontractor will remain controlling
employer responsible for the safety programs and precautions applicable to its own work
and the activities of
work in areas designated tobecontrolledbysuchSubcontractor
for purposes of workers compensation insurance coverage.
4.6.11
Nothing in this agreement will relieve Contractor of his responsibility to maintain traffic,
structures, etc., as noted on the Plans, Specifications, and Project Specific Conditions.
Contractor is responsible to provide all necessary shoring, bracing and trench support as
is necessary to maintain traffic structures, etc., as stipulated in the Plans, Specifications, and
Special Provisions. If the stability of adjoining building, walls, roadways, etc., is endangered
by
excavation, shoring, bracing, or under pinning must be provided as
necessary to ensure project safety. Cost for shoring, bracing, underpinnings, and trench
support will be included in the appropriate items listed in the Agreement Price, and no
additional payment will be made for this work.
4.7
MATERIALS QUALITY, SUBSTITUTIONS, AND SHOP DRAWINGS
4.7.1
Quality Control and Quality Assurance Testing.
4.7.1.1
All construction materials to be used or incorporated in the Project are subject to
inspection, Quality Control & Quality Assurance Testing, and approval or rejection by City.
Any material rejected by City must be removed immediately and replaced in an acceptable
manner to City at no additional cost to City. When QC/QA tests indicate noncompliance
with the Agreement
Documents, retesting must be performed by the same testing
laboratory that performed the tests that indicated noncompliance.
4.7.1.2
The Contractor must establish, provide, and maintain an effective Quality Control Testing
Program (QCTP). The Contractor must develop his own program or procure the services of
a consultant. In either case, the party performing the tests must be currently certified by the
National Bureau of Standards in the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program
(NVLAP) for construction
services or the AASHTO
Accreditation Plan (AAP) for Soils,
Asphalt and Concrete. The Contractor must provide all support necessary to perform QC
and QA testing and sampling (i.e.
shoring for testing trench backfill, backhoes, motor
graders, loaders, etc. to facilitate testing and sampling). The City will perform the QA testing.
4.7.1.3
The Contractor must submit a written QCTP to the City as a required submittal. The
Contractor must not begin Work until the Quality Control Program has been reviewed and
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-20 of 75
accepted by the City. Resumes of all personnel that will be associated directly or indirectly
with the QCTP must be included.
4.7.1.4
The QCTP must include, but not be limited to, on-site/field and laboratory testing of all
material delivered to the Site and any existing materials or conditions pertinent to the
project.
4.7.1.5
All testing must be under the direction of a Professional Engineer registered in the State of
Arizona, knowledgeable in Materials Testing. All Test R
forms must be stamped by
said Engineer.
4.7.1.6
The written QCTP will set forth the responsibilities of the engineer, project manager,
supervisory
personnel and each technician assigned to this project. Substitutions or
replacement of personnel mustrequireprior written approvalbythe City. Allpersonnelmust
be proficient within their assigned duties and possess certification(s) commensurate with
their position and responsibilities. The minimum certification(s) for each technician must
be NICET Level II, Arizona Technical Testing Institute, American Concrete Institute, or other
nationally recognized program applicable to the project and approved by the City of
Chandler.
The written QCTP must include a description of the
required field and
construction materials laboratory tests, including required frequencies that meet
the
minimums established herein.
4.7.1.7
The Contractor must establish a system to record and report all material test results.
The
daily test reports must include, but not be limited to:
a.
Test designation;
b.
Date of test;
c.
Name of tester;
d.
Location of test/sample (station and offset);
e.
Product suppliers and product codes (as applicable);
f.
Depth/elevation of test/sample;
g.
Test result;
h.
Control requirement(s);
i.
Cause of rejection (if applicable);
j.
Results of retests (if applicable); and
k.
Remedial action (if applicable).
4.7.1.8
The Contractor must submit test results to the designated City representative.
4.7.1.9
The Contractor must also submit a weekly report to the City summarizing the testing
and construction activities completed by emailing the report to the email addresses noted
above. All weekly reports must be submitted simultaneously to the Contractor and the
City of Chandler. The report must include individual summary sheets for each utility line,
structure, and portion of the pavement section. Cores must be numbered sequentially
throughout the Project. Re-cores must reference the original core by number and must
contain the averaged values for thickness and density. Total pavement thickness must be
reported. Vertical location of tests for underground utilities must indicate the depth of the
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-21 of 75
excavation at the location of the test (i.e., cut to flow line [if applicable], depth to bottom
or top of pipe, etc.). Density tests must be numbered sequentially. If the minimum number
of tests has not been performed per the written QCTP, this must be stated in the weekly
summary report with an explanation of the circumstances.
4.7.1.10
The City will maintain a copy of the Project test results and weekly reports in the Project
file. In cases where quality control activities do not comply with the Agreement provisions,
the City may:
a.
Order the Contractor to replace ineffective or unqualified quality control
personnel.
b.
Order the Contractor to stop operations until appropriate corrective action is
taken.
4.7.1.11
Although minimum testing requirements are specified herein, the Contractor bears full
responsibility for the quality of the materials and their installation and may elect to
perform additional testing beyond the requirements set forth herein to ensure compliance.
4.7.1.12
The Quality Control requirements contained in this Section are in addition to and separate
from
Quality Assurance Testing, which will be performed by the City of Chandler or its
representative. If the Quality Assurance test results are not in agreement with the Quality
Control test results, the Contractor will have the option to retain a third party consultant for
referee tests. The third party
consultant must meet the same requirements as the
consultant performing the Quality Control Testing. The results of the third party will be
binding. All cost incurred by the referee testing will be the
expense. If the
Contractor elects not to retain a third party for referee testing, the City of Chandler test
results will prevail.
4.7.1.13
Except as otherwise noted within this Section, Work or materials required by this Section are
non- pay items. Per MAG Section 101, a non-pay item is an item of Work for which no
separate payment will be made, the cost of which is to be included as an incidental cost
for associated item(s) included on the Bid Schedule or Schedule of Values.
4.7.2
Trade Names and Substitutions.
4.7.2.1
Substitutions prior to bid will only be considered if in compliance with Arizona Revised
Statute § 34-104.
4.7.2.2
Contractor, if requested by City, must submit Samples or any additional information that
may be necessary to evaluate the acceptability of the substitution.
4.7.2.3
City will make the final decision and will notify Contractor in writing as to whether the
substitution has been accepted or rejected.
4.7.2.4
If City does not respond within 15 working days, Contractor must continue to perform the
Work in accordance with the Agreement Documents and the substitution will be considered
rejected.
4.7.3
Shop Drawings.
4.7.3.1
Contractor must prepare and submit Shop Drawings which show details of all Work to insure
proper installation of the Work using those materials and equipment specified under the
approved Plans and Specifications.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-22 of 75
4.7.3.2
Contractor must submit a schedule of Shop Drawing submissions, which avoids bulk
submissions to the extent reasonably possible, with the Project Schedule for City approval.
The schedule of Shop Drawing submissions must include all of the items for which Shop
Drawings are required by the Agreement Documents, including the Specifications. Unless
otherwise noted, Shop Drawings will not be required for items specified or detailed in
the Uniform Standard Specifications and Details or the Technical Specifications.
4.7.3.3
Shop Drawings must be numbered consecutively for each Specification section and must
accurately and distinctly present the following:
a.
All working and erection dimensions.
b.
Arrangements and sectional views.
c.
Necessary details, including complete information for making connections
between work under this Agreement and work under other Agreements.
d.
Kinds of materials and finishes.
e.
Parts list and description thereof.
4.7.3.4
Each Drawing or page must include:
a.
Project Name, City of Chandler Project Number and descriptions.
b.
Submittal date and space for revision dates.
c.
Identification of equipment, product or material.
d.
Name of Contractor and Subcontractor.
e.
Name of Supplier and Manufacturer.
f.
Relation to adjacent structure of material.
g.
Physical dimensions clearly identified.
h.
ASTM and Federal Specifications references.
i.
Identification of and justification for deviations from the Agreement
Documents.
j.
stamp, initialed or signed, dated and certifying the review
of
submittal,
certification of field measurements and compliance with
Agreement.
k.
Location at which the equipment or materials are to be installed.
4.7.3.5
Location will mean both physical location and location relative to other connected or
attached
material. City will return unchecked any submittal, which does not contain
complete data on the Work and full information on related matters.
4.7.3.6
Stock or standard drawings will not be accepted for review unless full identification and
supplementary information is shown thereon in ink or typewritten form.
4.7.3.7
Contractor must schedule, prepare and submit all Shop Drawings in accordance with a time-
table
that will allow its suppliers and manufacturers sufficient time to fabricate,
manufacture, inspect,
test and deliver their respective products to the project Site in a
timely manner so as to not delay the complete performance of the Work.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-23 of 75
4.7.3.8
If the Shop Drawings show departures from the Agreement requirements, Contractor
must make specific mention thereof in the Letter of Transmittal; otherwise review of such
submittals by City will not constitute review of the departure. Review of the Drawings will
constitute review of the specific subject matter for which the Drawings were submitted
and not of any other structure, material, equipment, or apparatus shown on the Drawings.
4.7.3.9
The review of Shop Drawings will be general and will not relieve Contractor of responsibility
for the accuracy of such Drawings, nor for the proper fitting and construction of the Work,
nor for the furnishing of materials or Work required by the Agreement. No construction
called for by Shop Drawings will be initiated until such Drawings have been reviewed and
approved by City.
4.7.3.10
The procedure in seeking review of the Shop Drawings will be as follows:
a.
Contractor must submit complete sets of Shop Drawings and other
descriptive data as specified in this Section.
b.
After
submittal or resubmittal of Shop Drawings, if Contractor
has submitted
Shop Drawings in accordance with the City-approved
submittal schedule, or upon resubmission, City will be provided with three
(3) calendar weeks for review. Should City
require additional review time
above and beyond the three (3) calendar weeks, Contractor may ask for a
time extension or monetary compensation, if they can present valid, factual
evidence that actual damages were incurred by Contractor. City will
determine
the
amount
of
the
time
extension
or
the
monetary
compensation to be awarded Contractor, if any, in accordance with
Policy Statement for Calculating Delays and Damages, Appendix 1.
4.7.3.11
Contractor will be responsible for all extra costs incurred by City caused by
failure to comply with the procedure outline above.
4.7.4
Long Lead Time Items. Contractor must submit Shop Drawings, as required by the Engineer,
on all long lead items to be furnished and installed as part of the project within 10 Days
after
the date of the executed Agreement letter issued by City. In addition,
Contractor must order all long lead items to be furnished and installed as part of this
Project within 3 Days after receiving approved Shop Drawings. For all long lead times for
which Shop Drawings are not required, Contractor must order said long lead items within
15 Days after the date of the executed Agreement letter issued by City. Within 2 Days
after ordering long lead items, Contractor must supply copies of all purchase orders,
along with an accurate delivery schedule from the supplier.
4.7.5
Construction Water. If Contractor uses water from
water system for construction
water,
Contractor must obtain a fire hydrant meter from City of Chandler Utility Services
(480-782-2280) and all construction water must be obtained through the hydrant meter.
Contractor must pay all fees related to the hydrant meter and all water bills for construction
water. All cost for meters and construction water will be included in the Agreement Price.
4.8
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
4.8.1
During the construction period, Contractor must maintain at the jobsite a full-size set of
prints of
the Construction Document Drawings and Shop Drawings for Project Record
Document purposes.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-24 of 75
4.8.2
Contractor must mark these Drawings to indicate theactual installation wherethe installation
varies from the original Construction Documents. Contractor must give particular attention
to information
on elements that will be concealed, which would be difficult to identify or
measure and record later. Items required to be marked include but are not limited to:
a.
Dimensional changes to the Drawings.
b.
Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
c.
Locations and depths of underground utilities.
d.
Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
e.
Actual equipment locations.
f.
Changes made by Change Order or Addendum.
g.
Details not on original Agreement Drawings.
4.8.3
Contractor must mark completely and accurately Project Record Drawing sets of
Construction Documents.
4.8.4
Contractor must mark Project Record Drawings sets with red erasable colored pencil.
4.8.5
Contractor must note Request for Information (RFI) Numbers and Change Order numbers,
etc., as required to identify the source of the change to the Construction Documents.
4.8.6
Contractor must submit Project Record Drawing sets and Shop Drawings to City or its
representative for review and comment.
4.8.7
Upon receipt of the reviewed Project Record Drawings from City, Contractor must correct
any deficiencies and omissions to the Drawings and submit the final original of the Project
Record Drawings to City prior to Final Payment.
4.8.8
Project Manager will review the Project Record Drawings monthly prior to the date
established for the Payment Request and will be the sole judge of acceptance of these
Drawings.
4.9
WARRANTY AND CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK
4.9.1
Contractor warrants to City that the construction, including all materials and equipment
furnished as part of the Work, will be new unless otherwise specified in the Agreement
warranty obligation excludes defects caused by abuse, alterations, or unreasonable failure
to maintain the construction by persons other than Contractor, subcontractors, or others
which provides City with greater warranty rights than set forth herein or in the Agreement.
must be for one (1) year, in accordance with MAG Specification § 108.8, and will commence
for all portions of the Work upon Final Acceptance of the entire Work as determined by City
under the Agreement. All statutory or other warranties, express or implied, related to latent
defects will remain in force and are not limited by this provision.
4.9.2
City May Stop the Work. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient
skilled workmen or suitable materials or equipment, City may order Contractor to stop the
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-25 of 75
Work without cost to City, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been
eliminated; however, this right of City to stop the Work will not give rise to any duty on the
part of City to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any other party.
4.9.3
Correction or Removal of Defective Work.
4.9.3.1
If required by City, Contractor must promptly, without cost to City and as specified by City,
either correct any defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if
the Work has been rejected by City, remove it from the Site and replace it with non-defective
Work. Contractor must correct any Work which may be displaced in correcting, removing or
replacing defective Work. No compensation will be allowed Contractor for such removal,
replacement or remedial Work. Contractor must reimburse City for costs incurred by City
due to such correction or removal including but not limited to additional expenses for
inspection, testing or observation and for repeated reviews by the City or Design
Professional.
4.9.3.2
Upon failure on the part of the Contractor to comply within a reasonably prompt time with
any written order of City to correct or remove defective Work, City has authority to cause
nonconforming materials or rejected Work to be remedied, removed, or replaced at the
Contractor's expense and to deduct the costs from any moneys due or to become due the
Contractor.
4.9.4
City May Correct Defective Work. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written
notice of City to proceed to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work
as required by City or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the
Agreement Documents (including any requirements of the progress schedule), City may,
after 7 Days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. To the
extent necessary to complete corrective and remedial action, City may exclude Contractor
from all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, take
possession of Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the
Site and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which
City has paid Contractor, but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor must allow City, city
representatives, agents and employees such access to the Site as may be necessary to
Section. All direct and indirect costs of City in
exercising such rights will be charged against Contractor in an amount verified by City
representative, and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in
the Agreement Documents and a reduction in the Agreement Price. Such direct and indirect
costs will include, in particular but without limitation, compensation for additional
professional services required and all costs of repair and replacement of Work or others
destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective
Work. Contractor will not be allowed an extension of the Agreement Time because of any
rights hereunder.
4.9.5
Correction or Removal of Unauthorized Work.
4.9.5.1
Any Work done beyond the lines and grades shown on the Drawings or established by the
Design Professional or any changes in, additions to, or deductions from the Work done
without written authority will be considered as unauthorized and will not be paid for. Work
so done may be ordered remedied, removed, or replaced at the Contractor's expense.
4.9.5.2
Upon failure on the part of the Contractor to comply promptly with any order of the City,
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-26 of 75
City will have authority to cause unauthorized Work to be remedied, removed, or replaced
at the Contractor's expense and to deduct the costs from any moneys due or to become
due the Contractor.
4.9.6
Correction Period - One Year Guarantee.
4.9.6.1
If, within one year after the date of Final Acceptance, or such longer period of time as may
be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the
Agreement Documents, or by any specific provision of the Agreement Documents, any Work
is found to be defective, Contractor must promptly, without cost to City and in accordance
with City's written instructions, either correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected
by City, remove it from the Site and replace it with non-defective Work. If Contractor does
not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay
would cause serious risk of loss or damage, City may have the defective Work corrected or
the rejected Work removed and replaced, and all direct and indirect costs of such removal
and replacement, including compensation for additional professional services, must be paid
by Contractor. Such action by the City will not relieve the Contractor of the guarantees
required by this Section or elsewhere in the Agreement Documents.
4.9.6.2
If, in the opinion of the City, defective Work creates a dangerous condition or requires
immediate correction or attention to prevent further loss to the City or to prevent
interruption of operation of the City, the City will attempt to give the notice required by this
Section. If the Contractor cannot be contacted or does not comply with the City's request
for correction within a reasonable time as determined by the City, the City may,
notwithstanding the provisions of this Section, proceed to make such correction or provide
such attention; and the costs of such correction or attention will be charged against the
Contractor. Such action by the City will not relieve the Contractor of the guarantees
required by this Section or elsewhere in the Agreement Documents.
4.9.6.3
This Section does not in any way limit the guarantee on any items for which a longer
guarantee is specified or on any items for which a manufacturer or supplier gives a
guarantee for a longer period. The Contractor agrees to act as co-guarantor with such
manufacturer or supplier and must furnish the City all appropriate guarantee or warranty
certificates upon completion of the Project. No guarantee period, whether provided for in
this Section or elsewhere, will in any way limit the liability of Contractor or their sureties or
insurers under the indemnity or insurance provisions of these General Conditions and the
Project Specific Special Conditions.
4.9.7
Acceptance of Defective Work.
4.9.7.1
If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, City may
accept Work when in the best interest of the City to do so with appropriate monetary credit
from Contractor. If any such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, a Change Order will
be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Agreement Documents, including
appropriate reduction in the Agreement Price; or, if the acceptance occurs after final
payment, an appropriate amount must be paid by Contractor to City.
4.9.7.2
Alternatively, City may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor's expense, a special
performance guarantee or other surety prior to acceptance of defective work.
4.9.8
The Warranty period begins on the Final Acceptance date noted in the Certificate of
Completion, irrespective of early completion by some Subcontractors of their work.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-27 of 75
4.9.9
warranty obligation must be in accordance with MAG Specifications.
4.9.10
Nothing in the warranties contained in the Agreement Documents are intended to limit any
warranty which provides City with greater warranty rights than set forth
in
this
Section or the Agreement Documents.
Contractor must provide City with all
warranties
prior to Substantial Completion, if applicable, or Final
Acceptance.
4.9.11
Contractor agrees that it will be responsible to manage and administer the correction of any
Work that is not in conformance with the Agreement Documents during the warranty
periods set forth in this Section, or during any longer periods to the extent required by the
Agreement Documents. A progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the
Project by City, will not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Agreement
Documents.
4.9.12
When notified of a warranty issue, Contractor must respond in writing within 48-hours and
must
perform warranty Work as soon as material for said repairs are available (as judged
solely by City), and in any event Contractor must, take immediate steps to commence and
complete correction of nonconforming Work no later than the time period set forth in
written notification in accordance with the Agreement Documents. This includes the
correction, removal or replacement of the nonconforming Work and any damage caused
to other parts of the Work affected by the nonconforming Work. If defects develop which
are determined by City to be an emergency, City
will notify Contractor, via the most
expeditious means regarding the nature and condition of the defects. In turn, Contractor
must immediately dispatch necessary forces to correct the defect or
the emergency
condition in accordance with Agreement Documents.
4.9.13
The time periods referenced in this Section apply only to
obligation to
correct nonconforming Work and is not intended to constitute a period of limitations for any
other rights or remedies that City may have regarding
other obligations under
the Agreement Documents.
4.9.14
Without limiting the foregoing or anything in these General Conditions or the Agreement
to the contrary, Contractor must obtain and provide to City all warranties for any portion
of the Project offered by the manufacturer, installer or provider thereof. City and the user
of the facility will
have the right to the full value and benefit of all such warranties.
Contractor must ensure all such warranties are fully transferrable to facilitate the full value
of this Section.
4.9.15
warranty excludes damages or defects caused by abuse, alterations to the Work
not executed by or through Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper
operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage.
4.9.16
In the event of any noncompliance with this entire Section 4, City may require Contractor to
stop or suspend the Work in whole or in part.
SECTION 5 - CITY RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1
CITY PROJECT MANAGER AND INSPECTORS
5.1.1
Project Manager is responsible for providing City-supplied information and approvals in a
timely manner to assist Contractor to fulfill its obligations under the Agreement Documents.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-28 of 75
5.1.2
Project Manager will also provide Contractor with prompt notice when it observes any
failure on the part of Contractor to fulfill its contractual obligations, including any default
or defect in the Project or non-conformance with the Drawings and Specifications.
5.1.3
City may utilize Field Inspectors to assist Project Manager during construction in
observing performance of Contractor.
use of Inspectors is for the purpose of assisting
Project Manager.
5.1.4
The Inspectors are authorized to inspect all Work and materials furnished. Such inspections
may extend to all or part of the Work and to preparation, fabrication or manufacture of the
materials to be used. The Inspectors have the authority to issue instructions contrary to
the Construction
Documents if approved and coordinated with the directions of Project
Manager.
5.1.5
The Inspectors have the authority to reject work or materials until any questions at issue can
be decided by Project Manager.
5.1.6
The use of Inspectors by City will not make City responsible for or give City control
over
construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures or for safety
precautions or programs or responsibility for
failure to perform the Work in
accordance with Agreement Documents. The Inspectors are not authorized to direct any of
activities, employees or Subcontractors.
5.2
DESIGN PROFESSIONAL SERVICES
City may contract separately with one or
more
Design Professionals to provide
construction administration of the Project. The Design
Agreement, as well as
other firms hired by City may be furnished to Contractor. Contractor does not have the right
to limit or restrict or reject any Agreement modifications that are mutually acceptable to City
and Design Professional.
5.3
CITY
SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
City is responsible for all work performed on the Project or at the Site by separate
contractors
retained by City. City will contractually require its separate contractors to
reasonablycooperate with, and reasonably coordinate their activities so as not to interfere
with Contractor in order to enable Contractor to timely complete the Work consistent with
the Agreement Documents.
Contractor must immediately notify the Project manager,
and address the matter in the next monthly status report, if any activities of such separate
contractors are
expected to interfere, or are interfering, with Contractor and such
interference will or could result in any delay in
performance of the Work.
5.4
PERMIT REVIEW AND INSPECTIONS
5.4.1
If requested by Contractor, Project Manager will provide assistance and guidance in
obtaining necessary reviews, permits and inspections.
5.4.2
The regulating agencies of City, such as Development and Sustainability, Fire and
Planning Departments, enforce legal requirements. The enforcement activities of City are
independent and separate from this Agreement.
5.5
PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS TO THE CONTRACTOR.
Contractor will be provided up to five copies of the Agreement Documents as are
reasonably necessary for the execution of the Work. Additional copies will be furnished,
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-29 of 75
upon request, at the cost of reproduction.
SECTION 6 - AGREEMENT TIME
6.1
AGREEMENT TIME
6.1.1
The Agreement Time will start with the Notice to Proceed
and end with Final
Acceptance.
6.1.2
Beginning on the date of the NTP, Contractor must begin to fulfill
obligations
under
the
Agreement.
obligations
include
providing
City
and
other
agencies with any submittals required by the Project Specific Special Provisions, including
but not limited to, an approved Project Schedule, Traffic Control Plans, and a Stormwater
Pollution Prevention Plan. Contractor
must submit all such required submittals before
any physical construction work commences on
the
Site. NTP
does
not
authorize
construction work until all a greement insurance, bonds, and schedules are submitted to
and accepted by the City.
6.1.3
The Agreement Time will be as set forth in the Project Schedule. Contractor agrees that
it will
commence performance of the Work and complete the Project through both
Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance within the Agreement Time.
6.1.4
Time is of the essence of this Agreement, for the Project, for the Work, and for each phase
and designated Milestone thereof.
6.1.5
Failure of Contractor to perform any covenant or condition contained in the Agreement
Documents within the time periods specified herein, will constitute a material breach of this
Agreement entitling City to terminate the Agreement unless Contractor applies for and
receives an extension of time, in accordance with the procedures set forth in the Agreement
Documents.
6.1.6
Failure of City to insist upon the performance of any covenant or condition within the time
periods specified herein, will
other covenant or condition within the designated periods, unless a specific waiver is
granted in writing for each such covenant or condition.
6.1.7
will not constitute a waiver of any other time provisions contained in the Agreement
Documents. Failure of Contractor to complete performance promptly within the additional
time authorized in the waiver or extension of time agreement constitutes a material breach
of this Agreement entitling City to all the remedies set forth herein or provided by law.
6.2
PROJECT SCHEDULE
6.2.1
The Project Schedule must be in Microsoft Project standard file format, must be updated and
maintained throughout the Agreement Time, and must contain the following:
6.2.1.1
Detailed representation of all activities for the project, both on-site construction and major
procurement. All significant activities together with the resource loading requirements for
each and all items appearing on the schedule of values or bid schedule for progress
payments must be shown on the Project Schedule or in attached transmittal letter as
described in Section 6.2.8.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-30 of 75
6.2.1.2
Dependencies between activities must be indicated so that it may establish as to the effect
the progress of any one activity would have on other activities and on the Schedule.
6.2.1.3
Activities for submission, review, and approval of all required submittals.
6.2.1.4
An amount of time will
will be scheduled during this period. Punch list and cleanup
must be shown on the Project Schedule and must be entirely completed prior to the
expiration of the Agreement Time.
6.2.2
Within 10 D
must make all required
corrections, adjustments, and additions to complete the Project Schedule and resubmit to
review of and response to the Project Schedule is for the purpose of:
(1) City planning and staffing for the Project as may be required from time to time; (2)
ensuring
general
conformance with the scheduling requirements of the
Agreement Documents and completion of the Project within the Agreement Time; and (3)
monitoring and evaluating the construction status for
purposes of approving monthly
progress payments.
Acceptance of a submitted schedule by City
should in no way be
construed as an affirmation or admission that the schedule is reasonable or workable by
Contractor.
The responsibility for completing the Work on the Project within the
Agreement Time remains the obligation of Contractor.
review
does not relieve
Contractor from
compliance with the requirements of the Agreement Documents or
be construed as relieving Contractor of its complete and exclusive control over the
means, methods, sequences and techniques for executing the work.
6.2.3
The Project Schedule must show milestones, including milestones for City-furnished
information, and must include activities for City-furnished material and construction by
other contractors when those activities are interrelated with Contractor activities.
6.2.4
The Project Schedule must be revised as required by conditions and progress of the Work,
but such revisions do not relieve Contractor of its obligations to complete the Work
within the Agreement Time, as adjusted in accordance with the Agreement Documents.
No modification to the Agreement Documents or the Agreement Time will be effective
unless approved in advance by City.
6.2.5
For all items of materials and equipment that are critical or may require long lead times to
acquire, the Project Schedule must show dates for submission, review and approval of
submittals, ordering, and delivery.
6.2.6
An updated Project Schedule must be submitted monthly to City as part of the Payment
Request. The monthly submittal must include one full size plot of the entire schedule and
one electronic copy containing the schedule in Microsoft Project standard file format. In
addition, Contractor must, upon request by City, provide a copy of all submitted schedule
data in electronic
format which must be clearly labeled with the Project description,
scheduling program name and version number, and schedule print/data date.
6.2.7
Contractor must provide City with a monthly status report with each Project Schedule
detailing the progress of the Work, including: (i) if the Work is proceeding according to
schedule, (ii) any discrepancies, conflicts, or ambiguities found to exist in the Agreement
Documents that require resolution, and (iii) other information detailing items that require
resolution so as not to jeopardize the ability to complete the Work in the Agreement Time.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-31 of 75
6.2.8
With each Project Schedule submittal, Contractor must include a transmittal letter
including the following:
a.
Description of problem tasks, referenced to field instructions or requests
for information
as appropriate.
b.
Current and anticipated delays including:
(i)
Cause of the delay.
(ii)
Corrective action and schedule adjustments to correct the delay.
(iii)
Known or potential impacts and their delay on other activities,
milestones, and their impact on the Substantial Completion and
Final Acceptance dates.
(iv)
Changes in construction sequence.
c.
Pending items and status thereof including but not limited to:
(i)
Time Extension requests;
(ii)
Substantial Completion date status;
(iii)
Final Acceptance date status.
d.
If ahead of schedule, the number of calendar Days ahead.
e.
If behind schedule, the number of calendar Days behind.
f.
Other Project or scheduling concerns.
6.2.9
Critical Path Method (CPM).
6.2.9.1
Unless otherwise specified in the Agreement, the Project Schedule must include a Critical
Path
Method
(CPM)
diagram
schedule
showing
the
sequence
of
activities,
the
interdependence of each activity and identifies the Critical Path.
6.2.9.2
The CPM diagram schedule must be in calendar Days and indicate duration, earliest and
latest
start and finish dates for all activities, and total Float Times for all activities except
critical activities.
The CPM diagram must be presented in a time scaled graphical format for
the Project as a whole.
6.2.9.3
The CPM diagram schedule must indicate all relationships between activities.
6.2.9.4
The activities making the Project Schedule must contain sufficient detail to assure that
adequate planning has been done for proper execution of the Work and such that it provides
an appropriate
basis for monitoring and evaluation the progress of the Work. Individual
activities must not exceed 30 Days in length, in most cases.
6.2.9.5
The CPM diagram schedule must be based upon activities, which coincide with the Schedule
of Values.
6.2.9.6
The CPM diagram schedule must show all submittals associated with each work activity and
the review time for each submittal.
6.2.10
Float Time.
6.2.10.1
The total Float Time within the overall schedule is for the exclusive use of City, but City
may approve
use of Float as needed to meet Agreement Milestones and
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-32 of 75
the Project completion date.
6.2.10.2
Contractor will not be allowed to sequence, hide, or reallocate Float Time through
such strategies, as extending activity duration estimates to consume available Float, using
preferential logic, or using extensive crew/resource sequencing, tec. No time extensions
will be granted nor delay damages paid until a delay occurs which extends the Work beyond
the Agreement Time.
6.2.11
City-Caused Delays. City-caused delays on the Project, if any, may be offset by City-caused
time
savings (i.e., Critical Path submittals returned in less time than allowed by the
Agreement, approval of substitution requests and credit changes which result in savings of
time to Contractor, etc.) In such an event, Contractor will not be entitled to receive a time
extension or delay damages until
all City-caused time savings are exceeded and the
Agreement Time is also exceeded.
6.2.12
Rain-Related Delays. Contractor is required, in preparing the Project Schedule to take into
account all relevant weather conditions, including normal rainfall and distribution. No
additional compensation will be given for any rain-related delays or impacts on the Work
or the Project Schedule. No time extension will be granted in the Project Schedule unless
the rainfall during the construction of Work is unusually severe, was not reasonably
anticipated, and the total rainfall was significantly in excess of the normal rainfall for the
Project Site location. Normal rainfall for the Project will be determined from the 10-year
average rainfall for the Site as measured by the
National Oceanic and Atmospheric
Administration or comparable source of reliable information for
rainfall in Chandler,
Arizona. In addition, the excessive rainfall must have actually impacted Work activities on
the Critical Path and caused delay beyond any remaining Float at the time of the rain- caused
delay. The burden of documenting normal rainfall, the excessive rainfall and the impact on
Critical Path activities is on Contractor. All other provisions in the Agreement Documents
relating to claims, including without limitation notice requirements, apply to any claim by
Contractor for a rain delay.
6.2.13
Statement for Calculating Delays and
Appendix 1 to these
General Conditions, will apply to all claims of delay and delay damages.
6.2.14
Force Majeure. If Contractor is delayed or prevented from the performance of any Work
required under this Agreement by reason of acts of God or other causes beyond the control
and without fault of Contractor (financial inability excepted), performance of that Work will
be excused, but only for the period of the delay. The time for performance of the Work will
be extended for a period equivalent to the period of delay. In addition, the parties agree if
from the COVID-
excused as set forth in this clause. Provided, however; Contractor must give the City written
notice within 30 days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to COVID-19 pandemic
related delayed or suspended performance. For COVID-19 pandemic related delay or
suspended performance, the parties must agree in writing to the length of the excused
approval to use any allowance established as part of the project for delays and costs related
to the COVID-19 pandemic.
6.3
SUBSTANTIALCOMPLETION
6.3.1
When Contractor considers that the Work, phase or a portion thereof, which City agrees in
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-33 of 75
writing to accept separately, is substantially complete, City will prepare and submit to
Contractor a comprehensive Punch List of items to be completed or corrected prior to Final
Acceptance and Final Payment. Failure to include an item on such Punch List does not alter
the responsibility of Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Agreement
Documents.
6.3.2
Upon receipt of
Punch List, Project Manager will make an inspection to
determine
whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete.
Project Manager may, at Project
sole option, be assisted in such inspection by
the Design Professional for the Project. If the inspection by the Project Manager discloses
any item, whether or not included
on
Punch List, which is not sufficiently
completed in accordance with the Agreement Documents so that City can occupy or utilize
the Work, phase or designated portion thereof for its
intended use, Contractor must,
before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such
item upon notification by Project Manager. In such case, Contractor must then submit a
request for another inspection by Project Manager to determine Substantial Completion.
6.3.3
Certificate of Substantial Completion.
6.3.3.1
The Project Manager will not issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion unless and until
the Work (or separable units or Phases as provided in the Agreement Documents) is
essentially and satisfactorily complete in accordance with the Agreement Documents, such
that the Project is ready for use by City for its intended purpose, opening to the general
public, full occupancy or use by City (including, without limitation, all separate units, or
rooms,facilities,access,income-generating areas, and all areas serving the general public,
as applicable, must be ready for full-operation
without material inconvenience or
discomfort), including, to the extent applicable to the Work, the
following: all materials,
equipment, systems, controls, features, facilities, accessories and similar
elements are
installed in the proper manner and in operating condition, inspected and approved;
surfaces have been painted; masonry and concrete cleaned with any sealer or other finish
applied; utilities and systems connected and functioning; site work complete; permanent
heating,
ventilation, air condition, vertical transportation and other systems properly
operating with proper controls; lighting and electrical systems installed, operable and
controlled; paving completed, signage installed, and other Work as applicable, has
been performed to a similar state of essential and satisfactory completion. A minor
amount of Work, as determined by and at the discretion of the Project Manager, such
as installation of minor accessories or items, a minor
amount of painting, minor
replacement of defective work, minor adjustment of controls or sound
systems, or
completion or correction of minor exterior work that cannot be completed as a result of
weather conditions, will not delay determination of Substantial Completion. If prior
written
approval is obtained from City for purposes of Substantial Completion, specified
areas of the entire Work
or
Project may be
individually certified as
Substantially
Complete. In no event will Substantial Completion be deemed to have occurred unless
and until: (i) a temporary certificate of occupancy has been issued by the appropriate
Governmental Authorities (as applicable) and (ii) all terms and Work required under this
Agreement have been fulfilled by Contractor and same will have also been approved and
accepted by City, subject only to the Punch List items.
6.3.3.2
If requested by City, Contractor must complete and turn-over to City the Project on a phased
basis. Each phase will have a separate inspection by the Project Manager, a Punch List
generated, and then an inspection by City with final approval and acceptance only after the
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-34 of 75
Project
Punch List.
6.4
PARTIAL UTILIZATION
6.4.1
which has specifically been identified in the Agreement Documents, or which City, the
Design Professional and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable
part of the Work that can be used by City for its intended purpose, without significant
however, if the portion of the Work to be used or occupied has not been found to be
substantially complete, City must do so in accordance with Section 6.3 prior to such
occupancy.
6.4.2
In lieu of the issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion as to part of the Work, City
may take over operation of a facility constituting part of the Work whether or not it is
substantially complete if such facility is functionally and separately usable; provided that
prior to any such takeover, City and Contractor agree in writing as to the division of
responsibilities between City and Contractor for security, operation, safety, maintenance,
correction period, heat, utilities and insurance with respect to such facility.
6.4.3
Substantial Completion of or City's beneficial occupancy of a part of the Project will not alter
the fact that the one-year warranty for the whole Project starts at the date of Final
Completion of the whole Project.
6.5
FINAL ACCEPTANCE
6.5.1
Unless otherwise expressly agreed to in writing by City, Final Acceptance must be obtained
by no later than 30 Days (60Days for federally funded agreements) after the date of Substantial
Completion. Failure to timely obtain Final Acceptance will be a material breach of the
Agreement.
6.5.2
Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, City
and Contractor will jointly inspect to verify that the remaining items of Work have been
completed. There will be no partial acceptance. Final Acceptance will not occur until all
items of Work, including Punch List Items, have been completed to
satisfaction as
reflected in the written Final Acceptance.
6.5.3
Final Payment will not be due, owing, or paid by City until Final Acceptance is issued.
6.5.4
Landscape Establishment Period. Unless otherwise expressly agreed to in writing by City, the
Landscape Establishment Period will begin on the date of Final Acceptance of the Project and
will run 90 Calendar Days thereafter. Landscape Establishment Period requirements are
detailed in General Conditions Appendices, attached herein.
6.6
CONTINUATION OF WORK
6.6.1
Permitting Contractor to continue and finish the Work or any part of it after the time fixed
for its completion (whether milestone, phase, Substantial Completion or Final Acceptance)
or after the date to which the time fixed for any completion may have been extended, does
not operate as a waiver by City of any rights under the Agreement Documents, law or equity.
6.6.2
Furthermore, the timely completion of the Work being of the utmost importance under
this Agreement, notwithstanding the existence of one or more disputes between the parties
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-35 of 75
concerning the scope of the Work, the Project Schedule, Agreement Time, payments or any
other matter, and further notwithstanding a
invocation of the Dispute Resolution
provisions specified in Appendix 6 of these General Conditions, unless City suspends
the Agreement or
performance pursuant to Section 10 of these General
Conditions, Contractor will continue to prosecute the Work, including any Change Order
work or Extra Work Orders, in a diligent and timely manner and not stop, slow down or
impede by action or inaction the progress of the Work, including commencing performance
of and thereafter completing any additional work called out in any Change Order or Extra
Work Order issued by Project Manager with the approval of City, so long as City makes
payment to Contractor in accordance with Section 8 of these General Conditions.
SECTION 7 - AGREEMENT PRICE
7.1
UNIT PRICE AGREEMENTS
7.1.1
The Agreement Price for all Unit Price Agreements will be the amount set forth in the
Agreement or Change Order multiplied by the verified quantity provided.
7.1.2
Measurements of quantities to determine the total Agreement Price must be in accordance
with MAG Specification §§ 109.1 and 109.2.
7.1.3
The Unit Price may only be changed as set forth in Section 9 below.
7.2
CHANGE ORDERS
7.2.1
Unit Price Change Orders. The Change Order Price for all Unit Price Change Orders will be
the amount set forth in the Change Order multiplied by the verified quantity provided.
7.2.2
Measurements of quantities to determine the total Change Order Price must be in
accordance with MAG Specifications §§ 109.1 and 109.2.
7.2.3
The Unit Price may only be changed as set forth in Section 9 below.
7.2.4
MAG Specification § 109.4.1 is modified as follows: Before § 109.4.1, the following is added:
Any deduction or increase in the Agreement Price must be supported by a signed,
written Change Order fully executed by City, and supported by such backup as the Project
Manager may require.
7.3
SALES TAX
Contractor is required to pay all applicable sales tax in accordance with the law of the state of
Arizona and this cost must be included in all Agreement Prices. When equipment, materials
or supplies generally taxable to Contractor are eligible for a tax exemption due to the nature
of the Project, Contractor must assist City in applying for and obtaining such tax credits and
exemptions which will be paid or credited to City.
SECTION 8 - PAYMENT
8.1
PAYMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
8.1.1
Payment for the Work will be made in accordance with MAG Standard Specification § 109
as amended below.
8.1.2
Contractor must submit to City for review a completed Contractor Payment Request signed
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-36 of 75
by Contractor, covering the Work completed as of the date of the Request and accompanied
by such supporting documentation as is required by the Agreement Documents and also
as City may reasonably require. A Contractor Payment Request will not be considered
complete unless it is accompanied by an updated Project Schedule and a certification that
the on-site, red lined, as built Drawings are up to date. If payment is requested on the basis
of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably,
securely stored at the Site or at another location (such as a bonded warehouse) agreed to
in writing, the Contractor Payment Request must also be accompanied by such data,
satisfactory to City, as will establish City's title to the material and equipment and protect
City's interest therein, including applicable insurance. Each subsequent Contractor Payment
Request must include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments
received on account of the Work have been applied to discharge in full all of Contractor's
obligations reflected in prior Contractor Payment Requests.
8.1.3
Except for Work performed under a JOC Agreement, the Contracting Agency will retain 10
percent of all estimates as a guarantee for complete performance of the Agreement in
accordance with Arizona Revised Statutes Section 34-221 or 34-607. The Contractor may
elect to deposit securities in lieu of retention in accordance with Arizona Revised Statutes
Section 34-221, Paragraph C.5. or 34-607, Paragraph B.5.
8.1.4
The payment process functions as follows: Prior to the payment cycle date, Contractor must
send a draft Contractor Payment Request to Project Manager. The Project Team will review
the Request and agree upon any necessary adjustments. Contractor must certify the final
Request by signing and returning to Project Manager.
8.1.5
When construction of the Project is fifty percent (50%) completed, Contractor may
request payment of one-half of the retention pursuant to A.R.S. § 34-609(B)(3), subject to all
of
rights to withhold or offset payments, and other rights of City, under the Agreement.
8.1.6
City reserves the right under A.R.S. § 34-609(B)(3) to reinstate the ten percent (10%) retention
if City determines that satisfactory progress is not being made.
8.1.7
.
8.1.7.1
Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered
by any Contractor Payment Request, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass
to City at the time of payment, free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests, and
encumbrances, provided that this will not preclude the Contractor from installing metering
devices or other equipment of utility companies or municipalities, the title of which is
commonly retained by the utility company or municipality.
8.1.7.2
No materials, supplies, or equipment for the Work under this Agreement will be purchased
subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contract or other agreement by
which an interest therein, or any part thereof, is retained by the seller or supplier.
8.1.7.3
Nothing contained in this Section will defeat or impair the right of such persons furnishing
materials or labor under any bond given by the Contractor for their protection, or any right
under any law permitting such persons to look to funds due the Contractor in the hands of
the City. The provisions of this Section must be inserted in all subcontracts and material
agreements, and notices of its provision must be given to all persons furnishing materials
for the Work when no formal agreement is entered into for such materials.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-37 of 75
8.2
PAYMENT UPON SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
8.2.1
No payment will be made upon Substantial Completion, except for a regularly-scheduled
monthly progress payment, as allowed by Section 8.2.2.
8.2.2
No further payments will be made to Contractor until Final Acceptance.
8.3
FINAL PAYMENT
8.3.1
Subject to all of
rights to withhold or offset payment, and other rights under the
Agreement, Final Payment including remaining retainage will be paid only after:
a.
Work has been fully completed (including completion of all incorrect or
incomplete work items) and the written Final Acceptance has been issued by
City;
b.
Necessary operating manuals, any excess materials and supplies necessary
for matching
materials
and
supplies
incorporated
into
the
Work,
acceptable sewer video results
(if applicable), and complete
-
Drawings (including the Building Information Model, if required by the
Agreement Documents) have been delivered to City, as specified in this
Section 8.3;
c.
Full and unconditional lien waivers and releases by Contractor and any
person performing labor or supplying material, machinery, fixtures, or tools
for the Work have been delivered to Contractor;
d.
All conditions and requirements imposed by City or any financing entity
for the corresponding disbursement have been met; and
e.
Contractor delivers to City a Contractor Payment Request requesting Final
Payment.
8.3.2
Contractor must also submit a signed copy of
Affidavit Regarding Settlement
of Claims, Appendix 3 to these General Conditions, and Certificate of Completion, Appendix 7
to these General Conditions, prior to Final Payment.
8.3.3
In addition, if required under the Project Specific Special Provisions, Contractor must
compile a complete equipment list and maintenance manual to be submitted to City
as a precondition to Final Payment. The list must include the following items for all
equipment supplied under the Plumbing, Electrical, Air Conditioning, Elevator, and other
Special Equipment Specifications:
a.
Name, Model and Manufacturer.
b.
Complete parts lists and Drawings.
c.
Local source of supply for replacement parts along with
telephone
numbers.
d.
Local service organizations serving the equipment and their telephone
numbers.
e.
All
tags,
inspection
slips,
instruction
packages,
etc.,
removed
from
equipment must be
properly identified as to pieces of equipment from
which they were taken.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-38 of 75
8.3.4
Contractor must also deliver to City, prior to Final Payment, one (1)
digital (in the format
specified by City), and if requested by City, one (1) hard copy, of any
applicable
Maintenance manuals. Each manual must include all
operation and
maintenance instructions and
-
Drawings with the list herein specified. It must also
include all other diagrams and instructions necessary to properly operate and maintain the
equipment, the name, address and telephone number of Contractor and all Subcontractors
involved.
8.4
CITY
RIGHT TO WITHHOLD PAYMENT
City may withhold payment to such extent as may be necessary in
opinion to protect
City from loss for which Contractor is responsible, including, without limitation, if any of
the following conditions exist:
a.
Defective Work not remedied;
b.
Third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of
such claims unless security acceptable to City is provided by Contractor;
c.
Failure of Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for
labor, materials or equipment;
d.
Reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid
balance of the Agreement Price;
e.
Damage to City or another Contractor;
f.
Reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the
Agreement Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to
cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay;
g.
Failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Agreement Documents;
or
h.
Contractor is in default of any of its other obligations under the Agreement
Documents.
8.5
JOINT/DIRECT CHECKS
To promote the timely completion and progress of the Work or when appropriate and
necessary, payments to Contractor may be made jointly to Contractor and its employees,
agents, Subcontractors and suppliers, or any of them. For federally funded agreements,
see federal provisions for additional requirements for the joint check process.
8.6
PAYMENT NOT A WAIVER
No payment (nor use or occupancy of the Project by City) will be deemed acceptance or
approval of the Work or as a waiver of any claims, rights, or remedies of City.
8.7
LIENS AND BOND CLAIMS
Contractor must make all payments, in the time required, of all labor and materials
furnished to Contractor in the course of the Work and must promptly furnish evidence of
such payments as City may require. Contractor must pay when due all claims arising out of
performance of the Work covered by this Agreement for which a lien may be filed either
against the real estate or leasehold interest of City, or against payments due from City to
Contractor, or for which a claim may be made against any payment or performance bond
or both. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor agrees that no liens or other
claims in the nature of a lien against the real estate, leasehold, or other interest of City,
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-39 of 75
against payment due from City to Contractor, or against any payment or performance
bond, must be filed or made in connection with the Work by any party
who has supplied
professional services, labor, materials, machinery, fixtures, tools, or equipment used in or
in connection with the performance of this Agreement, and Contractor agrees to remove or
to cause to be removed any such liens or claims in the nature of a lien or bond claim within
10 Days upon receiving notice or obtaining actual knowledge of the existence of such liens
or claim. In addition, Contractor agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold harmless City
from and against any and all such liens and claims. This paragraph does not apply to claims
and liens of Contractor due to non-payment for work performed.
8.8
FINANCIAL RECORDKEEPING AND CITY
AUDIT RIGHT
8.8.1
Records for all Agreements between City and Contractor must, upon reasonable notice, be
open to inspection and subject to audit, scanning, and reproduction during normal
business working hours. Such audits may be performed by any
representative or any
outside representative engaged by City for the purpose of examining such records. City or
its designee may conduct such audits or inspections throughout the term of this Agreement
and for a period of five years after
Final Payment or longer if required by law.
representatives may (without limitation) conduct verifications such as counting employees
at the Site, witnessing the distribution of payroll, verifying information and amounts through
interviews and written confirmations with Contractor employees,
field and agency labor,
Subcontractors, and vendors.
8.8.2
must include any and all information, materials and data of every kind
and
character,
including
without
limitation,
records,
books,
papers,
documents,
subscriptions, recordings, agreements, purchase orders, leases, contracts, commitments,
arrangements, notes daily diaries, superintendent reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers and
memoranda, and any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that
may in
judgment have any
bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or
obligations under or covered by anyAgreement Document. Such records must include (hard
copy, as well as computer readable data if it can be made available), written policies and
procedures; time sheets; payroll registers; payroll records;
cancelled payroll checks;
subcontract files (including proposals of successful and unsuccessful bidders, bid recaps,
negotiation notes, etc.); original bid estimates; estimating work sheets; correspondence;
Change Order files (including documentation covering negotiated settlements);
back-
charge logs and supporting documentation; invoices and related payment documentation;
general ledger, information detailing cash and trade discounts earned, insurance rebates
and dividends; and any other Contractor records which may have a bearing on matters of
interest to City or the Project in connection with
dealings with City or the
Project (all foregoing
hereinafter referred to as
to the extent necessary to
adequately permit evaluation and verification of any or all of the following:
a.
Compliance with Agreement requirements for deliverables;
b.
Compliance with approved Plans and Specifications;
c.
Compliance with § 14.9 below;
d.
Compliance with Agreement provisions regarding the pricing of Change
Orders;
e.
Accuracy of Contractor representations regarding the pricing of invoices; or
f.
Accuracy of Contractor representations related to claims submitted by
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-40 of 75
Contractor or any of their employees.
8.8.3
Contractor must require all payees (examples of payees include Subcontractors, Suppliers,
Insurance Carriers, etc.) to comply with the provisions of this Section by including the
requirements hereof in a written agreement between Contractor and payee. Contractor will
ensure that all payees (including those entering into lump sum agreements) have the same
right to audit provisions contained in this Agreement included in their agreements with
Contractor.
8.8.4
must have
must be allowed to interview all current or former
employees to discuss matters pertinent to the performance of this Agreement and must be
provided adequate and appropriate work space, in order to conduct audits in compliance
with this Section.
8.8.5
If an audit inspection or examination in accordance with this Section, discloses overpricing
or overcharges to City (of any nature) by Contractor or
Subcontractors in excess
of $100,000 in addition to making adjustments for the overcharges, the reasonable actual
cost of
audit must be reimbursed to City by Contractor. Any adjustments or payments
which must be made as a result of any such audit or inspection of
invoices or
records must be made within a reasonable amount of time (not to exceed 90 Days) from
presentation of
findings to Contractor.
8.8.6
In addition to the normal paperwork documentation Contractor typically furnishes to City,
Contractor agrees to furnish, upon written request from City, any of the documentation
necessary for City to exercise its audit rights under this Section 8.8 in computer readable file
formats (Word, Excel, or .pdf), as City may designate.
8.8.7
City, its authorized representative, and the appropriate agency, reserve the right to
audit
records in compliance with local, state or federal policies, statutes
or at
discretion, within three (3) years of Final Acceptance of the Work.
SECTION 9 - CHANGES TO THE AGREEMENT
9.1
FIELD ORDERS
City may authorize minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment in the
Agreement Price or the Agreement Times, which are consistent with the overall intent of
the Agreement Documents. These may be accomplished by a written Field Order on the
standard form approved and executed by City. Such Field Orders must be binding and
Contractor must perform the change promptly. If Contractor believes that a Field Order
justifies an increase in the Agreement Price or Agreement Time, Contractor may make a
claim therefor as provided in Section 7.2.
9.2
EXTRA WORK/CHANGES IN THE WORK
9.2.1
City reserves the right to make such changes in the Plans and Specifications for the Work,
as it may deem appropriate and any such change as set forth in a written Change Order
must be deemed a part of this Agreement as if originally incorporated herein.
9.2.2
In the event City and Contractor cannot agree on the terms of a Change Order, or
when circumstances otherwise require, the Project Manager has the authority to direct the
Contractor to perform extra work, if the work in question is an item not provided for in the
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-41 of 75
Agreement as awarded. The Project Manager will have the authority to determine, based
upon factual evidence presented by the Contractor, whether the work in question is an
item not provided for in the Agreement as awarded. If the Project Manager directs the
Contractor to perform extra work, the Project
instructions will include a price
that the Contractor cannot exceed in charging the City for the extra work. Upon receipt of
the Project
directions to perform extra work,
the Contractor must promptly
proceed with the extra work and document the actual cost thereof.
right to
payment for extra work will be determined under Subsection 9.2.4 below. The Contractor is
responsible to manage the extra work to ensure that the price limits set by the Project
Manager are not exceeded. Contractor must perform the extra work and submit
documentation for the actual cost of the extra work to the City. A Change Order will be
issued to cover this work.
9.2.3
Contractor will not be entitled to payment for extra work unless a written Change Order, in
form and content prescribed by City, has been executed by City. On all requests for Change
Orders, Contractor must specify the increased or decreased costs and whether it
believes any extensions of time will be necessary to complete its Work as modified by the
Change Order. If extra work is performed under Subsection 9.2.2 above, a corresponding
Change Order will be prepared, approved and processed by City before payment can be
made to Contractor.
9.2.4
In general, pricing for Change Orders will include the same mark-up percentages that were
in effect when the Agreement was awarded. The cost or credit to the City resulting from a
change in the Work is subject to Appendix 1 (Policy Statement for Calculating Delays and
Damages) and will be determined, based on the type of pricing for the Agreement involved,
as follows:
a.
By mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized in a form acceptable
to City;
b.
By unit prices stated in the Agreement Documents;
c.
When the City determines that a Unit Price Book Job Order associated with
a Job Order Agreement requires a Change Order, by using the same Total
Cost Data and CCI that are in effect when the Change Order is anticipated to
be issued; or
d.
By actual cost and a percentage fee covering overhead and profit, as follows:
(i)
Contractor will perform the extra work and be compensated for actual
cost of labor, materials and equipment.
(ii)
Contractor will have the right to add the fee percentage applicable
to the Work under the Agreement, or if no such fee has been agreed
to by the parties, not more
than
five
percent
(5%)
to
the
prices for authorized extra work performed solely
by Subcontractors. Such percentage will include all of
charges for overhead, profit, administration and supervision.
(iii)
Contractor or Subcontractor will have the right to add the fee
percentage applicable
to Work under the Agreement for self-
performed extra work, or if no such fee has been agreed to by the
parties,
or
maximum total allowable
additions for overhead, profit, administration and supervision will
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-42 of 75
not exceed ten percent (10%) of actual verifiable labor, materials
and equipment for such self- performed extra work.
9.2.5
Any agreement which modifies the terms of the Agreement (including Change Orders)
will be approved in writing by the Project Manager. Once properly executed by both
parties, these modifications to the Agreement will have the same effect as if they had been
included in the original Agreement.
9.3
ACCURACY OF CHANGE ORDER PRICING INFORMATION
9.3.1
Subject to Sections 9.3.2 through 9.3.4, signature by the contracting parties constitutes full
accord and satisfaction between City and Contractor for all costs, damages, and expenses
of whatever kind of nature, including delay, impact or acceleration damages, which may be
occasioned by a Change Order of other modification of the Agreement agreed to in writing.
9.3.2
Accurate Change Order Pricing Information: Contractor agrees that it is responsible for
submitting accurate cost and pricing data to City to support its Fixed Price, Unit Price, or
Cost Plus Change Order Proposals or other Agreement Price adjustments under the
Agreement. Contractor further agrees to submit Change Order proposals with cost and
pricing data which is accurate, complete, current, and in accordance with the terms of
the Agreement with respect to pricing of change orders. Contractor agrees that any
-
out
on Change Orders will accrue 100% to Owner.
-out
are defined
as any savings negotiated by the Contractor with
a Subcontractor or a Material Supplier
after receiving approval of a Change Order amount that was designated to be paid to a
specific Subcontractor or Supplier for the Approved Change Order work.
9.3.3
Right to Verify Change Order Pricing Information: Contractor agrees that City, through
its designated representative, will have the right to examine, copy, and scan the records
of the Contractor, Subcontractor or Sub-
records (during the Agreement
period and up to three years after final payment is made on the Agreement) to verify
the accuracy and appropriateness of the pricing data used to price all Change Order
proposals or claims. Contractor agrees that if City determines the cost and pricing data
submitted (whether approved
or not) was inaccurate, incomplete, not current, or not in
compliance with the terms of the Agreement
regarding pricing of Change Orders, an
appropriate Agreement Price adjustment will be made. Such post-approval Contact Price
adjustments will apply to all levels of contractors and Subcontractors and to all types of
Change Order proposals, specifically including Fixed Price, Unit Price, and Cost Plus Change
Orders.
9.3.4
Requirements for Detailed Change Order Pricing Information: Contractor agrees to
provide a detailed breakdown of allowable labor and labor burden cost (i.e., base wage
rate of applicable classifications of workers, payroll taxes, and insurance and benefits
costs). This information will be used to evaluate the potential cost of labor and labor burden
related to Change Order work. It is intended that this information represent an accurate
estimate of the
actual labor and labor burden cost components. Information
is not intended to establish fixed billing or Change Order pricing labor rates. However, at the
time Change Orders are priced, the submitted cost data for labor rates may be used to price
Change Order work. The accuracy of any such agreed upon labor rate cost components
used to price Change Orders will be subject to later audit.
Approved
Change Order
amounts
may be adjusted
later
to
correct
the
impact
of
inaccurate labor
cost
components if the agreed upon labor cost components are determined to be inaccurate.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-43 of 75
9.4
EMERGENCIES
In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, Contractor will act, at its
discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Any change in the Agreement Price
or Agreement Time resulting from emergency work will be determined as provided in this
Section.
9.5
DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS
9.5.1
If Differing Site Conditions are encountered at the Project Site, then notice by the observing
party mustbegiventothe otherpartypromptlybefore conditions are disturbed(tothe extent
practicable) and in no event later than 14 Days after first observance of the conditions.
City will promptly investigate such conditions and, if City determines that Differing Site
Conditions exist and they materially cause an increase in the cost of, or time required for,
performance of any part of the Work, Contractor will be entitled to equitable adjustment
in the Agreement Price or Construction Schedule (and other time requirements), or both.
If it is determined by City that the conditions at the Project Site are not Differing Site
Conditions and no change is justified, then City will sonotifyContractor in writing,stating the
reasons. Claims in opposition to such determination
must be made within 14 Days after
City has given notice of its decision. If City and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment
in the Agreement Price or Construction Schedule (and other time requirements), the
adjustment may be submitted to dispute resolution as provided these GeneralConditions.
9.6
CHANGES IN LAWS, REGULATIONS, OR LEGAL REQUIREMENTS OR TAXES
In the event of a material change in applicable Laws, Regulations, or Legal Requirements, or
taxes subsequent to the date of the Agreement by the parties, Contractor may be entitled
to a Change Order, in
discretion, to the extent Contractor can document to the
satisfaction of City that
such change significantly increases
actual cost of
performance of the Work.
SECTION 10 -SUSPENSION AND TERMINATION
10.1
SUSPENSION
City may suspend the Agreement
Specifications § 105.1 and 108.7.
10.2
TERMINATION BY THE CITY FOR CAUSE
10.2.1
MAG Specifications § 108.11 applies to the Agreement.
10.2.2
City may also terminate the Agreement if City determines, in its sole discretion that
Contractor has:
a.
After prior written notice, refused or failed to supply enough properly skilled
workers or proper materials;
b.
After prior written notice, failed to make payment to Subcontractors for
materials or labor in accordance with the
respective agreements between
Contractor and the Subcontractors;
c.
After prior written notice, disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, regulations or
orders of a public authority having jurisdiction;
d.
After prior written notice, repeatedly failed to comply with written directives
from City;
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-44 of 75
e.
Is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent;
f.
Made a general assignment for the benefit of creditors;
g.
Appointed a trustee or receiver for itself or any of its property;
h.
Filed a petition to take advantage of any debtor's act, or to reorganize under
the bankruptcy or similar laws; or
i.
Otherwise breached a provision of the Agreement Documents or any other
Agreement between City and Contractor.
10.2.3
When any of the above reasons exist, City may terminate the Agreement, without prejudice
to any other rights or remedies of City, after giving Contractor and
surety, if
any, 7
Days written notice of
intent to terminate the Agreement and
failure to cure any such reasons. Upon such termination, City may: (1) take possession of
the Site and of all materials thereon owned by Contractor; or (2) finish theWork bywhatever
reasonable method City may deem expedient. When City terminates the Agreement for one
of the reasons state above, Contractor will not be entitled to receive further payment until
the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Agreement Price existing at the time of
such termination exceeds the costs and expenses of finishing the Work and any other
damages incurred by City, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such costs, expenses
and damages exceedsuchunpaid balance,Contractor must pay the difference to City. This
obligation for payment will survive termination of the Agreement.
10.3
TERMINATION BY CITY FOR CONVENIENCE
City may also terminate the Agreement at any time for its convenience upon 7 Days written
notice to Contractor specifying the termination date. In the event of termination which is
not the fault, in whole or in part, of Contractor, City will pay to Contractor only such
compensation, including reimbursable expenses, due for Work properly performed on
the Project prior to the termination date. Upon any termination of the Agreement, no
further payments will be due from City to Contractor.
10.4
A.R.S. § 38-511
The Agreement is subject to, and may be terminated by City in accordance with, the
provisions of A.R.S. § 38-511.
SECTION 11 -INSURANCE AND BONDS
11.1
INSURANCEREQUIREMENTS
11.1.1
After Agreement award, the Contractor must furnish the City a certificate of insurance on a
standard insurance industry ACORD form. The ACORD form must be issued by an insurance
company authorized to transact business in the State of Arizona possessing a current A.M.
Best, Inc. rating of A-7, or better and legally authorized to do business in the State of Arizona
with policies and forms satisfactory to City. Provided, however, the A.M. Best rating
requirement may
11.1.2
The Contractor and any of its Subcontractors must procure and maintain, until all of their
obligations have been discharged, including any warranty periods under this Agreement are
satisfied, the insurances set forth below.
11.1.3
The insurance requirements set forth below are minimum requirements for this Agreement
and in no way limit the indemnity covenants contained in this Agreement.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-45 of 75
11.1.4
The City in no way warrants that the minimum insurance limits contained in this Agreement
are sufficient to protect Contractor from liabilities that might arise out of the performance
of the Agreement services under this Agreement by Contractor, its agents, representatives,
employees, or Subcontractors and the Contractor is free to purchase any additional
insurance as may be determined necessary.
11.1.5
Failure to demand evidence of full compliance with the insurance requirements in this
Agreement or failure to identify any insurance deficiency will not relieve the Contractor
from, nor will it be considered a waiver of its obligation to maintain the required insurance
at all times during the performance of this Agreement.
11.1.6
Use of Subcontractors: If any Work is subcontracted in any way, the Contractor must
execute a written agreement with Subcontractor containing the same Indemnification
Clause and Insurance Requirements as the City requires of the Contractor in this
Agreement. The Contractor is responsible for executing the Agreement with the
Subcontractor and obtaining Certificates of Insurance and verifying the insurance
requirements.
11.2
MINIMUM SCOPE AND LIMITS OF INSURANCE
11.2.1
The Contractor must provide coverage with limits of liability not less than those stated
below.
11.2.1.1
Commercial General Liability-Occurrence Form. Contractor
form Commercial General Liability insurance with a limit of not less than $2,000,000 for each
occurrence, $4,000,000 aggregate. Said insurance must also include coverage for products
and completed operations, independent contractors, personal injury and advertising injury.
If any Excess insurance is utilized to fulfill the requirements of this paragraph, the Excess
ge scope than underlying
insurance.
11.2.1.2
Automobile Liability-Any Automobile or Owned, Hired and Non-Owned Vehicles. Contractor
must maintain Business/Automobile Liability insurance with a limit of $1,000,000 each
accident on Contractor owned, hired, and non-owned vehicles assigned to or used in the
performance under this Agreement. If any Excess or Umbrella insurance is utilized to fulfill
11.2.1.3
Workers Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance. Contractor must maintain
Workers Compensation insurance to cover obligations imposed by federal and state
statutes having jurisdiction of Contractor employees engaged in the performance of Work
under this Agreement and must also
$1,000,000 for each accident and $1,000,000 disease for each employee.
11.2.1.4
. The Contractor bears all responsibility for loss
to all equipment or Work under construction. Unless waived in writing by the City the
Contractor
on the entire Work until completed and accepted by the City. This insurance will be Special
Causes of Loss policy form, (minimally including perils of fire, flood, lightning, explosion,
windstorm and hail, smoke, aircraft and vehicles, riot and civil commotion, theft, vandalism,
malicious mischief, and collapse), completed value, replacement cost policy form equal to
the Agreement Price and all subsequent modifications. The
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-46 of 75
Risk/Installation Floater insurance must be primary and not contributory.
a.
surance must provide coverage from the
time any covered property comes under the
control and or
responsibility, and continue without interruption during course of
construction, renovation and or installation, including any time during which
any Project property or equipment is in transit, off Site, or while on Site for
future use or installation. Insured property must include, but not be limited
to, scaffolding, false work, and temporary buildings at the Site. This
insurance must also cover the cost of removing debris, including demolition
as may be legally required by operation of any law, ordinance, regulation or
code.
b.
The Contractor must also purchase and maintain Boiler and Machinery
insurance cited above if the Work to be performed involves any exposures
or insurable property normally covered under a Boiler and Machinery
insurance policy or made necessary as required by law or testing
requirements in the performance of this Agreement. The Contractor will be
responsible for any and all deductibles under these policies and the
Contractor waives all rights of recovery and subrogation against the City
under the Contractor-
herein.
c.
whichever of the following first occurs: (i) final payment has been made; or,
(ii) until no person or entity, other than the City, has an insurable interest in
the property required to be covered.
d.
the insurance will not be canceled or lapse because of any partial use or
occupancy by the City.
e.
The Builders Risk/Installation Floater insurance must include as named
insureds, the City, the Contractor, and all tiers of Subcontractors and others
with an insurable interest in the Work who will be named as additional
insureds unless they are able to provide the same level of coverage with the
City and Contractor named as additional insureds. Certificates must contain
a provision that the insurance will not be canceled or materially altered
without at least 30 Days advance notice to the City. The City must also be
f.
The Builders Risk/Installation Floater insurance must be written using the
Special Causes of Loss policy form, replacement cost basis.
g.
All rights of subrogation under the Builders Risk/Installation Floater
insurance are, by this Agreement, waived against the City, its officers,
officials, agents and employees.
h.
The Contractor is responsible for payment of all deductibles under the
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-47 of 75
11.2.1.5
Pollution Liability Insurance (Including Errors and Omissions). For Job Orders, Pollution
Liability Insurance is only required if applicable and determined on a project specific basis.
Contractor must maintain Pollution Liability Insurance with a limit of not less than
$5,000,000 per loss, $5,000,000 aggregate for losses caused by pollution conditions
including coverage for bodily injury, property damage, defense costs, clean-up costs, and
completed operations that arise from the operations of Contractor as described in this
Agreement.
a.
The policy must provide for complete professional service coverage,
including coverage for pollution liability that is a result of a breach of
professional duties.
b.
The policy must provide for protection again claims for third-party bodily
injury, property damage, or environmental damage caused for pollution
conditions resulting from general contracting activities for which Contractor
is legally liable.
c.
The policy must provide for cleanup costs when mandated by governmental
entities, when required by law, or as a result of third-party claims.
d.
Completed Operations Coverage must be kept in place for up to the statute
of repose.
e.
The policy must be endorsed to include the following additional insured
volunteers must be named as additional insureds with respect to liability
arising out of the activities perform
f.
If Work under this Agreement requires the transportation of any hazardous
material or regulated substances, Contractor must carry Auto Liability with a
CA 9948 endorsement or equivalent.
g.
If Work under this Agreement requires the disposal of any hazardous
materials from the job site, Contractor must obtain a certificate of insurance
for Pollution Legal Liability from the disposal site operator with a limit of not
less than $5,000,000 per loss, $5,000,000 aggregate.
11.3
ADDITIONAL POLICY PROVISIONS REQUIRED
11.3.1
Self-Insured Retentions or Deductibles. Any self-insured retentions and deductibles must
be declared and approved by the City. If not approved, the City may require that the insurer
reduce or eliminate any deductible or self-insured retentions with respect to the City, its
officers, officials, agents, employees, and volunteers.
11.3.2
The Contractor
insurance must contain broad form contractual liability coverage.
11.3.3
The Contractor's insurance coverage must be primary insurance with respect to the City, its
officers, officials, agents, and employees. Any insurance or self-insurance maintained by
the City, its officers, officials, agents, and employees will be in excess of the coverage
provided by the Contractor and must not contribute to it.
11.3.4
The Contractor's insurance must apply separately to each insured against whom claim is
made or suit is brought, except with respect to the limits of the insurer's liability.
11.3.5
Coverage provided by the Contractor must not be limited to the liability assumed under the
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-48 of 75
indemnification provisions of this Agreement.
11.3.6
The policies must contain a severability of interest clause and waiver of subrogation against
the City, its officers, officials, agents, and employees, for losses arising from Work
performed by the Contractor for the City.
11.3.7
The Contractor, its successors and or assigns, are required to maintain Commercial General
Liability insurance as specified in this Agreement for a minimum period of 3 years following
completion and acceptance of the Work. The Contractor must submit a Certificate of
Insurance evidencing Commercial General Liability insurance during this 3 year period
containing all the Agreement insurance requirements, including naming the required
Additional Insureds set forth herein.
11.3.8
If a Certificate of Insurance is submitted as verification of coverage, the City will reasonably
rely upon the Certificate of Insurance as evidence of coverage but this acceptance and
reliance will not waive or alter in any way the insurance requirements or obligations of this
Agreement.
11.3.9
Insurance Cancellation During Agreement Term.
11.3.9.1
If any of the required policies expire during the life of this Agreement, the Contractor must
forward renewal or replacement Certificates to the City within 10 Days after the renewal
date containing all the required insurance provisions.
11.3.9.2
Each insurance policy required by the insurance provisions of this Agreement must provide
the required coverage and must not be suspended, voided or canceled except after 30 Days
prior written notice has been given to the City, except when cancellation is for non-payment
of premium, then 10 Days prior notice may be given. Such notice must be sent directly to
Chandler Law-Risk Management Department, Post Office Box 4008, Mailstop 628, Chandler,
Arizona 85225. If any insurance company refuses to provide the require notice, the
Contractor or its insurance broker must notify the City of any cancellation, suspension, non-
renewal of any insurance within 7 D
11.3.10
City as Additional Insured. The above-referenced policies are to contain, or be endorsed to
contain, the following provisions:
11.3.10.1
The Commercial General Liability and Automobile Liability policies are to contain, or be
endorsed to contain, the following provisions: The City, its officers, officials, agents, and
employees are additional insureds with respect to liability arising out of activities performed
by, or on behalf of, the Contractor including the City's general supervision of the Contractor;
Products and Completed Operations of the Contractor; and automobiles owned, leased,
hired, or borrowed by the Contractor.
11.3.10.2
The City, its officers, officials, agents, and employees must be additional insureds to the full
limits of liability purchased by the Contractor even if those limits of liability are in excess of
those required by this Agreement.
11.4
BONDS AND OTHER PERFORMANCE SECURITY
11.4.1
After Agreement award, Contractor must provide a Performance Bond and a Payment
Bond, each in an amount equal to the full amount of the Agreement Price.
11.4.2
Each such bond must be executed by a surety company or companies holding a Certificate
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-49 of 75
of Authority to transact surety business in the State of Arizona, issued by the Director of the
Arizona Department of Insurance and must be named in the current list of "Companies
Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable
Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff Bureau of
Accounts, U.S. Treasury Department. A copy of the Certificate of Authority must accompany
the bonds. The Certificate must have been issued or updated within two (2) years prior to
the execution of this Agreement. The bonds must be written or countersigned by an
authorized representative of the surety who is either a resident of the state of Arizona or
whose principal office is maintained in this state, as by law required.
11.4.3
The bonds must be made payable and be acceptable to City. The bond forms for the
performance and payment bonds must be in the forms required under A.R.S. § 34-221, et.
Seq., as in Appendices 4 and 5 of these General Conditions.
11.4.4
Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds
covering payment of obligations arising under the Agreement Documents, Contractor must
promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or must permit a copy to be made.
11.4.5
All bonds submitted for this Project must be provided by a company which has been rated AM
Best rating of A- or better for the prior four quarters by the latest edition of the
Key Rating Guide
published by the A.M. Best Company.
11.4.6
Personal or individual bonds are not acceptable.
11.4.7
If the surety on any Bond furnished by Contractor is declared a bankrupt or becomes
the Project is located, or it ceases to meet the requirements of this Section 11.4, Contractor
must within 5 Days thereafter substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be
acceptable to City.
SECTION 12 - INDEMNIFICATION
12.1
To the extent permitted by law, the Contractor and its owners, officers, directors, agents,
employees, and subconsultants (collectively "lndemnitor") must indemnify, save, and hold
harmless the City and its officers, officials, agents, and employees (collectively "lndemnitee")
from any and all claims, actions, liabilities, damages, losses, or expenses (including court
costs, attorneys' fees, and costs of claim processing, investigation, and litigation) (collectively
"Claims") caused or alleged to be caused, in whole or in part, by the negligent, reckless,
wrongful, or willful acts, errors, or omissions of Indemnitor in connection with this
Agreement. This indemnity includes any Claim or amount arising out of or recovered under
workers' compensation laws or on account of Indemnitor's failure to conform to any federal,
state, or local law, statute, ordinance, rule, regulation, or court decree. Indemnitor must
indemnify lndemnitee from and against any and all Claims, except those arising solely from
lndemnitee's own negligent, reckless, wrongful, or willful acts, errors, or omissions.
Indemnitor is responsible for primary loss investigation, defense, and judgment costs where
this indemnification applies. In consideration of the award of this Agreement, Indemnitor
agrees to waive all rights of subrogation against lndemnitee for losses arising from or
related to this Agreement. Indemnitor's obligations under this provision survive the
termination or expiration of this Agreement.
SECTION 13 -DISPUTE RESOLUTION
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-50 of 75
13.1
All disputes arising out of or relating to the Agreement, the Work or the Project, other than
termination under Section 10, will be resolved pursuant to the Dispute Resolution
process set forth in Appendix 6 of these General Conditions, and not pursuant to MAG
Specifications § 110.
13.2
Contractor agrees that during any dispute between the parties, Contractor will continue to
perform its obligations under the Agreement until such dispute is resolved.
13.3
Notwithstanding any other provision in this Agreement, City has the right to immediately file
in court and pursue an action for a temporary restraining order and injunctive relief against
Contractor if City determines that such action is necessary to protect its interests under the
Agreement, to obtain specific performance of any provision of the Agreement, to advance
the completion of the Project, or to protect health, welfare and safety.
SECTION 14 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
14.1
AGREEMENT DOCUMENTS
14.1.1
The Agreement Documents are intended to permit the parties to complete the Work
and all obligations required by the Agreement Documents within the Agreement Times for
the Agreement Price. The Agreement Documents are intended to be complementary and
interpreted in harmony so as to
avoid conflict, with words and phrases interpreted in a
manner consistent with construction and design industry standards.
14.1.2
It is the intent of the Agreement Documents to describe a functionally complete Project (or
part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Agreement Documents. Any labor,
documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may reasonably be inferred from the
Agreement Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to
produce the intended result must be provided by Contractor whether or not specifically
called for at no additional cost to City.
14.1.3
The Agreement Documents establish the rights and obligations of the parties and include
the Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Agreement Documents), Contractor's Bid or
Proposal (including documentation accompanying the Bid and any post-Bid documentation
submitted prior to Agreement award) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the
accepted Project Schedule, the Notice to Proceed, the Performance Bond, the Payment
Bond, Project Design, Engineering and Specifications, these General Conditions, the Project
Specific Special Provisions, Technical Specifications, Agreement Drawings, as the same may
be more specifically identified in the Agreement, Change Orders, Work Change Directives,
Field Orders and the written interpretations and clarifications of the Design Professional or
City representative and Modifications issued after execution of the Agreement. Approved
Shop Drawings and the reports and drawings of subsurface and physical conditions are not
Agreement Documents.
14.1.4
In the event of any inconsistency, conflict, or ambiguity between or among the Agreement
Documents, the Agreement Documents will take precedence as follows from highest to
lowest: Change Orders, Addenda, Agreement, Project Specific Special Provisions, General
Conditions, Technical Specifications, Drawings/Plans, Chandler Amendments to MAG
Standard Specifications and Chandler Standard Details, and MAG Uniform Standard
Specifications and Details for Public Works Construction. If applicable to this Agreement,
Federal Provisions prevail.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-51 of 75
14.1.5
On the Drawings, given dimensions will take precedence over scaled measurements and
large scale drawings over small-scale drawings.
14.1.6
Clarifications and interpretations of the Agreement Documents will be issued by the Design
Professional through the City.
14.1.7
The headings used in this Agreement or any other Agreement Documents, are for ease of
reference only and must not in any way be construed to limit or alter the meaning of any
provision.
14.1.8
The Agreement Documents form the entire agreement between City and Contractor.
No oral representations or other agreements have been made by the parties except as
specifically stated in the Agreement Documents.
14.1.9
The Agreement Documents may not be changed, altered, or amended in any way except in
writing signed by a duly authorized representative of each party in the form of a Change
Order.
14.1.10
Re-Use of Documents. Neither Contractor nor any Subcontractor, manufacturer, fabricator,
supplier or distributor will have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the
Drawings, Specifications or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or
bearing the seal of the Design Professional; and they must not re-use any of them on
extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of City and the Design
Professional and specific written verification or adaptation by the Design Professional.
14.2
REFERENCE STANDARDS
14.2.1
Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society,
organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific
or by implication, will mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or
Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the
Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the
Agreement Documents.
14.2.2
The provisions of any such standard, specification, manual or code, or any instruction of a
Supplier will not change the duties or responsibilities of City, Contractor, Design
Professional or Project Manager, or any of their Subcontractors, consultants, agents, or
employees from those set forth in the Agreement Documents, nor will any such provision
or instruction assign to City, Contractor, Design Professional, or any of their agents, or
employees any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any
duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the
Agreement Documents.
14.3
COMPLIANCE WITH ARIZONA LAW AND FEDERAL LAW
14.3.1
Compliance with A.R.S. § 41-4401. Pursuant to the provisions of A.R.S. § 41-4401, the
Contractor hereby warrants to the City that the Contractor and each of its subcontractors
s that
relate to the immigration status of their employees and the requirement to use E-Verify set
forth in A.R.S. §23-214(A).
14.3.2
A breach of the Contractor Immigration Warranty constitutes a material breach of this
Agreement and subject to penalties up to and including termination of this Agreement.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-52 of 75
14.3.3
The City retains the legal right to inspect the papers of any Contractor or Subcontractor
employee who works on this Agreement to ensure that the Contractor or Subcontractor is
complying with the Contractor Immigration Warranty. The Contractor agrees to assist the
City in the conduct of any such inspections.
14.3.4
The City may, at its sole discretion, conduct random verifications of the employment records
of the Contractor and any Subcontractors to ensure compliance with Contractors
Immigration Warranty. The Contractor agrees to assist the City in performing any such
random verifications.
14.3.5
The provisions of this Article must be included in any agreement the Contractor enters into
with any and all of its subcontractors who provide services under this Agreement or any
by a contractor or subcontractor. Services include construction or maintenance of any
structure, building or transportation facility or improvement to real property.
14.4
HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
14.4.1
Contractor will not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered
or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or
identified in the Agreement Document to be within the scope of the Work. Contractor will
be responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created with any materials
brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom
Contractor is responsible.
14.4.2
If Contractor encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition or if Contractor or anyone
for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition.
Contractor must immediately:
a.
Secure or otherwise isolate such condition;
b.
Stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected
thereby; and
c.
Notify City and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing.
14.4.3
City will promptly retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective
action, if any.
14.4.4
Contractor will be responsible for any and all civil or criminal penalties, fines, damages, or
other charges imposed by any regulatory agency or court for sewage discharges that are in
violation of applicable statutes and laws and that are a result, direct or indirect, of work
performed under this Agreement. Contractor will also be responsible for reimbursement
to City for administration, reporting, and tracking expenses required as a result of any spill
event. In the event the regulatory agency or court imposes a probationary period,
Contractor must post bond for the probationary period to ensure that all such costs are
reimbursed to City. This responsibility will apply whether penalties are imposed directly on
Contractor or any of its Subcontractors, or the City of Chandler. Contractor must defend
and indemnify City against such penalties. Regulatory agencies may include, but are not
limited to, the Arizona Department of Environmental Quality (ADEQ) and the United States
Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA).
14.5
COOPERATION AND FURTHER DOCUMENTATION
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-53 of 75
Contractor agrees to provide City such other duly executed documents as may be
reasonably requested by City to implement the intent of the Agreement Documents.
14.6
ASSIGNMENT
Neither Contractor nor City will, without the written consent of the other assign, transfer or
sublet any portion of this Agreement or part of the Work or the obligations required by
the Agreement Documents, any such assignment will be void, will transfer no rights to the
purported assignee, and would be a material breach of the Agreement.
14.7
SUCCESSORS
Contractor and City intend that the provisions of the Agreement Documents are binding
upon the parties, their employees, agents, heirs, successors and assigns.
14.8
LAWFUL PRESENCE
Pursuant to A.R.S. §§ 1-501 and 1-502, City is prohibited from awarding an agreement to any
natural person who cannot establish that such person is lawfully present in the United
States. To establish lawful presence, a person must produce qualifying identification and
sign a City-provided affidavit affirming the identification provided is genuine. This
requirement will be imposed at the time of agreement award. This requirement does not
apply to business organizations such as corporations, partnerships, or limited liability
companies.
14.9
NO BOYCOTT OF ISRAEL CERTIFICATION
By Contractor's signature on this Agreement, Contractor certifies under A.R.S. § 35-393.01
that Contractor is not currently engaged in and for the duration of this Agreement will not
engage in a boycott of Israel.
14.10
NO THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY
Nothing under the Agreement Documents will be construed to give any rights or benefits
in the Agreement Documents to anyone other than City and Contractor, and all duties and
responsibilities undertaken pursuant to the Agreement Documents will be for the sole and
exclusive benefit of City and Contractor and not for the benefit of any other party, unless
otherwise expressly set forth in the Agreement Documents.
14.11
GOVERNING LAW AND VENUE
The Agreement and all Agreement Documents will be deemed to be made under, and will
be construed in accordance with and governed by the laws of the State of Arizona without
regard to the conflicts or choice of law provisions thereof. Any court action to enforce any
provision of the Agreement or to obtain any remedy with respect hereto must be brought
in the Superior Court, Maricopa County, Arizona, and for this purpose, each party hereby
expressly and irrevocably consents to the jurisdiction and venue of such Court.
14.12
SEVERABILITY
If any provision of the Agreement Documents or the application thereof to any person or
circumstance will be invalid, illegal or unenforceable to any extent, the remainder of the
affected provision, the remainder of the Agreement Documents, and the application
thereof will not be affected and will be enforceable to the fullest extent permitted by law.
14.13
LEGALREQUIREMENTS
At all times relevant to its entry into this Agreement and performance of the Services and
the Work, Contractor must fully comply with all Laws, Regulations, or Legal Requirements
applicable to City, the Project, and the Agreement, including, without limitation, those set
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-54 of 75
forth on Exhibit C of the Agreement.
14.14
PARTIAL INVALIDITY
If any provision of the Agreement is held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be invalid,
void or unenforceable, the remaining provisions will nevertheless continue in full force
without being impaired or invalidated in any way.
14.15
ATTORNEYS' FEES
Should either party to the Agreement bring an action to enforce any provision of the
Agreement, the prevailing party will be entitled to recover reasonable attorneys' fees and
costs in connection therewith.
14.16
CONFLICT OF INTEREST
14.16.1
Contractor agrees to disclose any financial or economic interest with the Project property,
or any
property affected by the Project, existing prior to the execution of the Agreement.
Further, Contractor agrees to disclose any financial or economic interest with the Project
property, or any property affected by the Project, if Contractor gains such interest during
the course of this Agreement. If Contractor gains financial or economic interest in the
Project during the course of this Agreement,
this may be grounds for terminating this
Agreement. Any decision to terminate the Agreement must be at the sole discretion of City.
14.16.2
Contractor will not engage the services on this Agreement of any present City employee who
was involved as a decision maker in the selection or approval processes, or who negotiated
or approved billings or Agreement Modifications for this Agreement.
14.16.3
Contractor agrees that it will not perform services on this Project for a contractor,
subcontractor, or any supplier, not covered under this Agreement.
14.17
INDEPENDENTCONTRACTOR
Contractor is and must be an independent contractor. Any provisions in the Agreement
Documents that may appear to give City the right to direct Contractor as to the details of
accomplishing the Work or to exercise a measure of control over the Work means that
Contractor must follow the wishes of City as the results of the Work only. These results
must comply with all applicable laws and ordinances.
14.18
NOTICE OF INJURY
Should City or Contractor suffer injury or damage to their person or property because of
any error, omission or act of the other party or of any of the other party's employees or
agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim must be made in
writing to the other party within 7 Days of the first observance of such injury or damage.
14.19
CONFIDENTIALITY
Contractor, for the benefit of City, hereby agrees it will not release or cause or permit
to be
released to the public any press notices, publicity (oral or written) or advertising
promotion relating
to, any statement regarding, or any other public announcement or
disclosure or cause or permit to be publicly announced or disclosed, in any manner
whatsoever, the specific terms and conditions of this Agreement or any comment relating
to the Project or the Site. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Contractor will be entitled to
disclose the terms of the Agreement to the extent required by law or in the course of
enforcing or defending a claim or action hereunder. Contractor must give City reasonably
prompt notice of any disclosure or statement made pursuant to this provision.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-55 of 75
14.20
DATA CONFIDENTIALITY
14.20.1
As used in the Agreement
plans, specifications, renderings, photographs, studies, investigations, audits, analyses,
samples, reports, calculations, internal memos, meeting minutes, data field notes, work
product, proposals, correspondence and any other similar documents or information
prepared by, obtained by, or transmitted to the City in the performance of this Agreement.
14.20.2
Contractor agrees that all data, regardless of form, including originals, images, and
reproductions, prepared by, obtained by, or transmitted to City in connection with the
Agreement is confidential and proprietary information
belonging to City.
14.20.3
Except as specifically provided in this Agreement, Contractor or its Subcontractors must not
divulge data to any third party without prior written consent of City. Contractor or its
Subcontractors must not use data for any purposes except to perform Work required under
this Agreement. These prohibitions will not apply to the following data provided Contractor
has first given the required notice to City:
a.
Data which was known to Contractor or its Subcontractors prior to its
performance under this Agreement unless such data was acquired in
connection with Work performed for City;
b.
Data which was acquired by Contractor or its Subcontractors in its
performance under this Agreement and which was disclosed to Contractor
or its S
S
disclosure and Contractor or its Subcontractors are not otherwise required
to hold such data in confidence; or
c.
Data which is required to be disclosed by virtue of law, regulation, or court
order, to which the Contractor or its Subcontractors are subject.
14.20.4
In the event the Contractor or its Subcontractors are required or requested to disclose data
to a third party, or any other information to which the Contractor or its Subcontractors
became privy as a result of any other agreement with City, the Contractor must first notify
City as set forth in this Section of the request or demand for the data. The Contractor or its
Subcontractors must give City sufficient facts so that City can be given an opportunity to
first give its consent or take such action that City may deem appropriate to protect such
data or other information from disclosure.
14.20.5
Unless prohibited by law, within 10 Days after completion of services for a third party on
real or personal property owned or leased by City, the Contractor must promptly deliver, as
set forth in this Section, a copy of all data to City. All data will continue to be subject to the
confidentiality agreements of this Agreement.
14.20.6
Contractor or its Subcontractors assume all liability for maintaining the confidentiality of
the data in its possession and agree to compensate City if any of the provisions of this
Section are violated by Contractor, its employees, agents, or Subcontractors. Solely for the
purposes of seeking injunctive relief, it is agreed that a breach of this Section will be deemed
to cause irreparable harm that justified injunctive relief in court. Contractor agrees that the
requirements of this Section will be incorporated into all subcontracts entered into by
Contractor. A violation of this Section may result in immediate termination of this
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-56 of 75
Agreement without notice.
14.21
SURVIVAL
All warranties, representations and indemnifications by Contractor must survive the
completion or termination of this Agreement.
14.22
COVENANTS AGAINST CONTINGENT FEES
Contractor warrants that no person has been employed or retained to solicit or secure
this
Agreement upon an agreement or understanding for a commission, percentage,
brokerage, or contingent fee, and that no member of City Council, or any employee of
City has any interest, financially, or otherwise, in the firm. For breach or violation of this
warrant, City will have the right to annul the Agreement without liability or at its discretion
to deduct from the Agreement Price or consideration, the full amount of such commission,
percentage, brokerage, or contingent fee.
14.23
NO WAIVER
The failure of either party to enforce any of the provisions of the Agreement Documents or
to require
performance of the other party of any of the provisions hereof must not be
construed to be a waiver of such provisions, nor will it affect the validity of the Agreement
Documents or any part thereof, or the right of either party to thereafter enforce each and
every provision.
14.24
NONEXCLUSIVEREMEDIES
The remedies set forth in this Agreement are cumulative and not exclusive, and failure to
exercise any remedy (including, without limitation, any right to terminate) will not preclude
any party from exercising any other right in seeking any other remedy available to it at law
or in equity.
14.25
PROJECTCOMMUNICATIONS
14.25.1
All communications concerning the performance of the Work or the Project will be provided
to the designated Project Manager and
Representative set forth in Article 1
of the Agreement. City may change the designated Project Manager and, subject to
Section
4.4.20
of
these General Conditions,
Contractor may change Contractor
Representative, by written notice to the other.
14.25.2
Project communications may be exchanged by e-mail, but email communications cannot
change the terms of the Agreement or the Scope of Work, or effectuate any change that
requires a written Change Order.
14.25.3
When any provisions of the Agreement Documents requires Contractor or the Design
Professional to give written notice to City, it will be deemed to have been validly given if
delivered in person or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid,
to the Parties indicated in Agreement Article 1, incorporated by reference.
14.25.4
When any provisions of the Agreement Documents requires City, Project Manager, or the
Design Professional to give written notice to Contractor, it will be deemed to have been
validly given if delivered in person to the person designated in the Agreement Documents
as
Resident Superintendent, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified
mail, postage prepaid, to Contractor at the last address in the Agreement Documents or
such substitute address which Contractor designates in writing, or to the business address
known to the giver of notice.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-57 of 75
14.26
DRUG FREE WORKPLACE PROGRAM
14.26.1
City has adopted a policy establishing a drug free workplace for itself and as a requirement
for Contractors doing business with City, to ensure the safety and health of employees
working on City projects.
14.26.2
Contractor must require a drug free workplace for all employees working under the
Agreement.
Specifically,
all employees
of
Contractor
who
are
working
under
an
agreement with City must be notified, in writing, by Contractor that they are prohibited
from
the
manufacture,
distribution,
dispensation, possession or unlawful use of a
controlled substance in the workplace.
14.27
Failure to require a drug free workplace in accordance with the
policy may result
in
termination of the Agreement and possible debarment form bidding on future City
projects.
SECTION 15 - PROVISIONS APPLICABLE SOLELY TO GMP AND COST-BASED AGREEMENTS,
CHANGE ORDERS, AND JOB ORDERS
15.1
ADDITIONALDEFINITIONS
The definitions set forth in Section 2 apply to GMP and Cost-Based Agreements, Change
Orders, and Job Orders, together with the additional definitions set forth below.
Baseline Cost Model
A breakdown and estimate of the scope of the Project developed by CM@Risk pursuant to Section 17.5
of these General Conditions.
CM@Risk or Construction Manager at Risk
The person or firm selected by City to provide pre-construction and/or construction services as
detailed in a Construction Manager at Risk Agreement with City. In these General Conditions, the
term
includes CM@Risk under both Pre-Construction and Construction Services
Agreements.
CM@Risk Fee or
Fee
An agreed to percentage in an accepted GMP that represents
fee for performance of
the Work.
Agreement Documents
Where compensation under the Agreement is based upon a GMP accepted by City, the term
Agreement
also includes the accepted GMP Proposal.
Agreement Price
Where compensation under the Agreement based upon a GMP accepted by City, the term
Agreement
refers to the GMP.
Cost-Based Agreement, Change Order, or Job Order
A Agreement, Change Order, or Job Order where the Agreement Price is based upon the actual
cost of
performing the Work, subject to the terms of the Agreement Documents, including this
Section 15. These would include those generally referred to as
of the Work plus a Fee with
a
and
or
Plus a
Cost of the Work
The direct costs necessarily incurred by Contractor in the proper, timely, and complete performance
on the Work. The Cost of the Work will include only those costs set forth in Section 15.2 of these
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-58 of 75
General Conditions.
Deliverables
The work products prepared by Contractor in performing the scope of work described in the
Agreement. Some of the major deliverables to be prepared and provided by Contractor during pre-
construction may include but are not limited to: the Baseline Cost Model and Schedule that validate
Schedule, Schedule of Values,
alternative system evaluations, procurement strategies and plans, Detailed Cost Estimates,
construction market surveys, cash flow projections, GMP Proposals, Subcontractor procurement plan,
Subcontractor agreements, Subcontractor bid packages, Supplier agreements, Constructability
Review, Cost Control Log, Traffic control and phasing plans and others as indicated in this Agreement
or required by the Project Team.
Pre-Construction Services Agreement
The Agreement entered into between City and the CM@Risk for Pre-Construction Services to be
provided by the CM@Risk, including, without limitation, the generation of a GMP Proposal. If the GMP
Proposal is accepted by City and a Construction Agreement is entered into between City and CM@Risk,
the duties, obligations and warranties of the CM@Risk under the Pre-Construction Services
Agreement survive and are incorporated into the resulting Construction Agreement.
Pre-Construction Services
The services to be provided under the Pre-Construction Services Agreement, including Section 17 of
these General Conditions.
Detailed Project Schedule
The Detailed Project Schedule developed by the CM@Risk for the review and approval of the Project
Manager in accordance with Section 17.3 of these General Conditions, if applicable.
General Conditions Costs
Those costs set forth in Section 4 of Appendix 9 to these General Conditions.
GMP Plans and Specifications
The plan and specifications upon which the Guaranteed Maximum price Proposal is based.
GMP Proposal
The proposal of Contractor submitted pursuant to Section 17.7 of these General Conditions for the
entire Work and/or portion (phases) of the Work.
Guaranteed Maximum Price or GMP
The Guaranteed Maximum Price set forth in the Agreement, Change Order, or Job Order if applicable.
15.2
AGREEMENT PRICE
15.2.1
The Agreement Price for all Agreements, Change Orders, and Job Orders based upon
payment of the Cost of the Work plus a Fee with a GMP, time and materials, or cost-plus a
fee will be the Cost of the Work incurred plus the Fee agreed to in writing by City, limited to
the amount of the GMP, if agreed to. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Agreement,
Change Order, or Job Order, all Cost Based pricing will be subject to and limited to GMP.
15.2.2
The Agreement Price may only be changed as set forth in Section 9 above.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-59 of 75
15.2.3
Only costs specifically designated as reimbursable costs are eligible for payment by City or
may be charged against the Agreement Price. All other costs will not be paid by City and will
not be chargeable against the Agreement Price.
15.2.4
Cost-Based Agreements. For Agreements, Change Orders, or Job Orders, reimbursable
costs must be determined pursuant to Appendix 9 to these General Conditions, Cost of the
Work, and not by MAG Specifications §109.5.
15.3
ALLOWANCES
15.3.1
Contractor must include in the Agreement Price all Allowances stated in the Agreement
Documents and agreed to in writing by City. Items covered by these Allowances must be
supplied for such amounts and by such persons as City may direct, provided Contractor will
not be required to employ persons against whom Contractor makes a reasonable objection.
Materials, labor, and equipment under an Allowance will be selected by City in accordance
with a schedule to be mutually agreed upon by City, Design Professional and Contractor or
otherwise in reasonably sufficient time to avoid delay in the Work.
15.3.2
Unless otherwise provided in the Agreement Documents:
15.3.2.1
These Allowances must cover the cost to Contractor, less any applicable trade discount, of
the materials, labor, and equipment required by the Allowances, delivered at the Site, and
all applicable taxes;
15.3.2.2
profit and other expenses relating to materials, labor, and equipment required by the
Allowance must be included in the Agreement Sum and not in the Allowance; and
15.3.2.3
Whenever the cost is more or less than the Allowance, the Agreement Sum must be
adjusted accordingly by Change Order, the amount of which will recognize the difference
between actual costs for an Allowance item and the amount of the Allowance item and
changes, if any, in handling costs on the Site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and
other expenses.
15.4
CONTINGENCY
An agreed to amount in the GMP that may only be used in accordance with the terms set
forth in these General Conditions and with prior written approval by the City.
15.4.1
Construction Contingency. This GMP includes a dollar amount listed as a Construction
Contingency which will be readily available for increased costs for subcontractors, material,
and equipment subject to prior approval of City, which approval will not be withheld
unreasonably. The Construction Contingency may also be used, at the discretion of City, to
reimburse CM@Risk for unexpected costs due to (a) scope gaps between trade
subcontractors; (b) agreement default by trade subcontractors; (c) unforeseen field
conditions, but only as defined in Section 9.5 above; (d) work completed to meet the intent
of the design, but which was not indicated on the plans; (e) costs overruns not covered by
allowances; (f) costs of corrective work not provided for elsewhere; and (g) implementation
of any Recovery Plan. Cost for which CM@Risk desires to be paid from the Construction
Contingency must be documented by CM@Risk on a time and materials basis and are
will be
executed by both parties authorizing the actual cost of the work to be paid and included in
the Work Item Direct Costs. The Construction Contingency is not allocated to any particular
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-60 of 75
item of the Project but may be used for any portion of the work as determined above. Any
amount not used in the Construction Contingency will belong to City and will reduce the
GMP.
15.4.2
Contingency which may be used only by the City (owner department) for upgrades and
changes in scope or other changes not already included within the intent of the Project
Program. City will provide CM@Risk with a Work Change Directive authorizing CM@Risk to
Work Item Direct Costs category to be paid with such direct costs. These additional costs
will be in an amount mutually agreed upon by CM@Risk and City or will be documented by
CM@Risk on a time and materials basis and are subject to verification by City. Any amount
will belong to the City and will reduce the GMP.
15.5
REDUCTION IN RETENTION
If the Agreement Price is based upon a GMP, in order to receive payment of one-half of the
retention as set forth in Section 8.1.5 above, Contractor must also submit to the Project
Manager a complete accounting of the Actual Reimbursable Cost of the Work to date,
including all such documentation (including, without limitation, invoices, subcontract,
subcontractor change orders, purchaseorders,records ofpayment,etc.) as Citymayrequire,
to establish whether the payments made to Contractor equal, exceed, or are less than the
actual reimbursable Cost of the Work to date. Any excess payments by City, as determined
by the Project Manager, will be deducted from the one-half retention payment to be made
to Contractor, and any additional excess amounts paid to Contractor will be refunded by
Contractor to City. The Project
determinations as to Actual Reimbursable Cost
of the Work will be the basis of payment until final Project Closeout and Final Payment
under the Agreement.
15.6
FINAL PAYMENT
If the Agreement Price is based upon a GMP, as a further condition precedent to Final
Payment by City, Contractor must submit to the Project Manager a complete final
accounting of the Actual Reimbursable Cost of the Work, including all such documentation
(including,
without
limitation,
invoices, subcontracts, subcontractor change orders,
purchase orders, records of payment, etc.) as City may require, to establish whether the
payments made to Contractor equal, exceed, or are less than the Actual Reimbursable Cost
of the Work to date. Any excess payments by City, as determined by the Project Manager,
will be deducted from the one-half retention payment to be made to Contractor, and any
additional excess amounts paid to Contractor will be refunded by Contractor to City.
Disputes relating to the Final Cost of the Work will be subject to
audit
rights under
Sections 8.8 above and 15.7 below, and the dispute resolution process under Section
13
above.
15.7
OPEN BOOK
On any GMP-based or Cost-Based Agreement, Job Order, or Change Order, City may attend
any and all meetings or discussions pertaining to the Project, including bid openings, and
must have
access to all books, invoices, accounts, memoranda, correspondence, and
written communications or records of any kind pertaining to the Project, including without
limitation, those stored in electronic format.
15.8
DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS AND/OR CHANGE IN LAWS
A Change Order for increased costs under Section 9.5 or 9.6 above will only be considered
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-61 of 75
or granted by City to the extent such actual, documented costs are justified.
SECTION 16 - PROVISIONS APPLICABLE SOLELY TO JOB ORDER AGREEMENTS (JOC)
16.1
ADDITIONAL DEFINITIONS
The definitions set forth in Sections 2 and below will apply to all Job Order Agreements and
Job Orders. In addition, the definitions set forth in Section 15.1 above will apply to all Cost-
Based Job Orders.
Agreement
Includes the Job Order Master Agreement and Job Order Project Agreements issued and agreed to by City
and JOC Contractor.
JOC
Coefficient
A numerical factor that represents JOC Contractor total costs (indirect and direct costs, sales tax,
profit, etc.) and other adjustments for market conditions.
Job Order Request for Proposal (RFP)
The Request for Proposals issued by City for each Job Order Project Agreement relating to a specific
Project.
Job Order Cost Proposal
The Proposal submitted by JOC Contractor in response to a Job Order Request for Proposal (RFP) issued
by City to develop a Job Order Project Agreement for a specific Project.
Guaranteed Maximum Price (GMP) Job Order
Job Order under which JOC Contractor is compensated for actual costs incurred.
Job Order Project Agreement (Job Order)
The agreement for a specific project, as it may be modified by all Change Orders, executed by the
Parties, which incorporates the terms and conditions of the Job Order Master Agreement.
16.2
ORDERING AND PROCESSING PROCEDURES FOR JOB ORDERS
16.2.1
The process for developing and issuing a Job Order for a particular Project consists of three
(3) procedures: (1) issuance of a RFP by City; (2) JOC Contractor
form of JOC Contractor
Job Order Cost Proposal; and (3) Issuance of a Job Order by City, as
set for below.
16.2.2
For Job Orders
16.2.2.1
City will provide to JOC Contractor RFP with a Scope of Work (SOW) describing the Work to
be performed, which may include special instructions and conditions, material submittal
requirements, and, if applicable, a complete set of sketches, construction drawings and
specifications for the Job Order.
16.2.2.2
specifications and will rely on JOC Contractor to produce them for City review and approval
and is considered to be Pre-Construction and incidental design services included in JOC
Contractor
JOC Contractor will not be
reimbursed for any Pre-Job Order costs, including proposal preparation, attendance during
negotiations, or site visits.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-62 of 75
16.2.3
JOC Contractor
Job Order Cost Proposal
16.2.3.1
JOC Contractor must respond within ten (10) calendar days of the RFP date or site visit,
whichever is
later or as otherwise indicated on a case-by-case basis, by submitting JOC
Contractor
Job Order Cost Proposal to the City representative.
16.2.3.2
Unless otherwise required under the terms of the RFP, JOC Contractor
Job Order Cost
Proposal must include the following.
a.
JOC Contractor
Job Order Cost Proposal in PDF and electronic format;
b.
A Project Schedule and schedule of values that reflects the costs of each work
element on the
schedule. The schedule must show all milestones (e.g.,
permits, submittals, ordering materials, demolition, work phases, closeout
and completion date); and
c.
Necessary documentation will be required to indicate that adequate scoping,
layout, setup and planning to accomplish the Work has been done.
Examples of documentation that might reasonably be expected include
sketches, drawings, calculations, catalog cuts and specifications produced
to a level of detail and skill that could be expected of experienced,
competent Project Managers with five or more periods experience in their
respective trade.
16.2.3.3
JOC Contractor must select Subcontractors based on qualifications alone or on a
combination of
qualifications and price and must not select Subcontractors based on
price alone. A qualifications and price selection may be a one-step selection based on
a combination of qualifications and price or two-step selection. In a two-step selection,
the first step must be based on qualifications alone and the second step may be based or
a combination of qualifications and price or on price alone.
16.2.3.4
Upon request, JOC Contractor must provide City with copies of Subcontractor quotes and
the basis for selection of each Subcontractor.
16.2.3.5
If City objects to a selected Subcontractor, City will make the objection and the reasons for
the
objection known to the JOC Contractor.
JOC Contractor must then present an
acceptable Subcontractor for the applicable discipline. City will not unreasonably object
to or withhold approval of a Subcontractor.
16.2.3.6
For self-performed work, the City retains the right to have the JOC Contractor establish JOC
Contractor
costs by bidding their costs against at least three (3) other interested trade
Contractors. No self- performed work will be allowed to be performed on a lump sum basis.
16.2.4
Issuance of Job Order
16.2.4.1
City Representative will compare the JOC Contractor
Job Order Cost Proposal with the
estimate,
schedules and other requirements, and then, if the City Representative
determines it is in the best interest of City, arrange a meeting with JOC Contractor, at which
time the JOC Contractor
Job Order Cost Proposal will be discussed and negotiated.
16.2.4.2
If the City Representative determines that it is in the best interest of the City, City will then
issue a Job Order to JOC Contractor for execution.
16.2.4.3
Specific Job Orders may vary, but unless agreed to by City in writing otherwise, the content
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-63 of 75
of Job Orders under the Agreement will generally be as follow, all of which will be signed
and/or initialed by JOC Contractor
designated representative:
a.
The description of the Scope of the Work and Project Schedule (attached as
Exhibit A to the Job Order);
b.
The address or location of the Work;
c.
The Agreement Price for Work (Construction) included in the Project
(attached as Exhibit B to the Job Order);
d.
The name of the JOC Contractor representative for the Project;
e.
The Drawings and Specifications for the Project;
f.
If any shop drawings, project date and/or samples are required for the Job
Order, the date for delivery of each required item (included in the Project
Schedule, Exhibit A to the Job order); and
g.
Project Specific Provisions, if any, in Exhibit A to the Job Order,
including, without limitation, whether any of the following are required:
Pre-Construction Conference, weekly progress meetings, field office,
storage enclosure, materials and equipment handling facility, submittals,
shop drawings, product data, equipment list, samples, project manual,
schedule of values, Construction progress schedule, narrative reports,
progress report, progress charts, progress photographs, materials status
report, Construction diagram, Construction status report, operation and
maintenance data, operating maintenance instructions and parts list, and
as-build drawings.
16.2.5
Job Order Intent.
Each Job Order will be interpreted to include all items reasonably
necessary to complete the Project under that Job Order as described in the scope of the
Work in that Job
Order. All Work must be performed in a professional manner and all
materials used must be new and of the highest quality and of the type best adapted to
their purpose, unless otherwise specified. The Notice to Proceed date, and the award date
established therein, will be deemed an integral part of the Job Order the same as if set forth
therein.
16.3
INCIDENTAL DESIGN SERVICES
16.3.1
This effort includes all
of
for systems that are typically specified in
a performance oriented manner by consultants and designers. Examples include: fire
sprinkler
systems, fire alarm and sprinkler systems, DDC controls, control systems,
prefabricated metal
building and similar situations. These designs are normally provided
under submittals as a shop drawing with engineering backup and as appropriate, seals of
registered engineers specializing in the particular system.
16.3.2
Incidental design includes all documents, sketches, schematic diagrams, floor plan
layouts, equipment schedules and other documents produced by the JOC Contractor to
define the work required for projects that the City does not develop formal or abbreviated
designs requiring a seal by a registered engineer. Incidental design does not include
preparation of designs requiring an architect or engineer seal.
16.3.3
JOC Contractor represents, covenants, and agrees, and contractually assumes the
obligation to
furnish, all of the required Design Services through properly licensed and
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-64 of 75
experienced Design Professionals in complete accordance with all of the duties imposed
on a Design Professional under the Agreement Documents, Laws, Regulations, or Legal
Requirements, and the common law.
16.3.4
All Design Documents (and all other Project-related documents, models, computer
drawings and other electronic expression, photographs and other expressions CADD, and
BIM files and
images included) that JOC Contractor and/or JOC Contractor
Design
Professional(s) prepare in connection with a Job Order and the copyrights therein
(collectively, the
of
will be the property of City. JOC Contractor
covenants and agrees to execute any additional document reasonably requested by City
to confirm such assignment without any additionalcompensation.
16.4
CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
16.4.1
The following subsections of this Section 16.4 set forth requirements beyond those set forth
in Section 4 above which apply to Construction Services performed under a Job Order.
16.4.2
JOC Contractor must perform the Work using only those firms, team members and
individuals designated by JOC Contractor consistent with each Job Order or otherwise
approved by City pursuant to the General Conditions. No other entities or individuals may
be used without the prior written approval of the Project Manager.
16.4.3
Construction Phasing
16.4.3.1
City use of the facilities is anticipated while the Work is being performed. The Work must
be
planned and accomplished so that there will be a minimum of interference and
inconvenience
to occupants in the building and agencies in the vicinity and to other
craftsmen who may have to do work in the affected facilities. Any blockage of building
exits or driveways must be coordinated in advance.
16.4.3.2
If applicable, furniture, portable office equipment and wall appurtenances not rigidly
fastened to the walls must be moved by JOC Contractor, protected from damage and
replaced to the original position upon completion of the work. If the work required by
the Job Order will not allow furniture and portable office equipment to be replaced to its
original position, new locations will be designated by City. Incidental costs associated with
moving one-piece furnishings up to approximately 150 pounds to perform such tasks as
painting, carpet or tile replacement, etc.,
are considered a general cost of building
renovation and must be included in the JOC Contractor
Coefficient. Costs for large scale
or wholesale removal and replacement of large quantities of
desks
or
modular
workstations, copiers, multiple full file cabinets, etc. to another location or storage outside
the work space, or disassembly and reassembly of modular furniture is not considered
part of the JOC Contractor
Coefficient and will be priced separately.
16.4.3.3
The work must, so far as practicable, be done in definite sections or divisions and confined
to limited areas which must be completed before work in other sections or divisions are
begun.
16.4.4
Work Site Conflicts. In the event of a conflict between JOC Contractor and others in an
occupied facility or where other Contractors are performing work on the same facility
under other Agreements, City will decide to dispute and that decision will be final.
16.4.5
Ownership of Work Product. Work Product prepared or otherwise created in connection
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-65 of 75
with the performance of this Agreement, including the Work, are to be and remain the
property of City. For purposes of this provision,
will include all designs,
drawings, plans, specifications, ideas, renderings and other information or matter, in
whatever form created (e.g., electronic or printed) and in all media now known or
hereinafter created. All Work Product will be considered Work Made for Hire as defined
in the United States Copyright Act 17 U.S.C. §101 (Copyright Act). If for any reason any such
Work is found not to be a work for hire, JOC Contractor hereby transfers and assigns
ownership of the copyright in such Work to City. The rights in this Section are exclusive to
City in perpetuity.
16.5
OPTIONAL LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
16.5.1
Specific Job Orders. City will have the right to assess liquidated damages in relation to
any specific JOC Project Agreement as set forth below.
16.5.2
Substantial Completion Liquidated Damages. JOC Contractor acknowledges and agrees
that if
JOC Contractor fails to obtain Substantial Completion of the Work within the
Agreement Time, City will sustain extensive damages and serious loss as a result of such
failure. The exact amount of
such damages will be extremely difficult to ascertain.
Therefore, City and JOC Contractor agree that if JOC Contractor fails to achieve Substantial
Completion of the Work within the Agreement Time, City
will
be entitled to retain or
recover from JOC Contractor, as liquidated damages and not as a penalty, the sum per
calendar day as indicated in MAG § 108.9.
16.5.3
Final Acceptance Liquidated Damages. For the same reasons set forth in Section 16.5.2
above, City and JOC Contractor further agree that if JOC Contractor fails to achieve Final
Acceptance of the Work within the Agreement Time, City will be entitled to retain or recover
from JOC Contractor, as liquidated
damages and not as a penalty, the sum per calendar
day as indicated in MAG § 108.9 commencing from the actual date
of Substantial
Completion or Final Acceptance as required under any specific JOC Project Agreement.
16.5.4
MAG Liquidated Damages. Liquidated damages provisions in MAG § 108.9 may apply to any
specific JOC Project Agreement.
16.5.5
City may deduct liquidated damages assessed pursuant to this Section 16.5 from any
unpaid amounts then or thereafter due JOC Contractor under the Agreement or any
specific JOC Project Agreement between JOC Contractor and City. Any liquidated damages
not so deducted from any unpaid amounts due JOC Contractor must be payable to City
at the demand of City, together with interest from the date of the demand at the highest
lawful rate of interest payable to JOC Contractor.
16.6
PERFORMANCEMEASUREMENT
16.6.1
Performance Assessment. After the Final Acceptance of Work under each Job Order, City
will complete a written evaluation of the performance of JOC Contractor on the Job Order.
16.6.2
Consideration in Assignment of Work. JOC Contractor
record of cost, schedule and
quality performance and comparative assessments will be significant considerations in
determination whether to award future Job Orders. JOC Contractor agrees that any
determination by City not to not award future Job Orders or Option periods based on
performance will be at the sole discretion of City.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-66 of 75
SECTION 17 - PROVISIONS APPLICABLE SOLELY TO PRE-CONSTRUCTION SERVICES FOR
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AT RISK
17.1
ADDITIONALDEFINITIONS
The definitions set forth in Section 2 and 15.1 above will apply to all Pre-Construction
Services Agreements.
17.2
GENERAL
17.2.1
CM@Risk must perform the Services required by, and in accordance with the Agreement
Documents and as outlined in Exhibit A of the Agreement to the satisfaction of the
Project Manager, exercising the degree of care, skill, diligence and judgment a professional
construction manager experienced in the performance of such services for construction
and/or facilities of similar scope, function, size, quality, complexity and detail to the
Project in urban areas throughout the United States, would exercise at such time, under
similar conditions. CM@Risk must, at all times, perform the required services consistent
with sound and generally accepted engineering principles and construction management
and construction contracting practices.
17.2.2
As a participating member of the Project Team, CM@Risk must provide to City and Design
Professional a written evaluation of
Project Program and budget, each in terms of
the other, with recommendations as to the appropriateness of each. CM@Risk must
prepare a Baseline Cost Model that validates
budget. The Baseline Cost Model must
include all assumptions and basis of estimates in enough detail so that the Project Team
can compare
future detail estimates to the Baseline Cost model for variances. City and
Design Professional will provide all the reasonably required data that is available in
order to reach agreement between the team members that the Baseline Cost Model is an
accurate projection of the costs of the Project.
17.2.3
CM@Risk must attend Project Team meetings, which may include, but are not limited to,
bi- weekly Project management meetings, Project workshops, special Project meetings,
construction document rolling reviews, public meetings and partnering sessions. CM@Risk
attendance at design or other meetings in which CM@Risk is provided the opportunity but
does not actively participate and/or is not properly prepared is not acceptable. Repeated
instances of non-participation and/or lack of preparedness will be grounds for termination
of CM@Risk Agreement for default.
17.2.4
CM@Risk must provide Pre-Construction Services, described herein, in a timely manner
and consistent with the intent of the most current Drawings and Specifications. CM@Risk
must promptly notify City in writing whenever CM@Risk determines any Drawings or
Specifications are inappropriate for the Project and/or cause changes in the scope of Work
that deviates more
than the allowed contingencies within the Baseline Cost Model or
requires an adjustment in the Baseline Cost Model, Detailed Cost Estimate, Detailed
Project Schedule, GMP Proposals and/or in the Agreement Time for the Work, to the extent
such as established.
17.2.5
CM@Risk when requested by City, must attend, make presentations and participate as may
be appropriate in public agency and or community meetings, relevant to the Project.
CM@Risk must provide drawings, schedule diagrams, budget charges and other materials
describing the Project when their use is required or appropriate in any such public agency
meetings.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-67 of 75
17.2.6
Ownership of Work Product. All Work Product prepared or otherwise created in connection
with
the performance of this Agreement, including the Work, are to be and remain the
property of City. For purposes of this provision,
will include all designs,
drawings, plans, specifications, ideas, renderings and other information or material, in
whatever form created (e.g., electronic or printed) and in all media now know or hereinafter
created. All Work Product will be considered Work Made for Hire as defined in the United
States Copyright Act 17 U.S.C.
§101 (Copyright Act). If for any reason any such Work is found not to be a work for
hire, Contractor hereby transfers and assigns ownership of the copyright in such Work to
City. The rights in this Section are exclusive to City in perpetuity.
17.2.7
CM@Risk represents to City in completing Pre-Construction Services and providing the
reports
and analysis required thereunder, that Work can be properly and timely
constructed within the GMP Proposal, if accepted. CM@Risk does not assume any design
responsibilities unless
specifically called for in the scope of work, but CM@Risk will be
responsible for their errors, omissions or inconsistencies included in the Work.
17.3
DETAILED PROJECT SCHEDULE
17.3.1
The fundamental purpose of the Detailed Project Schedule is to identify, coordinate and
record the tasks and activities to be performed by all of the Project Team members and
then for the
Project Team to utilize that Deliverable as a basis for managing and
monitoring all
compliance with the schedule requirements of the Project.
Each Project Team member is responsible for its compliance with the Detailed Project
Schedule requirements.
CM@Risk
must, however, develop and maintain the Detailed
Project Schedule on behalf of and to be used by the Project Team based on input from the
other Project Team members. The Baseline Project Schedule must be developed as part
of the Baseline Cost Model. The Detailed Project Schedule must use the Critical Path
method
technique, unless required otherwise, in writing by City. CM@Risk must
use scheduling software acceptable to City to develop the Detailed Project Schedule.
The Detailed Project Schedule must be presented in graphical and tabular reports as
agreed upon by the Project Team. If Project phasing as described below is required, the
Detailed
Project
Schedule
must
indicate
milestone
dates
for
the
phases
once
determined.
As part of construction phase, City may require CM@Risk to prepare a
schedule for all work, including work performed by Subcontractors,
detailing each of the project tasks and the required/anticipated number of personnel per
dayfor each task. CM@Risk must also indicate on the schedule its ability to meet said
required/anticipated personnel requirements.
17.3.2
CM@Risk must include and integrate in the Detailed Project Schedule the services and
activities required of City, Design Professional and CM@Risk including all construction
phase activities
based on the input received from City and the Design Professional.
The Detailed Project Schedule must define activities as determined by City to the extent
required to show: (a) the coordination between preliminary design and various pre-
construction documents, (b) any separate long-lead procurements, (c) any permitting
issues, (d) any land, right-of-way, or easement acquisition, (e) bid packaging strategy and
awards to Subcontractors and Suppliers, (f) major stages of construction, (g) start-up and
commissioning, and (h) occupancy of the completed Work by City. The Detailed Project
Schedule must include by example and not limitation, proposed activity sequences and
durations for design, procurement, construction and testing activities, milestone dates for
actions and decisions by the Project Team, preparation and processing of shop drawings
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-68 of 75
and samples, delivery of materials or equipment requiring long-lead time procurement (if
any), milestone dates for various construction phases,
Total Float for all activities to the
extent authorized by City, relationships between the activities,
occupancy
requirements showing portions of the Project having occupancy priority, and proposed
dates for Final Acceptance.
17.3.3
A Baseline Project Schedule must be initiated with the project Baseline Cost Model and
agreed to by the project team at the same time. CM@Risk must update and maintain a
detailed Project
Schedule throughout pre-construction such that it will not require major
changes at the start of
the construction phase to incorporate
plan for the
performance of the construction phase Work. CM@Risk must provide updates and/or
revisions to the Detailed Project Schedule for use by the Project Team, whenever required,
but no less often than at the Project Team meetings. CM@Risk must include with such
submittals a narrative describing its analysis of the
progress achieved to-date vs. the
Baseline Project Schedule, including any concerns regarding delays or potential delays, and
any recommendations regarding mitigating actions.
17.3.4
If phased construction is deemed appropriate at the time of developing the Baseline Cost
Model or during the development of the Detailed Project Schedule, and City approves,
CM@Risk must review the design and make recommendations regarding the phased
issuance of Construction Documents to facilitate phased construction of the Work, with
the objective of reducing the Project Schedule and/or Cost of the Work. CM@Risk must take
into consideration such factors as natural and practical lines of work severability,
sequencing
effectiveness, access and availability constraints, total time for completion,
construction market
conditions, labor and materials availability, and any other factors
pertinent to saving time and cost.
17.3.5
Long Lead Time Items. As part of developing the Detailed Project Schedule, CM@Risk must
identify all long lead time materials, fabrications, equipment, or other items which may
impact the Project Schedule and may require early action on the part of the Project Team.
Dates for selecting and ordering long lead time items will be included and highlighted
in the Detailed Project Schedule
17.3.6
Equipment Plan. Contractor must develop an Equipment Plan that addresses all rental
and
owned equipment, regardless of whether such equipment will be provided by
CM@Risk or subcontractor(s), that will be necessary to construct the Project and the cost
of which will be included as a Cost of the Work in the GMP Proposal. The Equipment Plan
will seek to minimize the cost of the equipment to City and maximize the efficient and
coordinated use of the equipment for completion of the Project. The Equipment Plan will
not only include the costs and allowable lease rates for the equipment, but will also include
an equipment schedule that will be incorporated into the Detailed Project Schedule and the
Schedule of Values submitted with the GMP Proposal.
17.4
DESIGN DOCUMENT REVIEWS
17.4.1
CM@Risk must evaluate periodically the availability of labor, materials/equipment, cost-
sensitive aspects of the design; and other factors that may create an unacceptable variance
to the Baseline Cost Model and/or Baseline Project Schedule.
17.4.2
CM@Risk must recommend, in conjunction with the Project Team, those additional surface
and subsurface investigations that, in its professional opinion, are required to provide the
necessary
information
for
CM@Risk
to
construct
the
Project.
These
additional
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-69 of 75
investigations, if agreed to
be necessary by the Project Manager and the Design
Professional, will be acquired by City and copies of the reports will be provided to CM@Risk.
17.4.3
CM@Risk must meet with the Project Team as required to review
designs during their
development. CM@Risk must familiarize itself with the evolving documents through
pre-
construction.
CM@Risk must proactively advise the Project Team and make
recommendations
on factors related to construction costs, and concerns pertaining to the
feasibility and practicality
of any proposed means and methods, selected materials,
equipment and building systems, and,
labor and material availability. CM@Risk must
furthermore advise the Project Team on proposed site improvements, excavation and
foundation considerations, as well as, concerns that exist with respect to coordination of
the Drawings and Specifications. CM@Risk must use established value analysis principles
in recommending cost effective alternatives.
17.4.4
CM@Risk must routinely conduct constructability and bid-ability reviews of the Drawings
and Specifications as necessary to satisfy the needs of the Project Team. The reviews must
attempt
to identify all discrepancies and inconsistencies in the Construction Documents
especially those related to clarity, consistency, completeness and coordination of Work of
Subcontractors and Suppliers.
17.4.4.1
CM@Risk must evaluate whether: (a) the Drawings and Specifications are configured to
enable efficient construction; (b) design elements are standardized; (c) construction
efficiency
is
properly
considered
in
the
Drawings
and
Specifications;
(d)
module/preassembly design is prepared to facilitate fabrication, transport and installation;
(e) sequences of Work required by or inferable from the Drawings and Specifications are
practicable; (f) the design has taken into consideration efficiency issues concerning access
and entrance to the site, laydown and storage
of materials, staging of site facilities,
construction parking, and other similar pertinent issues; and (g) the design maintains
continued operation of the existing City systems and maintains
traffic on adjacent
roadways. CM@Risk must also review the Drawings and Specifications to ensure that what
is depicted therein can be constructed as designed and must promptly inform the Project
Team of any issues.
17.4.4.2
CM@Risk must check cross-reference and complementary Drawings and sections within
the Specifications and in general evaluate whether: (a) the Drawings and Specifications
are sufficiently clear and detailed to minimize ambiguity and to reduce scope interpretation
discrepancies; (b) named materials and equipment are commercially available and are
performing well, or otherwise, in similar installations; (c) Specifications include alternatives
in the event a requirement cannot be met in the field; and (d) in its professional opinion, the
Project is likely to be subject to Differing Site Conditions.
17.4.4.3
The results of the reviews must be provided to Project Team in formal, written reports
clearly
identifying all reviewed documents and the discovered discrepancies and
inconsistencies in the Drawings and Specifications with notations and recommendations
made on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents. CM@Risk must meet with
Project Team to discuss any findings and review reports.
17.4.4.4
CM@Risk s reviews must be from a
perspective, and though it will serve to
eliminate/reduce the number of RFIs) and changes during the construction phase,
responsibility for the Drawings and Specifications will remain with the Design Professional
and not CM@Risk.
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-70 of 75
17.4.5
It is
responsibility
to assist the Design Professional in ascertaining that, in
professional opinion, the Construction Documents are in accordance with
applicable Laws, Regulations, or Legal Requirements, building codes, sound engineering
rules and regulations. If CM@Risk recognizes that portions of the Construction
Documents are at variance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes,
sound engineering
rules and regulations, it must promptly notify the Project Team
in writing, describing the apparent variance of deficiency. However, the Design Professional
is ultimately responsible for the compliance of the Drawings and Specifications with those
laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, rules and regulations.
17.4.6
The Project Team will routinely identify and evaluate using value analysis principles and
alternate systems, approaches, design changes that have the potential to reduce Project
costs while still delivering a high quality and fully functional Project consistent with
the Project Program. If the Project Team agrees, CM@Risk in cooperation with the Design
Professional,
will perform a cost/benefit analysis of the alternatives and submit such in
writing to the Project Team. City, through the Project Manager, will direct which alternatives
will be incorporated into
the Project.
The Design Professional will have full design
responsibility for the review and incorporation of CM@Risk suggested alternatives into
the Drawings and Specifications. CM@Risk must analyze the costs and schedule impacts of
the
alternatives
against the
Baseline
Cost
Model
and
Schedule
and
provide
a
recommendation for the Project
consideration
and
approval prior to the
establishment of the GMP.
17.5
BASELINE COSTS MODEL, DETAILED COST ESTIMATES, AND SCHEDULE OF VALUES
17.5.1
At the conclusion of the Master Planning and Programming, if required, CM@Risk will
review all available information regarding the design and scope of the Project using
experience in performing similar work, knowledge of similar projects and
current and projected
construction costs and, based upon that review, must develop a
Baseline Cost Model for review by the Project Team and approval by City. Once approved
by City, the Baseline Cost Model will be continually referenced as detailed estimates are
created as the design progresses throughout Pre-Construction until the final GMP for the
entire Project is established. A final GMP for the entire Project must be established and
approved by City prior to the start of construction. It is the responsibility of CM@Risk
to ensure City has sufficient information to evaluate and approve a final GMP prior to
the time necessary to start construction so construction can be completed within the
Agreement Time. The Project Detailed Cost Estimate will be the best representation from
CM@Risk of what the complete functional
construction costs will be as indicated
by the most current available documents and will be
constantly checked against the
Baseline Cost Model. CM@Risk must communicate to the Project Team and assumptions
made in preparing the Baseline Cost Model.
The Baseline Cost
Model must support
Detailed Cost Estimates and may be broken down initially as dictated by the
available information, as required by City.
17.5.2
After receipt of the Design
most current documents from certain specified
pre- construction milestones, CM@Risk must provide a draft Detailed Cost Estimate
including a detailed written report detailing any variances to the Baseline Cost Model and
Baseline Project Schedule. The Design Professional and CM@Risk will reconcile any
disagreements on the estimate to arrive at an agreed upon Detailed Cost Estimate for the
construction costs based on
the scope of the Project through that specified pre-
construction milestone. Pre-Construction milestones applicable to this paragraph are:
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-71 of 75
Master Planning and Programming, Schematic Design, 50% Design Development, 100%
Design Development, and 50% Construction Drawings, If no consensus is reached, City will
make the final determination. If the Project Team
requires additional updates of the
Detailed Cost Estimate beyond that specified in this paragraph, CM@Risk must provide the
requested information in a timely manner.
17.5.3
If at any point the Detailed Cost Estimate submitted to City exceeds the previously
accepted Baseline Cost Model or previously approved Detailed Cost Estimate agreed to as
set forth in Section 17.5.2 above, CM@Risk must make appropriate recommendations to
project Team on means/methods, materials, and or other design elements that it
believes will reduce the estimated construction costs, such that it is equal to or less than
the established Project
Baseline Cost Model.
17.5.4
Unless other levels of completion are agreed to in writing in the Construction Documents,
at 50% Construction Drawings and included with the associated report, CM@Risk must
also submit to the Project Team for review and approval a Schedule of Values that complies
with the following requirements. The Schedule of Values must be based on City standard
bid schedule and highlight significant variances from any previously submitted Schedule
of Values. The Schedule of Values must be directly related to the breakdowns reflected in
the Detailed Project Schedule and
Detailed Cost Estimate. In addition, the
Schedule of Values must: (a) detail unit prices and quantity take-offs, (b) detail all other
contingencies and unit price Work shown and specified in the detailed design documents.
17.5.5
CM@Risk is to track, estimate/price and address the Project
overall project cost issues
that arise outside of the Baseline Cost Model and the latest approved Detailed Cost
Estimate
such as: City generated changes, Project Team proposed changes, alternate
system analysis, constructability items and value engineering analysis. The system used
to implement this process will be referred to as the Design Evolution Log. This is to be
addressed between the Baseline Cost Model and the Master Planning and Programming
Detailed Cost Estimate, and then (unless other levels of completion are agreed to in writing
in the Construction Documents) between the Detailed Cost Estimates for each of the pre-
construction milestones thereafter, Schematic Design, 50% Design Development, 100%
Design Development, and 50%
Construction Documents, and the bid packages for all
Phases.
17.5.6
Upon request by City, CM@Risk must submit to City a cash flow projection for the Project
based on the current updated/revised Detailed Project Schedule and the anticipated level of
payments for CM@Risk during the design and construction phases. In addition, if requested
by City and based on information provided by City, CM@Risk must prepare a cash flow
projection for the entire Project based on historical records for similar types of projects
to assist City in the financing process.
17.5.7
Construction Water. CM@Risk must estimate the quantity of water to be used and include
the cost thereof in each Detailed Cost Estimate and GMP Proposal provided by City.
17.6
SUBCONTRACTOR AND MAJOR SUPPLIER SELECTIONS
17.6.1
There are two ways to select Subcontractors and major Suppliers prior to submission of a
GMP Proposal: (1) qualifications-based selection; or (2) a combination of qualifications
and price. Except as noted below, the selection of Subcontractors/Suppliers is the sole
responsibility of CM@Risk. In any case, CM@Risk is solely responsible for the performance
of the selected Subcontractors/Suppliers, and for compliance with the requirements of
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-72 of 75
Title 34 of the Arizona Revised Statutes in the selection of a Subcontractors/Suppliers,
to the extent applicable. CM@Risk must comply with its Subcontractor Selection Plan
submitted with its Statement of Qualifications.
17.6.2
City may approve the selection of a Subcontractor(s) or Suppliers(s) based only on their
qualifications when CM@Risk can demonstrate it is in the best interest of the Project. All
Work
that is performed, after such a qualifications-based selection, for a price that is
negotiated by CM@Risk will be billed in accordance with the GMP for actual costs and may
be subject to audit by City.
17.6.2.1
Qualifications based selection of a Subcontractor(s)/Supplier(s) should only occur prior to
the submittal of the GMP Proposal.
17.6.2.2
If a Subcontractor/Supplier selection plan was submitted and agreed to by City, CM@Risk
must apply the plan in the evaluation of the qualifications of a Subcontractor(s) or
Supplier(s) and provide City with its review and recommendations.
17.6.2.3
CM@Risk must receive written City approval for each selected Subcontractor(s) and
Supplier(s).
17.6.2.4
CM@Risk must negotiate costs for services/supplies from each Subcontractor/Supplier
selected under this method.
17.6.3
All Work must be competitively bid unless a Subcontractor or Supplier was selected pursuant
to Section 17.6.2 above.
17.6.3.1
CM@Risk must develop Subcontractor and Supplier interest, submit the names of a
minimum of three qualified Subcontractors or Suppliers for each trade in the Project for
approval by City and solicit bids for the various Work categories. If there are not three
qualified Subcontractors/Suppliers available for a specific trade or there are extenuating
circumstances warranting such, CM@Risk may request approval by City to submit less
than three names. Without prior written notice to City, no change in the recommended
Subcontractors/Supplies will be allowed.
17.6.3.2
If City objects to any nominated Subcontractor/Supplier or to any self-performed Work for
good
reason, CM@Risk must nominate a substitute Subcontractor/Supplier that is
acceptable to City.
17.6.3.3
CM@Risk must distribute Drawings and Specifications, and when appropriate, conduct a
Pre- Bid Conference with prospective Subcontractors and Suppliers.
17.6.3.4
If CM@Risk desires to self-perform certain portions of the Work, it must request to be one of
the approved Subcontractor bidders for those specific bid packages.
bid will
be evaluated in accordance with the process identified below. If events warrant and City
concurs
that it is necessary in order to ensure compliance with the Project Schedule
and/or the most recent Detailed Cost Estimate, CM@Risk may be authorized to self-
perform Work without bidding or rebidding the Work. When CM@Risk self-performs work
without bidding, only the actual costs associated with performing the Work in accordance
with the approved GMP will be billed and may be subject to audit by City.
17.6.3.5
CM@Risk must receive, open, record and evaluate
the bids; provided, however, that if
CM@Risk or one of its affiliates is bidding to self-perform the Work that is the subject of the
bid, then the bids must be received, opened, recorded and evaluated by Project Manager
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-73 of 75
instead of CM@Risk. Bids for each category of Work must be opened and recorded at a
pre-determined
time. The apparent low bidders must be interviewed to determine the
responsiveness of their
proposals. In evaluating the responsiveness of bid proposals
CM@Risk, in addition to bid price,
may consider the following factors: past performance
on
similar
projects,
qualifications
and
experience of personnel assigned, quality
management plan, approach or understanding of the
Work to be performed, and
performance
schedule
to
complete
the
Work.
The
final
evaluation
of
Subcontractor/Supplier bids must be done with Project Manager in attendance to observe
and witness the process. CM@Risk mustresolve anySubcontractor/Supplier bid withdrawal,
protest or disqualification in connection with the award at no increase in the Cost of Work.
17.6.4
CM@Risk will be required to prepare two different reports on the subcontracting process.
17.6.4.1
Within fifteen days after each major Subcontractor/Supplier bid opening process;
CM@Risk
must
prepare
a
report
for
review
and
approval
identifying
the
recommended Subcontractors/Supplier for each category of Work. The report must detail:
(a) the name of the
recommended Subcontractor/Supplier and the amount of the
Subcontractor/Supplier bid for each sub-agreement; (b) the sum of all recommended
Subcontractor/Supplier bids received; (c) and trade work and its cost that CM@Risk intends
to self-perform, if any.
17.6.4.2
Upon completion of the Subcontractor/Supplier bidding process, CM@Risk must submit
a summary report to City of the entire Subcontractor/Supplier selection process. The report
must indicate, by bid process, all Subcontractors/Suppliers contacted to determine
interest, the Subcontractors/Suppliers solicited, the bids received and costs negotiated,
and the recommended Subcontractors/Suppliers for each category of Work.
17.6.5
The approved Subcontractors/Suppliers will provide a Schedule of Values with their bid
proposals, which will be used to create the overall Project Schedule of Values.
17.6.6
If after receipt of sub-bids or after award to Subcontractors and Suppliers, City objects to
any
nominated Subcontractor/Supplier or to any self-performed Work without any
reasonable basis,
CM@Risk must nominate a substitute Subcontractor or Supplier,
preferably if such option is still available, from those who submitted Subcontractor bids
for the Work affected. Once such substitute Subcontractors and Suppliers are consented
to by
proposed GMP
for the Work or portion thereof must be
correspondingly adjusted to reflect any higher or lower costs form any such substitution.
17.7
GMP PROPOSAL
17.7.1
When a GMP Proposal is submitted for a phase of the Work, the GMP will have a Detailed Cost
Estimate of the Costs of the Work (as set forth in Section 15.2) in each phase of the Work
that is being proposed plus the current estimate for all other Work. City will not approve
the GMP for the phase of work without a total estimate for the complete Project. City may
request a GMP
Proposal for all or any portion of the Project and at any time during pre-
construction. Any GMP Proposals submitted by CM@Risk must be based on and consistent
with Baseline Cost Model and the current update/revised Detailed Cost Estimate at the
time of the request and include any clarifications or assumptions upon which the GMP
Proposal(s) are based.
17.7.2
A GMP Proposal for the entire Project will be the sum of the Cost of the Work, CM@Risk Fee,
and General Conditions Cost. CM@Risk guarantees to complete the Project at or less than
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-74 of 75
the final GMP Proposal amount plus approved Change Orders. CM@Risk will be responsible
for any costs for expenses that would cause the Cost of the Work actually incurred,
including the Construction Fee and General Conditions Costs, to exceed the GMP.
17.7.3
CM@Risk must prepare its GMP Proposal in accordance with Ci
request for GMP Proposal
requirements based on the most current completed Drawings and Specifications at that
time, which unless otherwise directed by City in writing, will be at 100% Construction
Drawings. CM@Risk must mark the face of each document of each set upon which its GMP
Proposal is
based.
These documents must be identified as the GMP Plans and
Specifications. CM@Risk
must send one set of those documents to the Project Manager,
keep one set and return the third set to the Design Professional.
17.7.4
An updated/revised Detailed Project Schedule, Equipment Plan, and Schedule of Values
must
be included in any GMP Proposal(s), all of which must reflect the GMP Plans and
Specifications
the Detailed Project Schedule must be shown in relationship to the Project
Schedule and identify any variance to the Baseline Project Schedule. Any such Detailed
Project Schedule updates/revisions must continue to comply with the requirements of
Section 17.3.1 through 17.3.5.
17.7.5
GMP Proposals(s) Review and Approval
17.7.5.1
CM@Risk must meet with the Project Team to review the GMP Proposal(s) and the written
statement of its basis.
In the event the Project Team discovers inconsistencies or
inaccuracies
in the information presented,
CM@Risk
must make adjustments
as
necessary to the GMP Proposal.
17.7.5.2
If during the review and negotiation of GMP Proposals design changes are required, City
may authorize and cause the Design Professional to revise the GMP Plans and Specifications
to the extent necessary to reflect the agreed-upon assumptions and clarifications contained
in the final approved GMP Proposal. Such revised GMP Plans and Specification will be
furnished to CM@Risk. CM@Risk must promptly notify the Project Team in writing if any
such revised
GMP Plans and Specifications are inconsistent with the agreed upon
assumptions and clarifications.
17.7.6
All portions of or items comprising the GMP Proposal are subject to audit by City, as
deemed appropriate by City, including, without limitation, any based upon unit prices or
Work to be self- performed by CM@Risk, or its affiliates.
17.8
PAYMENT PROCEDURE FOR PRE-CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
17.8.1
Requests for monthly payments by CM@Risk for Pre-Construction Services must be
submitted monthly and must be accompanied by a progress report, detailed invoices
and receipts, if
applicable. Any requests for payment must include, as a minimum, a
narrative description of the tasks accomplished during the billing period, a listing of any
Deliverables submitted, and copies of any
requests for payment, plus
similar narrative and listings of Deliverables associated with their Work. Payment for
services negotiated as a lump sum will be made in accordance with the percentage of work
completed during the preceding month.
17.8.2
In no event will City pay more than seventy-five (75%) of the Agreement Price until
acceptance of ALL Pre-Construction Services and award of the final approved Construction
Services Agreement for the entire Project by City Council. If CM@Risk does not prepare a
General Conditions
Revised: 7/20/22
GC-75 of 75
GMP Proposal that is
acceptable to City, or the
GMP Proposal exceeds
Construction Budget, then CM@Risk understands and acknowledges that it will forfeit any
right to receive the 25% of the Agreement Price being retained by City.
17.8.3
CM@Risk agrees that no charges or claims for costs or damages of any type will be made by
it for any delays or hindrances beyond the reasonable control of City during the progress of
any
portion of Pre-Construction Services specified in this Agreement. Such delays or
hindrances, if
any, will be solely compensated for by an extension of time for such
reasonable period and may be mutually agreed between the parties. It is understood
and agreed, however, that permitting CM@Risk to proceed to complete any such Services,
in whole or in part after the date to which the time of completion may have been extended,
will in no way act as a waiver on the part of City of any of their respective legal rights herein.
17.8.4
No compensation to CM@Risk will be allowed contrary to Article I, Chapter I, Title 34 of the
Arizona Revised Statutes.
17.8.5
If any service(s) executed by CM@Risk is abandoned or suspended in whole or in part, for
a period of more than 180 days through no fault of CM@Risk, CM@Risk is to be paid for
the services performed prior to the abandonment or suspension.
17.9
SURVIVAL OF THE DESIGN SERVICES AGREEMENT, DUTIES, OBLIGATIONS AND
WARRANTIES
If the GMP Proposal is accepted by City and a Construction Agreement is entered into
between City and CM@Risk, the duties, obligations and warranties of CM@Risk under the
Pre- Construction Services Agreement survive and are incorporated into the resulting
Construction Agreement.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-1 of 33
General Conditions Appendices
SECTION 15 – APPENDICES
The following Appendices attached hereto are referenced in the General Conditions and
are incorporated herein.
Appendix 1 – Policy Statement for Calculating Delays and Damages
Appendix 2 – Cost Reduction Incentive Proposals for Design Bid Build Agreements
Appendix 3 – Contractor’s Affidavit Regarding Settlement of Claims
Appendix 4 – Forms of Performance Bond
Appendix 5 – Forms of Payment Bond
Appendix 6 – Dispute Resolution
Appendix 7 – Certificate of Completion
Appendix 8 – Construction Sign Detail
Appendix 9 – Cost of the Work (Applicable solely to Construction Manager at Risk and
Job Order Contracting)
Appendix 10 Landscape Establishment Period
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-2 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
CALCULATING DELAYS AND DAMAGES
The purpose of this policy statement is to establish guidelines and procedures for negotiation between
the Contractor and City of Chandler relating to compensation for delays pursuant to Arizona Revised
Statutes (A.R.S.) 34-221(F). This policy statement contains notice requirements in addition to those set
forth in the Agreement Documents, and will be the Agreement Provision contemplated by that statute.
NOTE: As used herein, the term “Engineer” will refer to the City of Chandler City Engineer or
his/her designated representative. Nothing in this Policy Statement will be construed to void any
provision in the Agreement which requires timely notice of delays or provides for arbitration or
any other procedure for settlement or provides for liquidated damages.
I.
TYPES OF DELAYS:
For the purposes of this document, there are essentially four types of delays encountered by
City
of Chandler Construction Contractors; excusable/compensable, excusable/non-
compensable, non- excusable, and concurrent. Only delays that extend Agreement
Completion Time set forth in the Agreement Document will be considered for issues
relating to Agreement extensions or additional compensation. All other delays are
considered to be activity delays and do not entitle the Contractor to either time extensions
or additional compensation. Agreement Completion Time will be defined as the date set forth
in Maricopa Association of Governments (MAG) Uniform Standard Specification Section 101
and as may be modified by the Agreement Documents.
A.
Excusable/Compensable:
These are delays caused solely by the City’s actions or inactions, are unreasonable
under the circumstances, and which were not within the contemplation of the
parties to the Agreement at or prior to the time of execution of the Agreement.
Since the Contractor presumably has no control over the events causing the delay,
he may be entitled to both Agreement time extensions and additional compensation
for delay damages. Further, he/she may be entitled to additional compensation from
the impact of that delay on other work. Examples of excusable/compensable (E/C)
delays include: failure to properly locate an underground City-owned utility within 2
feet of the actual location; failure to relocate City-owned utilities far enough in
advance of construction in an area where the Contractor is scheduled to work that
it delays start or completion of the Contractor’s regularly scheduled work; failure
to provide City-furnished equipment or materials in a timely manner if required by
the Agreement; failure to acquire necessary Right-of-Way or Public Utility Easements
prior to the Contractor beginning Work in the area; failure to timely return Shop
Drawings or other Agreement Submittals in accordance with the Agreement;
unreasonable delay by the City in making decisions which affect critical activities;
surveying errors when the City is contractually responsible for providing Project
Surveying. This list is not meant to be all inclusive, but is intended merely as examples
of the type of City action or inaction which can result in a Contractor’s claim for
additional time and compensation.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-3 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
B.
Excusable/Non-compensable:
These are delays over which neither the City nor the Contractor had control. Since
both parties to the Agreement have been potentially damaged by the delay, but
neither have caused it, only Time Extensions are warranted. Examples of excusable,
non-compensable (E/N) delays include: unusually severe weather; fire; acts of God;
failure of non-City owned utilities (SRP, CenturyLink, Cable TV, Southern Pacific
Railroad, and Southwest Gas, etc.) to properly or timely locate accurately; failure of
non-City owned utilities to relocate in advance of construction; the voluntary or
involuntary filing for Bankruptcy protection by a Supplier or Subcontractor which
causes the Supplier/Subcontractor to fail to meet a contractual deadline provided the
Contractor can provide documentation that he/she executed the required Purchase
Orders/Subcontract Agreements and received delivery schedules which, if met,
would have eliminated the delay; delays as a result of an incomplete shutdown of a
City or non-City owned utility main (the City does not guarantee a complete
shutdown). This list also is not necessarily all inclusive but merely indicative of type
and class of E/N delays.
C.
Non-excusable/Non-compensable:
These are delays caused by the actions or inactions of Contractor or an officer,
employee, agent, Subcontractor, Supplier or any other party for whom the Contractor
is responsible. Since the Contractor has assumed responsibility for the risks
associated with the events that caused the delay, he/she are not entitled to either time
extensions or monetary delay damages. All non-excusable delays are also non-
compensable. Examples of non- excusable, non-compensable (N/N) delays include:
failure to perform by the Contractor, its Subcontractors and/or Suppliers (except as
noted in section I.B above); failure to provide adequate labor, materials, and/or
equipment on the Project; failure to perform contractually-required coordination
with utilities, agencies and other Contractors; failure to notify the Engineer, in writing,
of delay impacts within two working days, as required by MAG 104.2.3, or the next
work day, as required by MAG 109.8.2; failure to timely submit Shop Drawings; failure
to pothole or otherwise visually locate utilities sufficiently ahead of the Work to allow
the Engineer to direct corrective action when necessary; delays due to retesting of
previously failed work, re-inspection, and/or restaking resulting from faulty
workmanship, poor quality control, or lack of compliance with Agreement
Specifications. Again, this list is not necessarily all inclusive.
D.
Concurrent:
When two or more delays occur simultaneously or overlap, each delay is analyzed
separately to determine its impact on the overall project completion date based on
when that delay started. Once again, only those delays which actually extend the
Agreement completion time are considered as delays. The concurrent delay is
considered an additional delay only to the extent it prolongs the delay to the
Agreement Completion Time beyond the date that the one it is concurrent with had
already delayed that date. For example, if two delays are concurrent, and one is five
days long and the second is seven days long, the second concurrent delay will only
extend the Agreement Completion Time by two days. The same method of analysis is
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-4 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
used when there are multiple concurrent delays. Only those extending the Project
Completion Date are considered to be delays for the purposes of this policy. The
portion of each concurrent delay that delays the completion of the work is classified
in the same manner as described previously for individual delays and being either E/C,
E/N or N/N.
An example of a concurrent delay is where the City delays furnishing material, but
the Contractor could not have installed it anyway due to unusually severe weather. The
effect of the first delaying activity will extend for the full duration and will be
considered controlling on the Contractor’s schedule. A subsequent, concurrent delay
will thereafter only be considered to effect the project completion (if at all) once the
first delaying activity has ceased to impact the project completion. In this case, if the
unusually severe weather continued and delayed the work after the material was
delivered, the first portion of the delay would be classified E/C (delay for material)
and the second as E/N (delay due to unusually severe weather). Using the procedure
set forth above, the entire concurrent portion would be considered E/C as shown in
the chart which follows.
Example of a Concurrent Delay:
E/C Delay
E/N Delay
City Related Material Delay
Rain Delay
II.
ANALYZING THE DELAY:
The Contractor must provide all documents required or requested by the Engineer to analyze the
delay(s). It is important to understand that, prior to the delay analysis, delays and their impacts are
alleged issues. The information the Contractor provides will be compared with the Inspector’s Daily
Log, Schedules and other available Project information and together they will support or refute that
delays occurred and, if so, how they impact other work and the overall project completion. The
Contractor’s delay in providing these documents will be considered prima facie evidence that either
the delay did not occur or it did not impact the Project Completion Date and any claim for time
extension or damages will be denied.
The Engineer will accept delay analyses in CPM format, as these may demonstrate to his/her
satisfaction whether or not Project Completion has been impacted by a specific event. If the Contractor
chooses not to use CPM scheduling procedures, then the burden will be on the Contractor to prove
to the Engineer’s satisfaction that the Project Completion has been impacted. The procedures
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-5 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
below assume that the Contractor is using CPM scheduling methods. As a minimum the Contractor
must provide the following materials to the Engineer:
A.
As-Planned Schedule. The initial construction schedule, required by the Agreement
Documents, will be considered the baseline schedule.
It is to the Contractor’s
advantage that the As-Planned (baseline) Schedule be as detailed as possible in order
for delays, as they occur, to be incorporated into the schedule in representative
locations. It is also to the Contractor’s advantage to use a computer software program
to generate the schedule since updated schedules are required monthly by the
Agreement Documents and since updated schedules are required to support
delays and requests for additional compensation for delays. The As-Planned
(baseline) Schedule must be presented in network format which clearly shows the
interrelationships of the activities. The Contractor must also provide a printout of the
activities showing early start, early finish, late start, late finish, duration and float. The
activity list printout must also indicate predecessor and successor activities.
B.
As-Built Schedules. The as planned (baseline) schedule must be updated with
complete progress-to-date information (actualized) up to the date of the start of the
alleged delay. Each updated schedule will serve as the as-built schedule for analyzing
the alleged delay and provide a new baseline as-planned schedule for the next delay.
This process must be repeated for each alleged delay as it occurs. In updating the
baseline schedule, the alleged delay must be treated as an activity and inserted into the
schedule as a predecessor to the impacted activity (ies). When an activity that has
already started is impacted, it is preferable to divide this activity into two parts and
show the impact affecting the second part. For schedules which incorporate a time
line (or data date), the delay activity must be inserted at the time it actually occurred.
Some software scheduling programs have a PAUSE-RESUME feature that can be
used to facilitate the requirements. The updated schedule must also be accompanied
by a listing of activities as with the baseline schedule. This activities list must contain
the alleged delay as an activity showing the duration and the activities which are
predecessors and successors to it. When computer generated schedules are used,
the Contractor must provide, in electronic media format, the complete data files for
the updated schedule that included the delay activity, preferably either in Suretrak
or in Microsoft Project. Each electronic media must contain a label identifying the
Project name, Contractor’s name, program name and version number, data date
and project finish date.
C.
Other Documents: In order to determine the amount of the alleged delay and if it
is compensable, the Contractor must provide all backup documentation relevant to the
issue and as required by the Engineer. This documentation must include copies of
such items as: purchase orders; delivery schedules; correspondence; memoranda of
telephone calls; force account daily worksheets (initialed by the Inspector); payroll
data; estimating (bid) worksheets; and any other materials which may be requested
by the Engineer.
D.
Procedure: Only after receipt of sufficient documentation will the Engineer analyze
each alleged delay and determine if it is supported or refuted. If supported, the
Engineer will determine if it is excusable or non-excusable, compensable or non-
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-6 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
compensable. If the Engineer determines that the delay did not affect the Project
Completion, the as-planned schedule, which has been updated to the date of the
alleged delay, must be revised to indicate this. If the Engineer determines the delay
did occur but was N/N, then no time extension will be granted. It is imperative that
an actualized schedule be submitted as soon as the occurrence of the alleged delay
is known. In no event will the Contractor submit an actualized updated schedule
later than 60 days after the occurrence of the alleged delay becomes known.
If the Engineer determines the delay did occur and was excusable but, due to a
reason listed in section I.B. is non-compensable, he/she will determine the length of
the E/N delay and prepare a Change Order to add that time to the Agreement. The
Engineer’s decision will be final.
If the Engineer determines the delay was excusable and compensable, he/she will
determine the length of the E/C delay and proceed to review the Contractor’s damage
calculations in accordance with Section III. The Engineer will check the Contractor’s
calculations, review the backup documentation provided, and prepare a Change
Order to cover both the additional compensation and the time extension. The
Engineer’s decision on both the time extension and additional compensation for the
delay will be final.
If the issue involves a concurrent delay, the Engineer will analyze available data
to determine the portions which are E/C, E/N, and/or N/N as described above. The
Engineer will proceed to determine the length of E/C delay and verify the Contractor’s
delay damage calculations, if any are provided. Upon completion of this review, the
Engineer will prepare a Change Order for the Contractor’s review and signature.
The Engineer’s decision regarding excusable delay and additional compensation for
the delay is final.
The amount of time the Engineer will require to analyze the alleged delay(s) will
depend upon the Engineer’s workload, the complexity of the delay analysis,
availability of supporting data, extent of cooperation by the Contractor, and other
factors beyond the Engineer’s control. It is entirely possible other delay(s) may occur
while the Engineer is analyzing particular claim for delay(s). The Engineer’s failure to
respond to the Contractor in a set period of time will not be used as the basis for
a further delay claim or as justification for extending and existing delay claim. The
time required for delay analysis by the Engineer will not be counted against the time
allotted for processing Final Payment as required by (MAG Section 109.7(B)) or the
release of retention and Final Payment as prescribed by A.R.S. Arizona Revised
Statutes §34-221.
III.
CALCULATING MONETARY DELAY DAMAGES:
Additional compensation for delay, when authorized by the Engineer, will be calculated in accordance
with MAG Section 109.5 ACTUAL COST WORK with the following exceptions:
A.
No additional compensation or other monetary damages will be awarded or paid for
any loss of anticipated profits by the Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-7 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
B.
No additional compensation or other monetary damages will be awarded for home
office overhead or non-project general conditions of the Contractor, Subcontractors
or Suppliers.
C.
Equipment:
1.
Contractor-owned
equipment
rate
calculations
must
be
computed
in
accordance with Section 109.04(D)(3), Arizona Department of Transportation
“Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction,” 2008 or latest
edition and as modified herein. Year and regional adjustment factors must be
based on the most recent publications of the Rental Rate Blue Book for
Construction
Equipment,
published
by
the
Equipment
Guide-Book
Company, San Jose, CA, same as provided by ADOT and in print as of the
date of alleged delay. In no event will the compensation for Contractor-
owned equipment exceed the purchase price, including tax, paid by the
Contractor for the equipment. Compensation will not be allowed for small tools
or equipment that show a daily equipment rental rate of less than $5.00 per
day or for unlisted equipment that has a value of less than for hundred
dollars ($400.00).
2.
For leased and rented equipment or equipment not otherwise listed in the
Blue Book, rental contracts, or other supporting data will be used to establish
the hourly rate. No hourly operating expense will be allowed for delay on
standby equipment. In no case will equipment be considered for rental which
exceeds the hourly rate for the first eight hours and the daily rate divided
by eight for all additional hours as compared with similar equipment listed in
the Blue Book. The hourly standby rate must be computed as the lesser of:
a.
Dividing the monthly invoice or rental value by 176 hours
per month when the equipment is utilized by the Contractor
for more than three weeks;
b.
Dividing the monthly invoice or rental value by 40 hours per
week when the equipment is utilized by the Contractor for
more than three days.
In no event will compensation be paid for delay at more than
8 hours per day or 40 hours per week.
3.
Except for vehicles used by supervisory personnel, all equipment will be paid
at the “standby” rate during the delay period.
4.
Equipment brought solely to mitigate the delay (such as pumps, light plants,
etc.) may be paid in accordance with ADOT section 109.04(D) (3).
5.
The Blue Book regional adjustment will apply in determining rental rates.
D.
Material:
Allowable material charges may include, in addition to material incorporated in the
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-8 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
work material used to mitigate the delay such as barricades, plates, shoring, cold
mix, etc. Except in emergencies the Contractor will not employ such material
without the prior written approval of the Engineer.
E.
Labor:
1.
Except for Supervisory Personnel (Superintendent, Project Engineer, and
Foremen), labor wages will not be paid after the first one-half day of claimed
delay or impact.
It is expected the Contractor will reassign or layoff
unneeded employees.
2.
For Foreman wages to be included, that Foreman must have been actively
employed on the project prior to the commencement of the delay and be
directly responsible for the activity being delayed.
3.
Labor burden must be actual amounts incurred but must not exceed the
ADOT approved rate.
F.
All costs (equipment, material, and labor) must be substantiated by the City of
Chandler’s Daily Work Reports.
IV.
DOCUMENT REQUIRED FOR CLAIM ANALYSIS:
For purposes of reviewing the Contractor’s request for additional compensation, it will be required
that the Contractor submit the following listed information. Information requested must be prepared
on forms which are substantially similar to the City of Chandler’s Daily Work Report form, a copy of
which is attached as an exhibit.
A.
Labor:
For each employee, laborer, and foreman, for which compensation is requested:
Name, classification, dates of work performed, daily hours worked, total hours worked,
labor rates, labor burden rates, overtime or premium time charges. Further, the
Contractor must make available for inspection and copying to the Engineer the
following listed documentation.
1.
Certified payroll reports for the period of work claimed.
2.
Accounting of Fringe Benefits – certified by a CPA.
3.
Contractor’s and Subcontractor’s daily field reports and daily diaries.
B.
Materials:
For all materials for which compensation is requested, if any, total quantities of
materials, prices, extensions and transportation costs must be provided on a daily
basis. Further, the Contractor must make available for inspection and copying to the
Engineer the following listed documentation.
1.
Invoices for all materials incorporated.
2.
Weigh tickets.
3.
Purchase orders.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-9 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
4.
Delivery schedules.
5.
Quotes or proposals from manufacturers or supplier.
6.
Freight bills, Bills of Lading, or other documentation to show transportation
costs.
7.
Restocking charges-invoices from vendor.
C.
Equipment:
For all equipment, the Contractor must provide the Engineer with the designation,
dates and hours of usage, dates and hours of standby, if any, daily hours, total hours,
rental rates and extension for each unit of equipment and machinery. Rental
rates will be as established in Section III. Further, the Contractor must make available
for inspection and copying to the Engineer the following listed documentation.
1.
Owned:
a.
Purchase contracts(s).
b.
Depreciationschedule(s).
c.
Invoices for fuel, lube, repairs and other operating costs.
2.
Leased:
a.
Lease agreement with hourly rate, overtime rate, double shift rate, etc.
b.
Invoices or other documentation showing hours worked on a daily
basis.
D.
Subcontractors/Owner-Operators:
In the event the Contractor submits a claim which includes requests for compensation
for Subcontractors of Owner-Operators, the same information requested of the
Contractor must be provided by the Subcontractor/Owner-Operator. Further, the
Contractor must make available for inspection and copying to the Engineer the
following listed documentation.
1.
Bid/Estimate work sheets and/or spreadsheets.
2.
Subcontract Agreements or Agreements with Owner-Operator.
3.
All invoices and billing statements received from the Subcontractor/Owner-
Operator which relates to the amount requested.
E.
Miscellaneous:
Further, the Contractor must make available for inspection and copying to the Engineer
the following listed documentation.
1.
Evidence of payment for bonds and insurance premiums (MAG 109.5.6).
2.
Taxes – unless the Contractor can show otherwise, taxes are reimbursable at
65% of the total cost (less bonds and insurance).
V.
TIME LIMIT ON SUBMISSIONS OF CLAIM FOR DELAY OR IMPACT DAMAGES:
No claims for delay or impact damages will be considered or allowed more than 45 days after the
event or occurrence which the Contractor claims gives rise to the delay or impact. In no event will a
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-10 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 1
claim for delay or impact damages be considered after submission by the Contractor of the Final
Payment Request.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-11 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 2
COST REDUCTION INCENTIVE PROPOSALS
FOR DESIGN BID BUILD AGREEMENTS
The Contractor may submit to the Engineer proposals for modifying the Plans, Specifications, or
other requirements of the Agreement for the sole purpose of reducing the total cost of Project
construction. The proposals must not impair in any manner the essential functions or characteristics
of the project; including but not limited to service life, economy of operations, ease of maintenance,
desired appearance, compatibility with existing or planned equipment, standardization of systems,
or design and safety standards.
It must not be inferred from this Policy that the Engineer is required to consider any proposal
submitted.
Submissions that propose changes in the basic design of a bridge, propose changes in pipe line
size, materials, bedding conditions, pipe specifications; or that propose any change in pavement design
will not be considered.
Proposals submitted pursuant to this Policy will be identified as Cost Reduction Incentive Proposals.
They must be submitted in writing and, at a minimum, contain the following.
1.
Complete the attached or similar cost reduction incentive proposal form.
2.
A description of both the existing Agreement Requirements for performing the work
and the proposed changes.
3.
All Engineering Drawings and computations necessary for the thorough and
expeditious evaluation.
4.
An itemization of the existing Agreement Requirements that must be changed if the
Proposal is adopted and a recommendation as to the manner in which the change
should be made.
5.
A detailed estimate of the cost of performing the Work under the existing
Agreement and under the proposed changes, including the cost of developing and
implementing the changes.
6.
The Agreement items affected by the proposed changes and any variations in
quantities resulting from the changes.
7.
An objective estimate of any effects the proposal will have on collateral cost to the
City, costs of related items, and cost of maintenance and operation.
8.
A statement as to the effect that the Proposal will have on the time for the completion
of the Project.
9.
A statement as to the time by which a Change Order adopting the Proposal must
be executed or when the Engineer must have given verbal approval.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-12 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 2
Proposals will be processed expeditiously; however, the City will not be liable for any delay in acting
upon any Proposal nor for any failure to accept any Proposal pursuant to this Special Provision.
The Engineer will be the sole judge of the acceptability of a Proposal and of the estimated net savings
in construction costs from the adoption of all or any part of the Proposal. The Contractor will be
notified in writing by the Engineer as to whether his/her Proposal has been accepted. The decision by
the Engineer is final.
When the City deems such action to be appropriate, it reserves the right to require the Contractor to
share equally in the cost to the City of investigating, evaluating, and processing the proposal as a
condition for the consideration of such Proposal. Such cost must be shared whether the Proposal is
accepted or rejected. When such a condition is imposed, the City will estimate these costs and the
Contractor must indicate his acceptance thereof in writing. Such acceptance will authorize the City to
deduct the Contractor’s share of the costs from any monies due or that may become due to the
Contractor under the Agreement.
If the Contractor’s Proposal is accepted in whole or in part, the necessary Agreement Modifications
and Agreement Price Adjustments will be affected by the execution of a Change Order which will
specifically state that it is executed pursuant to this Special Provision.
The Contractor must continue to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the
Agreement until a Change Order incorporating the Proposal has been executed or until he/she has
been given verbal approval by the Engineer that his/her Proposal has been accepted. If the Change
Order has not been executed or he/she has not been given verbal approval on or before the date
specified on the attached cost reduction incentive proposal form or on or before such other date as the
Contractor may have subsequently specified in writing, the Proposal may be deemed to be rejected.
The executed Change Order will incorporate the changes in the Plans, Specifications, or other
requirements of the Agreement which are necessary to permit the Proposal, or such part of it which
has been accepted, to be put into effect, and will include any condition – upon which the City’s
approval thereof is based, if such approval is conditional. The executed Change Order may also
extend the time for the completion of the Agreement if such an extension has been deemed to be
warranted by the Engineer as a result of his evaluation of the Proposal.
The executed Change Order will also establish the estimated net savings in the cost of performing
the Work attributable to the Proposal effectuated by the Change Order. In determining the net
savings, the right is reserved to the Engineer to disregard the Agreement bid prices if, in his/her
judgment, such prices do not represent a fair measure of the value of the Work to be performed or
to be deleted. The net savings will be established by determining the Contractor’s cost of performing
the Work, taking into account his/her cost of developing the Proposal and implementing the change,
and reducing this amount by any ascertainable collateral costs to the City. The executed Change
Order may provide that the Contractor be paid 50 percent of the estimated net savings amount.
The executed Change Order may also provide for the adjustment in Agreement prices. Agreement
prices may be adjusted by subtracting the City’s share of the accrued net savings.
The amount specified to be paid to the Contractor in the executed Change Order which effectuates a
Cost Reduction Proposal will constitute full compensation to the Contractor for the Cost Reduction
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-13 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 2
Proposal and the performance of the work thereof pursuant to the said Change Order.
Upon acceptance of a Cost Reduction Incentive Proposal, any restrictions imposed by the
Contractor on its use or on disclosure of the information will become void, and the City thereafter
will have the right to use all or any part of the Proposal without obligation or compensation of any
kind to the Contractor.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-14 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 2
COST REDUCTION INCENTIVE PROPOSAL FORM
TO:
CIP City Engineer
FROM:
PROJECT NAME:
DR. AJ CHANDLER PARK PHASE 1
CITY PROJECT NUMBER:
CA2402.401
DATE:
Summary of Change (Brief description of proposed change including advantages and disadvantages):
ESTIMATED COST SUMMARY (Attached detailed estimate):
A.
Original Cost:
$
B.
Proposed Cost:
$
C.
Construction Savings (A-B):
$
D.
Gross Savings (Included OH
%, Bond
%)
$
E.
Contractor Implementing
$_
F.
City Implementing Cost:
$_
Reduction in Agreement Price (C+D-E-F) x 50%:
$
Date by which a Change Order must be issued so as to obtain maximum cost reduction:
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-15 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 3
CITY OF CHANDLER, ARIZONA
PUBLIC WORKS & UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT REGARDING SETTLEMENT OF CLAIMS
________________________, Arizona
Date ____________________________
Project Name: Dr. AJ Chandler Park Phase 1
City Project No.: CA2402.401
To the City of Chandler, Arizona
Gentlemen:
This is to certify that all lawful claims for materials, rental of equipment and labor used in connection
with the construction of the above project, whether by subcontractor or claimant in person, have been
duly discharged.
The undersigned, for the total compensation of $________________________, as set out in the final pay
application, as full and complete payment under the terms of the Agreement, hereby waives and
relinquishes any and all further claims or right of lien under, in connection with, or as a result of the
above described project. The undersigned further agrees to indemnify and save harmless the City of
Chandler against any and all liens, claims or liens, suits, actions, damages, charges and expenses
whatsoever, which said City may suffer arising out of the failure of the undersigned to pay for all labor
performances and materials furnished for the performance of said installation.
Signed and dated at ________________, this _________ day of _______________ 20_____.
__________________________________
CONTRACTOR
By _______________________________
STATE OF ARIZONA
)
) SS
COUNTY OF MARICOPA
)
The foregoing instrument was subscribed and sworn to before me this __________ day of
__________________ 20 _________.
___________________________________
Notary Public
___________________________________
My Commission Expires
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-16 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 4
PERFORMANCE BOND
ARIZONA STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND
PURSUANT TO TITLES 28, 34, AND 41, ARIZONA REVISED STATUTES
(Penalty of this bond must be 100% of the Agreement amount)
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS THAT:___________________________________________________
(hereinafter "Principal"), and __________________________________________________________ (hereinafter "Surety"), a
corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of ______________ with its principal office in the City
of _____________________________, holding a certificate of authority to transact surety business in Arizona issued by the
Director of Insurance pursuant to Title 20, Chapter 2, Article 1, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto
__________________________(hereinafter "Obligee") in the amount of __________________________________________ (Dollars)
($___________), for the payment whereof, Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators,
executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written Agreement with the Obligee, dated
the ____________ day of _______________________, 20___ for construction of CA2402.401, Dr. AJ Chandler Park Phase 1
which Agreement is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copies at length
herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the Principal faithfully performs
and fulfills all the undertakings, covenants, terms, and conditions of the Agreement during the original term of the
Agreement and any extension of the Agreement, with or without notice of the Surety, and during the life of any
guaranty required under the Agreement, and also performs and fulfills all the undertakings, covenants, terms,
conditions, and agreements of all duly authorized modifications of the Agreement that may hereafter be made,
notice of which modifications to the Surety being hereby waived, the above obligation is void. Otherwise it remains
in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Title 34, Chapter 2, Article 2,
Arizona Revised Statutes, and all liabilities on this bond will be determined in accordance with the provisions of Title
34, Chapter 2, Article 2, Arizona Revised Statutes, to the same extent as if it were copied at length in this Agreement.
The prevailing party in a suit on this bond may recover as part of the judgment reasonable attorney fees
that may be fixed by a judge of the court.
Witness our hands this ________________ day of ____________________, 20__.
____________________________________
PRINCIPAL
SEAL
___________________________________
AGENT OF RECORD
By _________________________________
____________________________________
SURETY
SEAL
___________________________________
AGENT ADDRESS
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-17 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 5
PAYMENT BOND
ARIZONA STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND
PURSUANT TO TITLES 28, 34, AND 41, OF THE ARIZONA REVISED STATUTES
(Penalty of this Bond must be 100% of the Agreement amount)
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS THAT:________________________________________________
(hereinafter "Principal"), as Principal, and _________________________________________(hereinafter "Surety"), a
corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of __________________ with its principal office in the
City of __________________, holding a certificate of authority to transact surety business in Arizona issued by the
Director of the Department of Insurance pursuant to Title 20, Chapter 2, Article 1, as Surety, are held and firmly
bound
unto
________________________
(hereinafter
"Obligee")
in
the
amount
of
______________________________________________ (Dollars) ($___________), for the payment whereof, the Principal and
Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally,
firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written Agreement with the Obligee, dated the _________ day of
_______________________, 20___ for construction of CA2402.401, Dr. AJ Chandler Park Phase 1 which Agreement is
hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the Principal promptly pays all
moneys due to all persons supplying labor or materials to the Principal or the Principal's subcontractors in the
prosecution of the work provided for in said Agreement, this obligation is void. Otherwise it remains in full force
and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Title 34, Chapter 2, Article 2
Arizona Revised Statutes, and all liabilities on this bond will be determined in accordance with the provisions,
conditions and limitations of Title 34, Chapter 2, Article 2, Arizona Revised Statutes, to the same extent as if it were
copied at length in this Agreement.
The prevailing party in a suit on this bond may recover as part of the judgment reasonable attorney fees
that may be fixed by a judge of the court.
Witness our hands this ________________ day of ____________________, 20__.
____________________________________
PRINCIPAL
SEAL
___________________________________
AGENT OF RECORD
By _________________________________
____________________________________
SURETY
SEAL
___________________________________
AGENT ADDRESS
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-18 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 6
DISPUTE RESOLUTION
A.
INFORMAL DISPUTE RESOLUTION
The parties to the Agreement agree that time is of the essence in relation to
performance of the Agreement and completion of the Project, therefore any and all
disputes in relation to the Agreement will initially be referred to the Project Manager,
the Design Professional Representative and/or the Contractor Representative as
applicable to the dispute, for immediate resolution. If, after good faith efforts to reach
a resolution, none is reached, any party to the dispute may submit the dispute to
the Dispute Resolution Representative (“DRR”) process set forth below, which is
intended to be an expedited process.
B.
DISPUTE RESOLUTION REPRESENTATIVE (“DRR”) PROCESS
1.
The Parties under the Agreement agree that all claims and disputes in relation
to the Project which are not resolved in the ordinary course of the Project
(“Claim” or “Claims”) will, as a prerequisite to any mediation, or litigation of
the Claim, first be submitted for resolution between the designated
Dispute Resolution Representatives of the Parties as set forth herein (the “DRR
Process”).
2.
The DRR Process will be initiated through service of a DRR Notice as set forth
below:
a.
For claims by the Contractor or the Design Professional, the DRR
Process will be initiated by the party asserting the claim serving written
notice on the City setting forth in detail: (i) the basis for the claim; (ii) the
effect of the Claim upon the construction of, and/or Project Schedule
for, the Project;
(iii) the specific relief requested, the amount thereof, and how such
was calculated; (iv) the parties involved in the Claim, and how they
are involved; (v) the specific Agreement provisions in the Agreement
Documents (including, if applicable, drawings and specifications) which
apply; and (vi) efforts made to date to resolve the Claim.
b.
For claims by the City, the DRR process will be initiated by the City
providing written notice to the other parties of the basis and amount
of its claim, the parties involved in the Claim, and how they are
involved, the provisions in the Agreement Documents that apply, and
the relief requested.
c.
The DRR Notice will be hand-delivered and e-mailed to the other
parties’ designated Dispute Resolution Representatives.
3.
The other parties will respond in writing to the DRR Notice (“DRR Response”)
within ten (10) calendar days of receipt of the DRR Notice, setting forth those
items set forth in the DRR Notice that they agree with, dispute, and/or have
questions concerning. The DRR Response will be hand-delivered and e-mailed
to the other parties’ Dispute Resolution Representatives.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-19 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 6
4.
The designated Dispute Resolution Representatives for the Parties to the
claim will then meet as soon as possible and in any event within twenty (20)
calendar days of submission of the DRR Notice (regardless of whether a DRR
Response has been submitted by all parties involved in the dispute), at a
mutually agreed upon time and place, to attempt to resolve the Claim based
upon the DRR Notice and DRR Response.
5.
At any time after the first meeting required above, either party may terminate
the DRR Process by written notice to the other party.
6.
The parties may agree, in writing, to extend or modify the time limits or
other provisions of the DRR process in relation to a specific pending Claim.
7.
Unless otherwise designated in a written notice to the other parties, the City
and the representatives of the Contractor and of the Design Professional will
act as the parties’ designated Dispute Resolution Representatives.
8.
If a resolution of the Claim is reached, that resolution must be set forth in
writing and must be signed by the Parties’ designated Dispute Resolution
Representative. If the resolution involves a change in any Agreement
Documents, the Agreement Price, the Project Schedule, or any other change
requiring a written Change Order or Amendment, the parties must execute
an appropriate written Change Order or Amendment pursuant to the terms
of the Agreement Documents.
C.
MEDIATION
1.
Unless extended by written agreement of the parties involved in the dispute,
any Claim not resolved through the DRR process set forth above within
five (5) calendar days after the meeting required under B (4) above, or after
the DRR is terminated pursuant to B (5) above, whichever is earlier, will be
submitted to mediation as a condition precedent to litigation by either party.
2.
The mediation will be commenced by written demand upon the other party
for mediation. If the parties cannot agree upon a mediator within ten (10)
calendar days of the written demand, either party may make a request to the
Civil Presiding Judge of the Maricopa County Superior Court to appoint a
mediator. The mediation will occur within forth (40) calendar days of the
written demand for mediation, unless the parties agree, in writing, to a longer
period of time.
3.
The qualifications for the mediator will be that he/she be: (a) an experienced
mediator, arbitrator or litigator of construction disputes; and (b) having
engaged a significant portion of his/her time involving and/or resolving
construction disputes for at least the past five (5) years.
4.
Each party will provide to the other party and the mediator all of the
information and documentation required under B(1) and (2) above, together
with any additional information and documentation which the party believes
relevant. In addition, the parties will exchange, and provide to the mediator
such additional memoranda, information and/or documentation, as the
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-20 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 6
mediator may request, and in the form and at such times, as the mediator may
direct.
5.
The parties will share the mediator’s fee and any filing fees equally. The
mediation will be held in Chandler, Arizona, unless another location is
mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation will be specifically
enforceable in any court having jurisdiction thereof.
D.
LITIGATION
Any claim arising out of or related to the Agreement, except Claims relating to aesthetic
effect and
except
those
claims
waived
as
provided
for
in
the
Agreement
Documents, must be resolved through litigation in the Maricopa County, Arizona
Superior Court.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-21 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 7
CITY OF CHANDLER, ARIZONA
PUBLIC WORKS & UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION
PROJECT NAME:
DR. AJ CHANDLER PARK PHASE 1
CITY PROJECT NO.:
CA2402.401
If Federally Funded:
FEDERAL NO.:
ADOT NO:
(This section to be completed by Prime)
I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT ALL GOODS AND/OR SERVICES REQUIRED BY CITY OF CHANDLER FOR THIS
PROJECT HAVE BEEN DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE AGREEMENT DOCUMENTS AND BID
SPECIFICATIONS AND ALL ACTIVITIES REQUIRED BY THE AGREEMENTOR UNDER THE AGREEMENT HAVE
BEEN COMPLETED AS OF THE COMPLETION DATE LISTED HERE:
FINAL ACCEPTANCE DATE:
PRIME CONTRACTOR:
FIRM NAME:
PRINCIPAL:
TITLE:
SIGNATURE:
DATE:
CERTIFIED BY [INSERT NAME AND TITLE OF PARTY THAT OVERSEES CONSTRUCTION]:
FIRM NAME:
SIGNATURE:
DATE:
PROJECT ACCEPTED BY CITY OF CHANDLER:
NAME:
SIGNATURE:
DATE:
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-22 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 8
CONSTRUCTION SIGN DETAIL
8'
3"
CITY OF CHANDLER
5"
3"
PUTTING YOUR FUNDS TO WORK
5"
3"
PROJECT TITLE:
5"
4'
3"
PROJECT NUMBER:
3"
2"
PROJECT COST:
3"
2"
CONTRACTOR:
3"
2"
MANAGED BY:
PUBLIC WORKS & UTILITIES DEPARTMENT
3"
CAPITAL PROJECTS DIVISION
3"
<--- 4" X 4" POSTS --->
NOTES:
SIGN(S) MUST BE FURNISHED AND ERECTED PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION. POSTS
MUST BE ANCHORED A MINIMUM OF TWO FEET INTO THE GROUND. BOTTOM OF SIGN MUST BE A
MINIMUM OF FOUR FEET ABOVE THE GROUND.
TYPICAL PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN FOR GENERAL PROJECTS MUST BE NON-REFLECTORIZED GREEN
BACKGROUND, AND NON-REFLECTORIZED WHITE LETTERS AND NUMERALS.
ONE SIGN MUST BE ERECTED FOR BUILDINGS AND OTHER LIMITED AREA SINGLE SITES. FOR MULTIPLE
SITES, ONE SIGN MUST BE ERECTED AT EACH SITE.
FOR LINEAR PROJECTS ONE HALF MILE OR LONGER, PLACE ONE SIGN AT EACH END OF THE PROJECT.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-23 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
COST OF THE WORK
(APPLICABLE SOLELY TO CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AT RISK AND JOB ORDER CONTRACTING)
SECTION 1 – COSTS TO BE REIMBURSED
1.1 Cost of the Work
The term Cost of the Work will mean costs necessarily incurred by Contractor in the proper
performance of the Work. Such costs must be at rates not higher than the standard paid at the place
of the Project except with prior consent of City. The Cost of the Work will include only the items set
forth in this Section 1.
1.2 Labor Costs
1.2.1
Wages of construction workers directly employed by the Contractor to perform the
construction of the Work at the site or, with City’s approval, at off-site workshops. Cost to
be reimbursed will be the actual wages paid to the individuals performing the work.
1.2.2
Wages or salaries of the Contractor’s supervisory and administrative personnel when
stationed at
the site with City’s approval. No Contractor personnel stationed at the
Contractor’s home or branch offices will be charged to the Cost of the Work. Non-field office
based Contractor management and support personnel are expected to provide service and
advice from time to time throughout the job and his/her time devoted to Project matters is
considered to be covered by the Contractor’s Fee.
1.2.3
Wages and salaries of Contractor’s supervisory or administrative personnel who would
normally be
stationed at the field office in accordance with Section 1.2.2 but who become
engaged, at factories,
workshops or on the road, in expediting the production or
transportation of materials or equipment required for the Work, but only for that portion of
his/her time required for the Work. Employee
bonuses and/or costs associated with
Employee Stock Ownership Plans (“ESOP”) will not be
considered reimbursable labor or
labor burden costs and will be considered non-reimbursable costs considered to be covered
by the Contractor’s Fee.
1.2.4
Costs paid or incurred by Contractor for taxes, insurance, contributions, assessments and
benefits required by law or collective bargaining agreements and, for personnel not
covered by such
agreements, customary benefits such as sick leave, medical and health
benefits, holiday, vacations and pensions, provided such costs are based on wages and
salaries included in the Cost of the Work under Subparagraphs 1.2.1 through 1.2.3.
1.2.4.1 Cost of the Work will include the actual net cost to Contractor for worker’s compensation
insurance attributable to the wages chargeable to the Cost of Work per this Agreement. The
actual
net cost of worker’s compensation must take into consideration all cost
adjustments due
to
experience modifiers, premium discounts, policy dividends,
retrospective rating plan premium adjustments, assigned risk pool rebates, any applicable
weekly maximums, etc. Contractor may
charge an estimated amount for worker’s
compensation insurance costs, but will make appropriate cost adjustments to actual costs
within 45 days of receipt of actual cost adjustments from the insurance carrier.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-24 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
1.2.4.3 Overtime wages paid to salaried personnel (if approved in advance in writing by City) will
be reimbursed at the actual rate of overtime pay paid to the individual. No time charges for
overtime hours worked on the Project will be allowed if the individual is not paid for the
overtime worked.
1.2.4.4 Any overtime premium or shift differential expense to be incurred by Contractor for hourly
workers
will require City’s advance written approval before the incremental cost of the
overtime premium or shift differential will be considered a reimbursable cost. If the
Contractor is required to work overtime as a result of an inexcusable delay or other
coordination problems caused by the Contractor or anyone he/she is responsible for,
the overtime premium and/or shift differential expense portion of the payroll expense and
related labor burden costs will be considered as cost not to be reimbursed.
1.2.4.5 Reimbursable labor burden costs will be limited to payroll taxes, worker’s compensation
insurance, the employer’s portion of union benefit costs for union employees working on the
Project, and the
actual verifiable fringe benefit costs incurred by Contractor for non-union
individuals working on the Project subject to the following maximum percentages for the
following reimbursable non-union
fringe benefit costs. The following maximums (as a
percentage of reimbursable actual wages by individual) will apply for each of the following
types of fringe benefit costs specifically attributable
to each of the non-union personnel
working on the Project:
Medical Insurance, Dental, Life & AD&D Insurance:
12.00%
Holiday, vacation and other paid time not worked:
10.00%
Pension Plan Contributions to Vested Employee Account,
Simplified Employee Pension Plans, or 401K matching plans
(Note: ESOP related costs are covered by the Contractor Fee)
10.00%
For non-union personnel, no other fringe benefit costs (other than the three specific
categories listed immediately above, will be considered reimbursable Cost of Work. Any labor
burden costs that are in excess of the amounts considered reimbursable or are otherwise
not considered reimbursable under the terms of this agreement are intended to be covered
by the Contractor Fee.
1.3
Subcontract Costs
1.3.1
Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors in accordance with the requirements of
the subcontracts.
1.3.2
For Scope of Work Bid Packages typically performed by Subcontractors, Contractor may
“self- perform” such work on an actual cost basis subject to an agreed upon Guaranteed
Maximum Price for the “self-performed work”. The Contractor must, unless agreed to by City
in writing, bid his/her
proposed guaranteed Maximum Price for the work to be “self-
performed” against at least three other interested trade Contractors. All savings under any
such Subcontract for “self-performed work” must be applied to reduce the Cost of Work under
the Agreement and the Guaranteed Maximum
Price. For purposes of defining “self-
performed work” subject to this provision, any division of Contractor, or any separate
Contractor or Subcontractor that is partially owned or wholly owned by the Contractor or any
of his/her employees or employee’s relatives will be considered a related party entity and
will be subject to this provision regarding “self-performed work”. No self-performed work will
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-25 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
be allowed to be performed on a Fixed Price basis.
1.3.3
Contractor (with respect to its Suppliers, Subcontractors and all lower tier Subcontractors)
must provide City advance written notice and must obtain City’s approval for any proposed
Subcontract Change Order, Material Purchase Order, or other financial commitment in an
amount in excess of $5,000 prior to placing such order or entering into such agreement
(regardless of whether or not any such commitment will affect the prime Agreement
Guaranteed Maximum Cost). It is agreed that sums applicable to any Subcontract Change
Order, Purchase Order or other financial commitment entered into in violation of the above
notice and approval requirement will not be included in the amounts owning to Contractor,
Subcontractors or Suppliers whether as Costs of the Work or as reasonable termination costs
in the event of termination.
1.4
Costs of Material and Equipment Incorporated in the Completed Construction
1.4.1
Costs, including transportation and storage, of materials and equipment incorporated or
to be incorporated in the completed construction.
1.4.2
Costs of materials described in the preceding Subparagraph 1.4.1 in excess of those
actually installed to allow for reasonable waste and spoilage. Unused excess materials, in
any, will become City’s property at the completion of the Work or, at City’s option, may be
sold by the Contractor. Any amounts realized from such sales must be credited to City as a
deduction from the Cost of Work.
1.4.3
Proceeds from the sale of recyclable materials, scrap, waste, etc. will be credited to job cost.
1.5
Costs of Other materials and Equipment, Temporary Facilities and Related Items
1.5.1
Costs, including transportation and storage, installation, maintenance, dismantling and
removal of materials, supplies, temporary facilities, machinery, equipment and hand tools
not customarily owned by construction workers, that are provided by the Contractor at the
site and fully consumed in the performance of the Work; and cost (less salvage value) of such
items if not fully consumed, whether sold to others or retained by Contractor. Cost for items
previously used by Contractor will mean fair market value.
1.5.2
Rental charges
for temporary facilities, machinery, equipment, and hand tools
not
customarily owned by construction workers that are provided by Contractor at the site,
whether rented from Contractor or others, and costs of transportation, installation, minor
repairs and replacements,
dismantling and removal thereof. Rates and quantities of
equipment rented will be subject to City’s prior written approval.
1.5.2.1 The Projected usage for each piece of equipment to be rented for use on the Project and
the estimated total rentals must be considered by Contractor before the piece of equipment
is rented
so that an appropriate rent versus buy decision can be made. Purchased
equipment must be considered “job owned”. At the completion of the Project, Contractor
must transfer title and
possession of all remaining job-owned equipment to City, or
Contractor may keep any such equipment for an appropriate fair market value credit to job
cost, which will be mutually agreed to by City and Contractor.
1.5.2.2 Each piece of equipment to be rented must have hourly, daily, weekly and monthly rates and
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-26 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
the most economical rate available will be reimbursed based on the circumstances of actual
need and usage of the piece of equipment while it is stationed at the jobsite. When the
piece of equipment is no longer needed for the work, no rental charges will be reimbursed
if the piece of equipment remains at the jobsite for the convenience of Contractor.
1.5.2.3 Equipment Rental Rates
1.5.2.3.1 Compensation for equipment used on the Project will be paid in accordance with the
Equipment Plan submitted by Contractor in the accepted GMP Proposal and no payments
will be made in excess of the rates set forth in the Equipment Plan, or actual documented
costs, whichever is less.
1.5.2.3.2 All equipment rental rates and costs are subject to City’s right to audit when submitted as
part of Equipment Plan and/or at any time during the Project.
1.5.2.4 The aggregate rentals chargeable for each piece of Contractor owned tools or equipment must
not exceed 50% of the fair market value of such equipment at the time of its commitment to
the Work.
The original purchase price and date of purchase of the equipment will be
documented with a copy of the purchase invoice for the piece of equipment. Such aggregate
limitations will apply and no further rentals will be charged even if a piece of equipment is taken
off the job and is later replaced by a similar piece of equipment. For purposes of computing
the aggregate rentals applicable to aggregate rental limitations, rental charges for similar
pieces of equipment will be combined if the pieces of equipment were not used at the same
time.
1.5.2.5 Fair market value for used material and equipment as referred to in the Agreement
Documents will mean the estimated price a reasonable purchaser would pay to purchase
the used material or equipment at the time it was initially needed for the job. Note: This is
usually lower than the price a reasonable purchaser would pay for similar new construction
material or construction equipment.
1.5.2.6 All losses resulting from lost, damaged or stolen tools and equipment will be the sole
responsibility of Contractor, and not City, and the cost of such losses will not be reimbursable
under the Agreement.
1.5.2.7 Contractor will be required to maintain a detailed equipment inventory of all job-owned
equipment (either purchased and charged to job cost or job-owned through aggregate
rentals) and such inventory must be submitted to City each month. For each piece of
equipment, such inventory should contain at a minimum (1) original purchase price or
acquisition cost (2) acquisition date (3) approved Fair Market Value at the time the piece of
equipment was first used on the job and (4) final disposition.
1.5.2.8 All costs incurred for minor maintenance and repairs will be reimbursed at actual cost. Such
costs include routine and preventative maintenance, minor repairs and other incidental costs.
Repairs and/or replacement of a capital nature are considered to be covered by the rental
rates. Major repairs and overhauls are not considered routine and ordinary; consequently
such costs are not reimbursable and are intended to be covered by the rental rates.
1.5.3
Costs of removal of debris from the Site.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-27 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
1.5.4
Costs of document reproductions, facsimile transmissions and long-distance telephone
calls, postage and parcel delivery charges, telephone service at the site and reasonable
petty cash expenses of the site office.
1.5.5
That portion of the reasonable expenses of Contractor’s personnel incurred while traveling
in discharge of duties connected with the Work.
1.5.5.1 No travel expenses will be reimbursed to Contractor’s representatives unless Project related
travel required them to travel to a destination more than 100 miles from the Project location.
Any travel
involving airfare will require advance written approval by an authorized City’s
representative.
1.5.6
Costs of materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a mutually acceptable
location, if approved in advance by the City.
1.5.7
Reproduction costs will be the actual costs of reproduction subject to a maximum of five
cents ($.05) per square foot for prints and a maximum of five cents ($.05) per 8 ½ by 11-inch
page for offset print or photo copied agreement documents, specifications, etc. Telephone
costs will be the actual costs paid to the third party telephone company for the field office
telephone.
1.6
Miscellaneous Costs
1.6.1
That portion of insurance and bond premiums that can be directly attributed to the Agreement.
The City will reimburse Contractor for contractually required bond at time of first pay
application for GMP and Cost-Based Agreements upon receipt of proof of payment from
the Contractor. If the Contractor completes Work for less than the Agreement Price,
Contractor must credit the City a pro- rated amount for the unused portion of the bond
payment
1.6.1.1 Contractor’s actual cost for insurance will be considered to be included within the Maximum
limit for General Conditions Costs. All premiums for any insurance and bonds required for
the Project must reflect the net actual costs to Contractor after taking into consideration cost
adjustments due to experience modifiers, premium discounts, policy dividends, retrospective
rating plan premium adjustments, assigned risk pool rebates, refunds, etc.
1.6.1.2 The amount to be reimbursed to Contractor for all contractually required insurance will be
actual
costs not to exceed a total of 2% of the Agreement Value, unless Contractor
establishes to City’s satisfaction that the actual cost is higher and City agrees to such actual
higher cost in writing. If Contractor’s cost of contractually required insurance is greater
than the amount agreed to be reimbursed per this Agreement Provision, the difference will
be considered to be covered by the Contractor’s Fee. The City will reimburse Contractor
for contractually required insurance on a monthly basis for GMP and Cost-Based
Agreements. If Contractor can demonstrate substantial savings by paying for all insurance in
advance, the City may agree to reimburse all insurance costs at time of first pay application
for GMP and Cost-Based Agreements with proof of payment from Contractor.
1.6.2
Sales, use or similar taxes imposed by a governmental authority that are related to the Work.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-28 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
1.6.3
Fees and assessments for the building permit and for other permits, licenses and inspections
for which Contractor is required by the Agreement Documents to pay.
1.6.4
Fees of laboratories for tests required by the Agreement Documents, except those related to
defective or nonconforming Work and which do not fall within the scope of ¶ 1.7.3 below.
1.6.5
Royalties and license fees paid for the use of a particular design, process or product required
by the Agreement Documents; the cost of defending suites or claims for infringement of
patent rights
arising from such requirement of the Agreement Documents; and payments
made in accordance with legal judgments against Contractor resulting from such suites or
claims and payments of settlements made with City’s consent. However, such costs of legal
defenses, judgments and settlements must not be included in the calculation of the
Contractor’s Fee or subject to the Guaranteed Maximum Price.
1.6.6
Data processing costs related to the Work. However, any such data processing costs will be
limited to the cost of personal computer hardware used at the field office in the normal
day to day administration, management and control of the Project. The aggregate charges
for any such hardware must not exceed the Fair Market Value of the hardware at the time it
was brought to the field office. If the total charges for any particular piece of hardware reach
an amount equal to the Fair Market Value, that particular piece of hardware must be turned
over to City whenever it is no longer needed for the Project. If Contractor elects to keep the
particular piece of hardware, the job costs must be credited with a mutually agreeable
amount which will represent the Fair Market Value of the particular piece of hardware at the
time it was no longer needed for the job. Software or other costs associated with the use of
computer programs will not be considered to be a reimbursable cost and will be considered
to be covered by the Contractor’s Fee.
1.6.7
Deposits lost for causes other than Contractor’s negligence or failure to fulfill a specific
responsibility to City as set forth in the Agreement Documents.
1.6.8
Legal, mediation and arbitration costs, including attorneys’ fees, other than those arising
from
disputes between City and Contractor, reasonably incurred by Contractor in the
performance of the Work and with City’s prior written approval; which approval will not be
unreasonably withheld.
1.6.9
Expenses incurred in accordance with Contractor’s standard personnel policy for relocation
and temporary living allowances of personnel required for the Work, if pre-approved by City
in writing.
If City authorizes the reimbursement of relocation costs, the reimbursable
relocation expenses will be limited to a maximum of $50,000 per person. Any relocation
cost incurred by Contractor in excess of the amount reimbursed by City will be considered to
be covered by the Contractor’s Fee.
1.7
Other Costs and Emergencies
1.7.1
Other costs incurred in the performance of the Work if and to the extent approved in advance
in writing by City.
1.7.2
Costs due to emergencies incurred in taking action to prevent threatened damage, injury or
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-29 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
loss in case of an emergency affecting the safety of persons and property.
1.7.3
Costs of repairing or correcting damaged or nonconforming Work executed by Contractor,
Subcontractors or Suppliers, provided that such damaged or nonconforming Work was not
caused by negligence or failure to fulfill a specific responsibility of Contractor and only to the
extent that the cost of repair or correction is not recoverable by Contractor from insurance,
sureties, Subcontractors or Suppliers.
1.8
Related Party Transactions
1.8.1
The term “related party” will mean a parent, subsidiary, affiliate or other entity having
common ownership or management with Contractor; any entity in which any stockholder in,
or management
employee of, Contractor owns any interest in excess of ten percent in the
aggregate; or any person or entity which has the right to control the business or affairs of
Contractor. The term “related party”
includes any member of the immediate family of any
person identified above.
1.8.2
If any of the costs to be reimbursed arise from a transaction between Contractor and a
related party, Contractor must notify City in writing of the specific nature of the contemplated
transaction, including the identity of the related party and the anticipated cost to be incurred,
before any such transaction is consummated or cost incurred. If City, after such notification,
authorizes in writing
the proposed transaction, then the cost incurred will be included as a
cost to be reimbursed, and Contractor must procure the Work, equipment, goods or service
from the related party, as a Subcontractor. If City fails to authorize the transaction,
Contractor must procure the Work, equipment, goods or service from some person or entity
other than a related party.
SECTION 2 – COSTS NOT TO BE REIMBURSED
2.1
The Cost of Work must not include:
2.1.1
Salaries and other compensation of Contractor’s personnel stationed at Contractor’s principal
office or offices other than the site office, except as specifically provided in Subparagraphs
1.2.2 and 1.2.3.
2.1.2
Expenses of Contractors’ principal office and offices other than the site office.
2.1.3
Overhead and general expenses, except as may be expressly included in Section 1.
2.1.3.1 Costs of Contractor’s home office computer services or other outside computer processing
services will be considered overhead and general expense. Accordingly, Contractor should
not plan to perform any such computer related services or alternatives at the field office when
such services or functions can be performed at Contractor’s home or branch offices, or
other outside service locations.
2.1.4
Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for the Work.
2.1.5
Rental costs of machinery and equipment, except as specifically provided in subparagraph
1.5.2.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-30 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
2.1.6
Except as provided in Subparagraph 1.7.3 of the Agreement, costs due to the negligence or
failure to fulfill a specific responsibility of Contractor, Subcontractors and Suppliers or anyone
directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts of them may be liable.
2.1.7
Any cost not specifically and expressly described in Section 1.
2.1.8
Costs, other than costs included in Change Orders approved by City that would cause the GMP
to be exceeded.
SECTION 3 – DISCOUNTS, REBATES, REFUNDS AND SAVINGS
3.1
Cash discounts obtained on payments made by Contractor will accrue to City if (1) before
making
the payment, Contractor included them in an Application for Payment and
received payment therefore from City, or (2) City has deposited funds with Contractor with
which to make payments; otherwise, cash discounts will accrue to Contractor. Trade discounts,
rebates, refunds and amounts received from sales or surplus materials and equipment will
accrue to City, and Contractor must make provisions so that they can be secured.
3.1.1
Cost of the Work will be credited with all insurance policy discounts, performance and
payment bond rebates or refunds, refunds or return premiums from any Subcontractor
default insurance, refunds or rebates from any Contractor controlled insurance programs
applicable to the Project,
merchandise rebates of any nature, refunds of any nature,
insurance dividends; and a portion of any volume rebates or free material credits earned with
purchase of material or other goods and services charged to the job.
3.1.2
“Cash” discounts which may accrue to Contractor will be limited to a maximum of 1.5% of
invoice cost. Any portion of “Cash” discounts greater than 1.5% will automatically accrue
to City if Contractor is eligible to take advantage of the discounts.
3.2
Amounts that accrue to City in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 3.1 will be
credited to City as a deduction from the Cost of the Work.
3.3
Any and all savings on the GMP, or any separately guaranteed items comprising the GMP, will
belong to City, subject to any express right in the Agreement for Contractor to share in
savings. Savings are subject to City’s right to audit, and may be audited separately.
SECTION 4 – GENERAL CONDITIONS COSTS
4.1
General Conditions Costs may include, but are not limited to, the following types of costs
incurred by Contractor during construction of the Work to the extent they are reimbursable
Costs of the Work as delineated above: payroll costs for Work conducted at the site, payroll
costs for the superintendent and full-time general foremen, payroll costs for management
personnel resident and working on the site workers not included as direct labor costs
engaged in support (e.g. loading/unloading, clean-up, etc.), administrative office personnel,
costs of offices and temporary facilities including office materials, office supplies, office
equipment, minor expenses, utilities, fuel,
sanitary facilities and telephone services at the
site, costs of liability insurance premiums not included in labor burdens for direct labor
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-31 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 9 – CM@Risk & JOC
costs, costs of bond premiums, costs of consultants not in the direct employ of Contractor or
Subcontractors, fees for permits and licenses.
4.2
General Conditions Costs may be paid on a percentage of the Agreement Price or on a
lump/stipulate sum basis as set forth in the Agreement. All costs included in the General
Conditions Costs will not be separately invoiced to or paid by City.
4.3
The total amount of General Conditions Costs for the Work may be divided by the number of
days
allowed for performance of the Work, to determine a fixed daily rate for General
Conditions Costs that may be used in computing the General Conditions Costs allocated to any
period of time, or for any adjustments in the General Conditions Costs agreed to in
writing by City.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-32 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 10
LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD
Section 1 – Description and General
Contractor is in direct control of work performed under the Landscape Establishment Period. If work is
subcontracted, a representative of the Contractor will be present at the site of the work for all hours
that the subcontractor works. Subcontracting of Landscape Establishment work will be permitted for
weed eradication with herbicides, because of special licensing. A licensed temporary service may be
used to supply labor to Contractor if Contractor has received approval from City Representatives.
Contractor will submit the required subcontract documentation.
Contractor must provide adequate personnel to accomplish the required maintenance of the plant
materials at intervals acceptable to City Representatives.
If not healthy at the end of the maintenance period, the maintenance must be continued until the plant
material is approved by City.
1.1 Time and Schedule
Unless otherwise expressly agreed to in writing by City, the Landscape Establishment Period will be
per General Conditions Section 6.5.4.
1.2 Planted Stock and Seeding Establishment
1.2.1
Tree planting and staking must be per City of Chandler Standard Detail C-801.
1.2.2
All trees will stand erect on their own without stakes when brought to this site. If the tree
cannot stand on its own when nursery stakes are removed, the tree will be removed and
replaced.
1.3 Pre-Emergent Herbicide and Weed Control
1.3.1
Contractor will provide three applications of an approved pre-emergent herbicide on all
unpaved areas of the project, as directed by City Representatives, to control weed growth in
all areas of the project. The number of applications may be increased as directed by the City
Representative, and at no additional cost to City, if the City Representative deems additional
applications are required to control weed growth.
1.3.2
Application sequence will be approved in advance by City. The first application of pre-
emergent will be completed prior to the application of Decomposed Granite and will be
included with the cost of the Decomposed Granite as specified and part of the Construction
Phase portion of work. The second application of pre-emergent will be completed after
installation of the Decomposed Granit and no later than half-way through the Landscape
Establishment Period. The third and final application of pre-emergent will be applied 15 days
prior to completion of the Landscape Establishment portion of the project. The second and
third pre-emergent applications will be included with the cost of Landscape Establishment.
Watering will be completed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, as
included and as related to each application.
1.3.3
The pre-emergent herbicide will be applied in accordance with the Technical Specifications
and the recommendations of the pre-emergent herbicide manufacturer, as approved by City
Representatives.
App’d 7/20/2022
APP-33 of 33
General Conditions
Appendix 10
1.3.4
The control of weeds will be accomplished by the use of herbicides. Manual removal of weeds
will be required, after herbicides have taken affect.
1.3.5
Contractor is responsible for the removal and disposal of all trash and debris that during the
Landscape Establishment Period. Contractor will keep the project in a neat and orderly
manner during the duration of the Landscape Establishment Period.
1.4 Water
The water used during Landscape Establishment to properly maintain the plant material will be
furnished by City, at designated sources from within the project limits, at no charge to Contractor.
Contractor will be responsible for all equipment, materials and labor necessary to load, transport and
unload water for watering purposes.
1.5 Plant Material Replacements
The plant material replacement will be considered as included in the work for Landscape
Establishment, and will be made at no charge to the City.
1.5.1
Shrub and Plant Replacement - During the second half of the Landscaping Establishment
period, Contractor will provide, where required, plant replacements as follows:
Original Size
Replacement Size
1 gallon
5 gallon
5 gallon
15 gallon
15 gallon
24-inch box
36-inch box
48-inch box
1.5.2
Tree Replacement – During the second half of the Landscape Establishment Period,
Contractor will provide plant material replacements for existing plants that die as follows:
Existing Plant Material Sizes
Replacement Size
Trees:
2-inch Caliper
24-inch box
4-inch Caliper
36-inch box
6-inch Caliper and greater
54-inch box
Shrubs:
All Existing Shrubs
15 gallon
1.6 Measurement and Payment
See Technical Specifications for Measurement Payment provisions.
EXHIBIT C
Project Name:Dr. A.J. Chandler Park Renovation Phase 1
Page C-1
Project No.: CA2402.401
Rev. 1/16/2024
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Procurement and Contracting Documents
9/18/2025
AJ Chandler Park
PROJECT TITLE PAGE
000101 - 1
DOCUMENT 000101 - PROJECT TITLE PAGE
1.1
PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 90% Set - Not for Construction
A.
AJ Chandler Park Improvements.
B.
City of Chandler, Arizona.
C.
Chandler, Arizona.
D.
Owner Project No. CA2402.101.
E.
Landscape Architect Project No. 24203.
F.
.
G.
Dig Studio.
H.
3003 N. Central Ave STE 800.
I.
Phoenix, Arizona 85012.
J.
Phone: 602.595.4101.
K.
Web Site: digstudio.com.
L.
Issued: <Insert date>.
M.
Copyright (2025 Dig Studio.) All rights reserved.
END OF DOCUMENT 000101
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
SEALS PAGE
000107 - 1
DOCUMENT 000107 - SEALS PAGE
1.1
DESIGN PROFESSIONALS OF RECORD
A.
Architect:
1.
<Insert name>.
2.
<Insert license #>.
3.
Responsible for Divisions 01-49 Sections except where indicated as prepared by other
design professionals of record.
B.
Civil Engineer:
1.
<Insert name>.
2.
<Insert license #>.
3.
Responsible for <Insert list of Sections>.
C.
Landscape Architect:
1.
Brandon Sobiech.
2.
64446.
3.
Responsible for <Insert list of Sections>.
D.
Structural Engineer:
1.
<Insert name>.
2.
<Insert license #>.
3.
Responsible for <Insert list of Sections>.
E.
Fire-Protection Engineer:
1.
<Insert name>.
2.
<Insert license #>.
3.
Responsible for <Insert list of Sections>.
F.
Plumbing Engineer:
1.
<Insert name>.
2.
<Insert license #>.
3.
Responsible for <Insert list of Sections>.
G.
HVAC Engineer:
1.
<Insert name>.
2.
<Insert license #>.
3.
Responsible for <Insert list of Sections>.
H.
Electrical Engineer:
1.
<Insert name>.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
SEALS PAGE
000107 - 2
2.
<Insert license #>.
3.
Responsible for <Insert list of Sections>.
END
OF
DOCUMENT
000107
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
002200 - 1
SECTION 002200 – SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
A.
All Construction under this permit shall conform to the Maricopa Association of Governments
Uniform Standard Specification and Details (MAG Specifications and Details).
1.2
SUPPLEMENTS
A.
The following supplements modify, change, delete from, and add to, the MAG Specifications.
When any portion of the MAG Specifications is modified or any paragraph or subparagraph, or
clause thereof is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered
provisions of the MAG Specifications shall remain in effect.
Section 105.3
Add the following:
“Execute Work as per Contract Documents. Make no changes without having first received writ-
ten permission. Where detailed information is lacking, before proceeding with Work, refer matter
to PM/CM for information.”
“Should conflicts occur in or between drawings and specifications, or within different areas with-
in the plans and/or different areas within the Specifications, the Contractor is deemed to have es-
timated on the more expensive way unless he has asked for and obtained a written decision from
the PM/CM before submission of his proposal as to which method or materials will be required.
The construction contract shall ultimately govern in conflicts when they occur between the draw-
ings and specifications.”
END OF SECTION 002200
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
003113 - 1
SECTION 003113 – CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK SPECIFIED
A.
To assure adequate planning and execution of the Work so that the Work is completed by the
date allowed in the Contract, and to assist the City or the City’s Representative in appraising the
reasonableness of the proposed schedule and in evaluating progress of the Work, prepare and
maintain the schedules and reports described in the Section.
B.
Contractor should employ a scheduler who is thoroughly trained and experienced in compiling
construction schedule data, in analyzing and use of construction scheduling, and in preparation
and issue of periodic reports as required below
1.2
RELIANCE UPON APPROVED SCHEDULE
A.
The Construction schedule, as reviewed by the City will become an integral part of the
Contract, and will establish interim Contract completion dates for the various activities. The
ultimate responsibility for timely completion of all contract milestones and completion of the
contract shall be that of the Contractor.
B.
The Contractor shall develop a baseline schedule which includes activities related to testing,
submittals, procurement (long-lead and owner furnished equipment), utility company work, and
any other tasks determined to be related to the project’s critical path in addition to all the work
tasks. The City will determine the acceptance of a final baseline schedule.
C.
Should any activity not be complete within 7 calendar days after the stated scheduled date,
(approved and accepted construction delays will be taken into consideration) the City shall have
the right to order the Contractor to expedite completion of the activity by whatever the City
deems appropriate and necessary, without additional compensation to the Contractor.
D.
Should any activity be 15 or more calendar days behind schedule, the City shall have the right
to direct the activity to be performed by whatever methods the City deems appropriate.
E.
Costs incurred by the City in connection with expediting construction activity under this Article
shall be reimbursed to the City by the Contractor.
1.3
REPORT FORMATS
A.
Construction Diagram: The Schedule of Construction Diagram must be a standard and accepted
schedule of activities that shall graphically show the order and interdependence of all activities
necessary to complete the Work, and the sequence in which each activity is to be accomplished,
as planned by the Contractor and his Project Field Superintendent in coordination with all
Subcontractors whose work is shown on the diagram. Activities shown on the diagram shall
include, but are not necessarily limited to:
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
003113 - 2
1.
Project Mobilization
2.
Submittals and approvals of Shop Drawings and Samples
3.
Procurement of equipment and critical materials
4.
Fabrication of special material and equipment, installation and testing
5.
Final Cleanup
6.
Final inspection and testing
7.
All activities determined by the City to affect the progress of required dates for
completion, for all and for each part of the work
B.
The detail of information shall be such that duration times of activities shall normally range
from 1 to 25 calendar days. The selection and number of activities shall be subject to City
approval.
C.
Show on the diagram, as a minimum for each activity, description of each activity, duration in
calendar days of each activity, completion of each activity, and how each activity affects each
other activity. Submit diagram on a sheet 30” high, or agreed height by the City, by the width
required.
D.
The Contractor shall additionally provide a Bar Chart type schedule for review at each project
meeting. The information shall be detailed by activity and updated weekly to demonstrate work
progress for any 2-4-week period. Each activity schedule to be complete during a previous week
that is not accomplished shall be explained during the current project meeting with solution for
expediting that activity and/or statement relative to the delays to explain the same.
1.4
MATERIAL STATUS REPORTS
A.
The Contractor’s standard materials status report form will be acceptable if, in the City’s
judgment, it provides sufficient pertinent data to determine that materials procurement flow is
adequate for all needs of the Work. The Contractor’s standard materials status report shall
include, at a minimum, the following information:
1.
Item description, listed in accordance with the Specifications Section number in which
the item is called for
2.
Purchase Order number and date of issue
3.
Vendor Name
4.
Date Shipped and shipping means utilized
5.
Estimated date of arrival at job site
6.
Actual date of arrival at project site, and receiving report number
B.
On a letter of transmittal accompanying periodic reports, or an accompanying summary sheet,
or other means acceptable to the City, clearly indicate those items which are critically overdue
or otherwise detrimental to the maintenance of the approved schedule.
1.5
CONSTRUCTION STATUS REPORTS
A.
Report actual progress by updating the mathematical analysis as indicated below.
B.
Note on the summary report, or clearly show on a revised issue the affected portions of the
detailed diagram, all revisions causing changes in the detailed program.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
003113 - 3
C.
Revise the summary report as necessary for continued clarity.
D.
Describe activities or portions of activities completed during the reporting period.
E.
State the percentage of Work actually completed and scheduled as of the report dates and the
progress along the critical path in terms of days ahead or days behind the scheduled dates.
F.
It the Work is behind schedule, also report progress along other paths with negative float.
G.
Include a narrative report which shows but is not necessarily limited to:
1.
A description of the problem areas, current and anticipated
2.
Delaying factors, and their impact
3.
An explanation of corrective actions taken or proposed
1.6
6.01 REVISIONS
A.
Make only those revisions to the approved Construction Schedule and approved Material Status
Report as they are approved in advance by the City.
END OF SECTION 003113
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE
03351 - 1
SECTION 003351 – EXPOSED AGGREGATE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes: Micro Finished and Exposed Coarse Aggregate Concrete produced through
the use of chemical surface retarder to expose the sand and fine aggregates of a concrete mix
B.
Related Sections: Refer to the following sections for related work
1.
Section 02200: “Earthwork”
2.
Section 03300: “Cast-In-Place Concrete”
3.
Section 05500: “Metal Fabrications”
4.
Section 07900: “Joint Sealants”
1.2
References
A.
American Concrete Institute (ACI)
B.
American Society of Testing and materials (ASTM)
1.
C 31 Practices for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
2.
C 33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates
3.
C 39 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
4.
C 42 Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of
Concrete
5.
C 94 Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
6.
C 143 Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
7.
C 150 Specification for Portland Cement C 172 Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed
Concrete
8.
C 231 Test Method for Sampling Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by Pressure
Method
9.
C 260 Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
10.
C 494 Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
11.
D 994 Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete
1.3
Submittals
A.
General: Submit the following items in accordance with the Conditions of Contract and Section
01330, “Submittal Procedures”
B.
Product Data: Submit product data for the following materials and items:
1.
Reinforcement
2.
Forming Accessories
3.
Admixtures
4.
Chemical Surface Retarders
5.
Patching Compounds
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE
03351 - 2
6.
Sealants
7.
Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings for fabrication, bending and placement of
concrete reinforcement.
8.
Show bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars and arrangement of
reinforcement including bar overlap.
9.
Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete slabs or structures.
10.
Laboratory Test Reports: Submit concrete test materials test reports and mix design
reports certifying that each material or item complies with or exceeds the specified
requirements.
1.4
Quality Assurance
A.
Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following, except as otherwise indicated:
1.
ACI 301 “Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings”
2.
ACI 304 “Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete”
3.
ACI 305 “Hot Weather Concreting “4. ACI 306 “Cold Weather Concreting”
4.
ACI 308 “Standard Practice for Curing Concrete”
5.
ACI 309 “Standard Practice for Consolidation of Concrete”
6.
ACI 318 “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete”
7.
ACI 347 “Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork”
8.
CRSI “Manual of Standard Practice”
9.
SP-66 “ACI Detailing Manual”
B.
Mock-up Panels: Prepare one mock-up panel at the project site to demonstrate proficiency of
the contractor as well as determine the best procedures and degree of sand or aggregate
exposure. Mockup panels shall be a minimum of 4’ x 4’. Contractor shall use the methods and
materials proposed for use on the final installation. Uniformity in appearance of each panel shall
be the responsibility of the contractor. The approved mock-up panel shall serve as a standard of
appearance for the final work to be produced. Dayton Superior’s Technical Representative,
insert name, whenever possible, shall be present and or involved with the mock up to review
proper preparation, application and removal processes.
C.
Quality Control Testing During Construction: Contractor will engage independent concrete
testing service for quality control during concrete construction operations.
1.
Notify owner’s representative at least two (2) working days in advance of field operations
requiring concrete testing, or of resumption of operations after stoppages.
2.
Coordinate concreting operations with testing service to facilitate quality control testing.
3.
Sample and test concrete during placement as follows:
a.
Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172: except modified for slump to conform
with ASTM C94
b.
Slump: ASTM C143; test one for each concrete load at point of discharge and one
for each set of compressive strength test specimens.
c.
Air Content ASTM C231: pressure method: one for each set of compressive
specimens.
d.
Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39; one (1) set for each 150 cubic yards (115
cubic meters) or fractions thereof, of concrete class placed in any one day or for
each 5,000 sq. ft. (465 sq. meters) of surface area placed; two (2) specimens tested
seven (7) days, three (3) specimens tested twenty-eight (28) days and one (1)
specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE
03351 - 3
4.
SCAQMD VOC Compliance: Contractor to submit documents that surface retarder
complies with SCAQMD Rule 1113 for VOC compliance in the flats category.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FORM MATERIALS
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, construct formwork with plywood metal, metal-framed plywood or
other acceptable materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.
1.
Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly placed
concrete without bowing or deflection.
2.
Provide forms that comply with US Product Standard PS 1 when applicable
a.
B-B High Density Overlaid Concrete Form, Class I
b.
B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood Class I, Exterior Grade or better, edge sealed, with
each piece bearing legible inspection trademark.
3.
Form Coatings: Provide commercially formulated form-coating compounds that will not
bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent
treatments of concrete surfaces.
a.
Acceptable Materials: Clean Strip™ J100 VOC. www.daytonsuperior.com
4.
Form Ties: where applicable Provide factory-fabricated, adjustable length, removable or
snap off metal form ties, designed to prevent deflection and to prevent spalling concrete
surfaces upon removal.
2.2
REINFORCING MATERIALS
A.
Cold-drawn steel wire. ASTM A82
B.
Welded wire fabric: ASTM A185, welded steel wire fabric, furnish in flat sheets, not rolls
unless approved by the owner’s representative.
C.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, deformed.
1.
Provide Grade 40 bars as required in details. 2. Provide Grade 60 Bars No.3-18, except as
otherwise noted.
D.
Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs,
spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded
wire fabric in place.
1.
Use wire type supports complying with CRSI recommendations, unless otherwise
indicated. Do not use wood, brick, stone, broken block or pieces of concrete.
2.
For concrete-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners if base
material will not adequately support chair legs.
3.
For exposed – to – view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with
forms, provide supports with legs, which are protected with plastic, stainless steel
protected, or special stainless complying with CRSI Classes, C, D, or E, respectively.
E.
Shop fabricate the reinforcing bars to conform to required shapes and dimensions, with
fabrication tolerances complying with ACI 315. In case of fabricating errors do not re-bend or
straighten reinforcement in manner that will injure or weaken material.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE
03351 - 4
2.3
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C150 Types I-II and III, “Low-Alkali” cement unless otherwise
specified. Use one brand of cement throughout the project unless otherwise approved by the
owner’s representative.
B.
Aggregates: Shall be gap- graded conforming to C 33, size to be approved by the owner’s
representative dependent upon the type, color and etch of exposure desired.
C.
Water: Potable, clean, fresh, free from oils, acids, organic matter or other deleterious
substances.
D.
Admixtures: All admixtures shall be specified in the mix design.
1.
Air-Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C 260
2.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
3.
Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
4.
Chloride-containing Admixtures are not permitted.
2.4
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
Expansion Joint Materials
1.
Typical Building: ASTM D 994, preformed strips of a bituminous mastic compositions
2.
Slabs – in Ground and Sidewalks: ASTM D 1751, preformed expansion joint filler
having relatively little extrusion and substantial recovery after release from compression.
B.
Follow ACI 308 for concrete curing.
2.5
CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A.
Exposed Coarse Aggregate Finishes, “Ready Mixed “concrete unless otherwise approved or
specified; in accordance with ASTM C 94. Exposed Aggregate Concrete should meet or exceed
the following criteria.
1.
Compressive Strength: Minimum 3,500 psi strength at 28 days
2.
Concrete shall be gap-graded with weathered rounded coarse aggregate consisting of not
more than 62% - 65% minimum content.
3.
Water/Cement Ratio: Not greater than .55 by weight.
4.
Slump: Not greater than 4 inches.
5.
Air Content: Between 4 ½% - 7 ½%
B.
Exposed Sand Finishes: Use Ready Mixed “concrete unless otherwise approved or specified; in
accordance with ASTM C94. Expose Sand finishes should meet or exceed the following
criteria.
1.
Compressive Strength: Minimum 3,500 psi at 28 days
2.
Concrete shall be gap-graded with weathered round coarse aggregate consisting of not
more than 45%-50% maximum content
3.
Water/Cement Ratio: not greater than .55 by weight
4.
Slump: not greater than 4 inches
5.
Air Content: Between 4 ½% - 7 ½%
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE
03351 - 5
C.
Admixtures
1.
Use water-reducing admixtures in all concrete.
2.
Use air-entraining admixture in all exterior exposed concrete.
2.6
PLANT, EQUIPMENT, MACHINES AND TOOLS
A.
General: Plant, equipment, machines and tools used in the workplace shall be subject to
approval and shall be maintained in a satisfactory working condition at all times.
1.
Provide equipment with capability of producing the required product, meeting or
exceeding grade controls, thickness control and smoothness requirements as specified.
2.
Use of equipment shall be discontinued if it produces unsatisfactory results.
3.
Owner’s representatives shall have access to the plant and all equipment to ensure proper
operation and compliance with the specifications at all times during construction.
2.7
CONCRETE SURFACE RETARDER AND FINISHING AIDS
A.
Spray Applied, film forming top surface retarder designed for specific sized aggregates and
finish requirements. Color Coded to allow for ease of application and verification of etch level
being used as well as even and complete coverage
1.
Acceptable Material: Top Cast Surface Retarders by GCP Applied Technologies.
B.
Spray Applied and film forming protective coating for adjacent masonry and concrete surfaces
1.
Acceptable Materials: Top Cast SS 100 by GCP Applied Technologies.
a.
Top Cast Surface Retarders and Top Cast SS-100 distributed by Dayton Superior
Corporation. 1125 Byers Road Miamisburg, OH 45342 Dayton Superior Customer
Service: 888-977-9600 www.daytonsuperior.com/products/chemicals?name=top-
cast
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FORM SETTING
A.
Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that
might be applied until such loads can be supported by concrete structure.
B.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment,
elevation and position.
C.
Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast - place –
concrete surface and adjacent materials.
D.
Provisions for other trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork and slabs to accommodate
other trades.
E.
Tolerances: set forms with the upper edge true to line and grade with an allowable tolerance of
¼” (6mm) in any 10 foot (3 m) long section.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE
03351 - 6
3.2
PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A.
Comply with CRSI’s recommended practice for “Placing Reinforcing Bars”, for details and
methods of reinforcement placement and supports.
B.
Clean reinforcement of all loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, oil, concrete splatter from
previous pours and other materials, which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
C.
Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork,
construction or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs,
runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required.
D.
Install welded wire fabric of same gage in as long of lengths as is practical. Lap adjoining
pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps of adjacent widths to
prevent continuous laps in either direction.
3.3
PREPERATIONS FOR PLACING CONCRETE
A.
Remove water from excavations. Before placement, remove wood chips, shavings, and
hardened concrete etc. from forms.
1.
Clean all equipment.
2.
Wet forms, except in freezing weather, or oil properly with approved release.
B.
Earth shall be uniformly moist when concrete is placed. Sprinkling method shall not be such as
to form mud or pools of water. Watering sub-grade immediately prior to concrete placement is
not sufficient to make the soil uniformly moist.
C.
Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. Coordinate installation of joint materials
and moisture barriers with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.
3.4
PLACING CONCRETE
A.
Notify owner’s representative 24 hours in advance prior to placement.
B.
Filed Inspection: Do not place concrete until forms and reinforcing steel have been inspected
and approved.
1.
Place Ready-Mix concrete within specified time after batching. a. Below 40 degrees F (4
degrees C) See Cold Weather Placing b. 40 – 85 degrees F (4-29 degrees C) 90 minutes
c. 86 – 90 degrees F (30-32 degrees C) 75 minutes d. Above 90 degrees F (32 degrees C)
60 minutes.
*Concrete exceeding delivery times may be rejected by the owner’s representative
2.
Adding Water: Do not add water after initial introduction of mixing water for batch
except when slump of concrete is less than specified upon jobsite arrival and the
maximum water/cement ratio has not been exceeded.
a.
Notify owner’s representative prior to adding any additional water.
b.
Add only water enough to bring concrete slump within the specified limits. Turn
drum at least 30 additional revolutions at maximum mixing speed. Do not add
water to batch at any later time.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE
03351 - 7
c.
Insure that concrete strength meets or exceeds specified requirements, and water
does not exceed maximum amount specified in the approved CONCRETE MIX
DESIGN.
C.
General: Comply with ACI 304, as specified herein.
1.
Place concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that the concrete will not be
placed on a preceding layer which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams
or planes of weakness.
2.
If section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints. Deposit concrete as
nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation.
D.
Placing Concrete in Forms:
1.
Consolidate placed concrete by high frequency mechanical vibrating equipment,
supplemented as necessary by hand spading, rodding or tamping. Use equipment and
procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309.
a.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms.
b.
Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not further
visible effectiveness of the machines being used. Generally, 16-20” apart.
c.
At each insertion, limit duration of vibration time necessary to consolidate concrete
and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without
causing segregation of mix.
E.
Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in continuous operation, within
the limits of construction joints, until placement of panel or section is completed. Maintain
reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement operations.
F.
Placing Concrete Sidewalks: Place concrete in forms in one (1) layer of such thickness that
when consolidated and finished, sidewalks will be of thickness indicated.
G.
Cold Weather Placing: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength caused
by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, comply with ACI 306.
H.
Hot Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair the quality
and strength of concrete place concrete in accordance with ACI 305 and as herein specified.
3.5
CONCRETE FINISHING
A.
Exposed Coarse Aggregate finishes: Do not use tools that may force the aggregate away from
the surface creating a non-uniform surface after exposure
1.
Protect all areas, aluminum trim, curbs, borders and adjacent concrete and masonry
surfaces, pavers, stones etc. that are not to receive retarder finish prior to concrete
placement and retarder application using GCP Applied Technologies Top Cast SS 100
Surface Protectant. Distributed by Dayton Superior.
2.
Place concrete in the manner prescribed previously. Screed or strike off the surface in
two (2) directions using a wooden or metal straight edge to achieve the proper elevation
in a sawing motion back and forth.
3.
Allow the bleed water to evaporate the surface. It can then be floated using a wooden
hand float or a bull-float preferably wooden to close the surface and surround the coarse
aggregate with cement paste. Do not overwork the surface, as this tends to drive the
aggregate down away from the surface to be exposed. Float to a uniform appearance.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE
03351 - 8
4.
To reduce the rate of evaporation of moisture from the concrete use AquaFilm® J74RTU
during the finishing process, his reduction of moisture loss allows time for proper
finishing.
B.
Exposed Sand Finishes: The use of a rolling tamper, jitterbug or rolling jitterbug shall be
considered when producing micro etched concrete surfaces. This will enable the finisher to
create a denser surface paste with no obstruction due to the appearance of coarse aggregate,
allowing for a uniform sand texture.
1.
Protect all areas, aluminum trim, curbs, borders and adjacent concrete and masonry
surfaces, pavers, stones etc. that are not to receive retarder finish prior to concrete
placement and retarder application using GCP Applied Technologies Top Cast SS 100
Surface Protectant. Distributed by Dayton Superior.
2.
Place concrete in the manner prescribed previously. Screed or strike off the surface in
two (2) directions using a wooden or metal straight edge to achieve the proper elevation
in a sawing motion back and forth.
3.
Allow the bleed water to evaporate the surface. It can then be floated using a wooden
hand float or a bull-float preferably wooden to close the surface and surround the coarse
aggregate with cement paste. Float to a uniform appearance. Follow float operations with
hand trowels or Fresno steel trowels to create tight dense smooth surface. (This may
require two or three passes depending upon mix design and or desired finish to be
achieved).
4.
To reduce the rate of evaporation of moisture from the concrete use AquaFilm® J74RTU
during the finishing process, his reduction of moisture loss allows time for proper
finishing.
NOTE: Do not burnish the surface or allow the micro etched surface to prematurely dry
prior to the application of Top Cast.
C.
Concrete Surface Retarders Spray Applied, film forming top surface retarder, designed for
specific sized aggregates and finish requirements. Color coded to allow for ease of application
and verification of grade being used as well as even and complete coverage.
1.
Soon after the final seal finish has been completed spray GCP Applied Technologies
“Top Cast” surface retarder using a lowpressure sprayer with a 0.5gpm tip at a rate of
200—350 sq./ft. per gallon in a full hiding coat.
a.
Once dry GCP Applied Technologies “Top Cast “will yield a coating that provides
intermittent rain protection. Once completely dry it can be covered to protect the
surface if heavy extended rains are predicted.
Retarder Selection Guide
Number
Aggregate Size to Expose
Color
01
Light Acid Etch Finish
White
03
Acid Etch Finish
Violet
05
Sand Texture Finish
Lt. Blue
15
Up to 1/4” Agg.
Yellow
25
1/8” to 1/4” Agg.
Beige
50
1/8” to 3/8” Agg.
Canary Green
75
1/4" to 3/8” Agg.
Blue
100
3/8” to 1/2" Agg.
Gray
125
3/8” to 5/8” Agg.
Pink
150
3/8” to 5/8” Agg.
Green
200
5/8” to 1” Agg.
Salmon
250
1” to 1-1/2” Agg.
Lt. Orange
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE
03351 - 9
2.
Wash surface with water rinse using stiff brooms and water hose or by high pressure
washing with power equipment as early as 4-16 depending on weather conditions.
Retarder removal intervals are dependent upon strength of the concrete mix, aggregate
size and desired washing techniques. Earlier washing on the light etches may be
necessary. Verify in accordance with the mock-up approval detailed herein.
3.
Rinse water and cement matrix removal shall be in accordance with local codes and
should not be allowed to be washed or flow down to arroyos, storm sewers, ponds,
streams or sanitary sewers by precipitation or other surface flows.
4.
Prior to completion of the project, remove wash water residue from the site to location
approved by the local district.
3.6
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A.
Patching Defective Areas: Immediately cut out honeycomb, rock pockets and voids over ¼ inch
(6mm) in any dimension as well as holes left by tie rods, bolts etc. down to solid concrete but,
in no case to a depth less than 1 inch (25mm).
1.
Cut edges perpendicular to concrete surface.
2.
Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush coat area to be patched with neat
cement grout or proprietary bonding agent before placing cement mortar or proprietary
patching compound.
B.
Remove and replace concrete with defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to the
satisfaction of the owner’s representative.
1.
Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles,
honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface as well as stains and
other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
a.
Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and brush with neat
cement grout or apply concrete bonding agent.
b.
Mix Patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type of class
as original concrete.
c.
Place, compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same
manner as adjacent concrete.
END OF SECTION 03351
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
006500 - 1
SECTION 006500 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Inspection procedures
2.
Project Record Documents
3.
Operation and maintenance manuals
4.
Warranties
5.
Instruction of Owner's personnel
6.
Final cleaning
1.2
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following:
1.
Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on
the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2.
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3.
Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
4.
Obtain and submit a Certificate of Occupancy from the City Building Department for the
use of the buildings.
5.
Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
6.
Prepare and submit Project Record Documents and Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
7.
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, materials designated in the construction
documents, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with
manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
8.
Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
9.
Complete startup testing of systems.
10.
Submit test/adjust/balance records.
11.
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
12.
Advise Owner of changeover in related utilities.
13.
Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
14.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
15.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
006500 - 2
B.
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Owner’s representative will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Owner’s representative will prepare the Certificate of Substantial
Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or
additional items identified by Owner’s representative that must be completed or corrected
before certificate will be issued.
1.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected. Contractor to pay for the cost of all consultants’
time for re-inspections on a time and materials basis if work is significantly incomplete.
2.
Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final
Completion.
1.3
FINAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion, complete the following:
1.
Submit a final Application for Payment according to Supplemental General Conditions.
2.
Submit certified copy of Owner’s representative's Substantial Completion inspection list
of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Owner’s
representative. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed
or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
3.
Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
4.
Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
5.
Submit a written certification that all construction has been completed with asbestos free
materials.
6.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
B.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Owner’s representative will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Owner’s representative will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after
inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before
certificate will be issued.
C.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected. Contractor to pay for the cost of all consultants’ time for
re-inspections on a time and materials basis if work is significantly incomplete.
1.4
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A.
Preparation: Submit three copies of the list. Include name and identification of each space and
area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction
including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1.
Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first. For exterior
spaces, identify major landmarks or adjacent amenities to describe the space.
B.
Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
006500 - 3
C.
Include the following information at the top of each page:
1.
Project name
2.
Date
3.
Name of Owner’s representative
4.
Name of Contractor
5.
Page number
1.5
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project
Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents
for Owner’s representative's reference during normal working hours.
B.
Record Drawings: Contractor to prepare, maintain, finalize and submit one set of blue- or
black-line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Contractor to utilize a
licensed surveyor to provide final elevation grades for record drawings. Contractor to provide
the City with an electronic copy of the final record drawings.
1.
Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that
shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether
individual or entity is installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up
Record Prints.
a.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be
readily identified and recorded later.
b.
Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
c.
Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
d.
Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are
marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings.
2.
Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.
3.
Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
4.
Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate
numbers, and similar identification where applicable.
5.
Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with
durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.
6.
Contractor shall review the record drawings on a monthly basis with the owner’s
representative to verify that the record drawings are up to date. The contractor shall
ensure that the record drawings reflect the actual construction progress accurate to within
48 hours.
C.
Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1.
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2.
Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
006500 - 4
3.
Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data, where applicable.
4.
Contractor shall review the record specifications on a monthly basis with the owner’s
representative to verify that the record drawings are up to date. The contractor shall
ensure that the record drawings reflect the actual construction progress accurate to within
48 hours.
D.
Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark one set to
indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated
in Product Data.
1.
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2.
Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3.
Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings and Record Specifications, where
applicable.
E.
Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other
Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual
performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for
continued use and reference.
1.6
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and
maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
Contractor to provide the City with an electronic copy of the operation and maintenance
manuals. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections
and as follows:
1.
Operation Data:
a.
Emergency instructions and procedures.
b.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards.
c.
Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend
operations.
d.
Description of controls and sequence of operations.
e.
Piping diagrams.
2.
Maintenance Data:
3.
Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts.
4.
Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier.
5.
Maintenance procedures.
6.
Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance.
7.
Maintenance record forms.
8.
Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials.
9.
Copies of maintenance service agreements.
10.
Copies of warranties and bonds.
B.
Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and
index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets.
Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
006500 - 5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents. Submit 3 copies
of the manual.
1.7
WARRANTIES
A.
Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Owner’s representative for designated
portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial
Completion is indicated.
B.
Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of
designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during
construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
paper.
2.
Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
3.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
D.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A.
Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems,
and equipment not part of a system.
1.
Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures.
2.
Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal
operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season.
3.
Schedule training with Owner, with at least seven days' advance notice.
4.
Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of
instruction, and course content.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
006500 - 6
B.
Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules
for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification
Sections. For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include
instruction for the following:
1.
System design and operational philosophy.
2.
Review of documentation.
3.
Operations.
4.
Adjustments.
5.
Troubleshooting.
6.
Maintenance.
7.
Repair.
3.2
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
2.
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
3.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign
deposits.
4.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.
5.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.
6.
Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
7.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of
stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of
exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.
8.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums,
shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
9.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
10.
Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if
visible soil or stains remain.
11.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove
glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or
broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking
care not to scratch surfaces.
12.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
13.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that
already show evidence of repair or restoration.
a.
Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical
nameplates.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
006500 - 7
14.
Revise seven subparagraphs below to suit Project. Check for conflict or duplication with
provisions in other Sections, particularly Divisions 15 and 16.
15.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove
excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.
16.
Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
17.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting
from water exposure.
18.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of
diffusers, registers, and grills.
19.
Subparagraph below is a major work item that may be disruptive to closeout procedures.
20.
Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction.
21.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective
and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements
for new fixtures.
22.
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C.
Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid
Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.
D.
Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or
excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous
materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of
lawfully.
END OF SECTION 006500
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
GENERAL CONDITIONS
007200 - 1
SECTION 007200 – GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, MAG Uniform Standard
Specifications for Public Works Construction, 2018 Revision to the 2015 Edition, General
Conditions Section 101 through 110 are part of this Contract.
1.2
Electronic version of the MAG Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works
Construction, 2018 Revision to the 2015 Edition can be found at the following address:
http://azmag.gov/Portals/0/Documents/MagContent/2018_Specifications_and_Details_Book12.pdf
END OF SECTION 007200
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 1
SECTION 013300 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Supplemental General Conditions
and the Special Provisions, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Owner’s representative's
responsive action.
B.
Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Owner’s representative’s
approval. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.4
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
General: The Owner’s representative will not provide electronic copies of CAD Drawings of
the Contract Drawings for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a.
Owner’s representative reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal
requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C.
Submittals Schedule: Submittals shall be submitted in a timely manner to allow adequate review
time as scheduled below, resubmittal if necessary, and delivery of materials so as not to
adversely affect the scheduled performance of related construction activities.
D.
Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Owner’s representative's receipt of submittal.
1.
Initial Review: Allow 3 working days for initial review of each submittal. Allow
additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 2
submittals. Owner’s representative will advise Contractor when a submittal being
processed must be delayed for coordination.
2.
Delete subparagraph below if not required.
3.
Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittals by Owner’s representative's
consultants, Owner, or other parties is required, allow 7 working days for initial review of
each submittal.
4.
All submittals shall be routed as determined at the Pre-Construction Conference.
5.
Insert list of submittals below requiring concurrent review, or delete and identify
submittals in the Sections where they are specified. Structural, mechanical, plumbing,
and electrical components are examples of the Work that often require concurrent review.
6.
Allowing procedure in subparagraph below may cause tracking problems for Architect
and Construction Manager, if any. Delete if not allowed. See Evaluations.
7.
If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.
8.
Allow 5 working days for processing each resubmittal.
9.
No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit
submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing.
E.
Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1.
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2.
Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Owner’s representative.
3.
Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a.
Revise list below to suit Project.
b.
Project name.
c.
Date.
d.
Name and address of Owner’s representative.
e.
Name and address of Contractor.
f.
Name and address of subcontractor.
g.
Name and address of supplier.
h.
Name of manufacturer.
i.
Revise first subparagraph below to suit Project and office practice. See
Evaluations.
j.
Unique identifier, including revision number.
k.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
l.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
m.
Other necessary identification.
F.
Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents
on submittals.
G.
Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless
Owner’s representative observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents,
initial submittal may serve as final submittal.
H.
Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and
handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Owner’s representative will return
submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor.
1.
On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant
information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Owner’s
representative on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 3
Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label
information as the related submittal.
2.
Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
3.
Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form to include the following information:
a.
Project name.
b.
Date.
c.
Destination (To:).
d.
Source (From:).
e.
Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
f.
Category and type of submittal.
g.
Submittal purpose and description.
h.
Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
i.
Remarks.
j.
Signature of transmitter.
I.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
J.
Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Owner’s
representative in connection with construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
1.
Number of Copies: Submit sufficient number of copies of each submittal as will allow
the Owner’s representative to retain four (4) copies of each submittal, unless otherwise
indicated. Owner’s representative will return the remaining marked up copies. Action
submittals may also be submitted and returned electronically.
2.
O & M Manuals: The contractor shall retain one copy of all marked up submittals to be
copied and incorporated in the O&M Manuals.
3.
Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows, unless otherwise
indicated. Submittals may also be submitted and returned electronically:
a.
Initial Submittal: Submit three copies of each submittal where selection of
options, color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is required. Owner’s
representative will return submittal with options selected.
b.
Final Submittal: Submit three copies, unless copies are required for operation and
maintenance manuals. Submit five copies where copies are required for operation
and maintenance manuals. Owner’s representative will retain two copies;
remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project
Record Document.
B.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 4
2.
Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3.
Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
Expand list below to suit Project.
b.
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
c.
Manufacturer's product specifications.
d.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
e.
Standard color charts.
f.
Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
g.
Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
h.
Printed performance curves.
i.
Operational range diagrams.
j.
Mill reports.
k.
Standard product operating and maintenance manuals.
l.
Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
m.
Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
n.
Application of testing agency labels and seals.
o.
Notation of coordination requirements.
C.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1.
Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
Revise or expand list below to suit Project. Comply with Owner's requirements
and office policy.
b.
Dimensions.
c.
Identification of products.
d.
Fabrication and installation drawings.
e.
Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
f.
Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and
control wiring.
g.
Shop work manufacturing instructions.
h.
Templates and patterns.
i.
Schedules.
j.
Design calculations.
k.
Compliance with specified standards.
l.
Notation of coordination requirements.
m.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
2.
Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
3.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches.
4.
Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows:
a.
Initial Submittal: Submit one correctable, translucent, reproducible print and two
blue- or black-line prints. Submit five prints where prints are required for
operation and maintenance manuals. Owner’s representative will return the
reproducible print. Mark up and retain one returned print as a Project Record
Drawing.
b.
Resubmittal: Same as initial submittal.
D.
Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following:
1.
Provide sample panels and mock-ups as specified in the separate specification sections.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 5
2.
Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
3.
Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified,
and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing
and inspection.
4.
Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review
of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Owner’s representative's sample where
so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following:
a.
Generic description of Sample.
b.
Product name or name of manufacturer.
c.
Sample source.
5.
Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's
letterhead, provide the following:
a.
Size limitations.
b.
Compliance with recognized standards.
c.
Availability.
d.
Delivery time.
6.
Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
a.
If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the
product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that
show approximate limits of the variations.
b.
Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that
illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections,
operation, and similar construction characteristics.
7.
Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit three full sets of available choices
where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Owner’s representative will return submittal with options
selected.
8.
Number of Samples for Verification: Submit three sets of Samples. Owner’s
representative will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and
retain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample.
a.
Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be
demonstrated.
9.
Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-
control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a.
Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time
of use.
b.
Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 6
E.
Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for
the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:
1.
Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product.
2.
Number and name of room or space.
3.
Location within room or space.
F.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in the SUPPLEMENTAL
GENERAL CONDITIONS.
G.
Submittals Schedule: Submit 3 copies of the Submittal Schedule within 7 working days of
notice to proceed.
H.
Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in the SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL
CONDITIONS.
I.
Schedule of Values: Submit 3 copies of the Schedule of Values within 10 working days of the
notice to proceed.
J.
Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Submit 3 copies. Include the following information in tabular form:
1.
Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying
products.
2.
Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
3.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
2.2
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
1.
Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Owner’s representative will not return copies.
2.
Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
3.
Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality
Requirements."
B.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Construction Progress Documentation."
C.
Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience
of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of Owner’s representatives and owners, and other information specified.
D.
Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements.
E.
Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 7
Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel
certified.
F.
Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project.
G.
Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience
where required.
H.
Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements.
I.
Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements.
J.
Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements.
K.
Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
L.
Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during
installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with
requirements.
M.
Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed
by a qualified testing agency.
N.
Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect
for Project. Include the following information:
1.
Name of evaluation organization.
2.
Date of evaluation.
3.
Time period when report is in effect.
4.
Product and manufacturers' names.
5.
Description of product.
6.
Test procedures and results.
7.
Limitations of use.
O.
Maintenance and Operation Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for
operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in
Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures”. Submit 3 copies.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 8
P.
Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
Q.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a
product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of
manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:
1.
Preparation of substrates.
2.
Required substrate tolerances.
3.
Sequence of installation or erection.
4.
Required installation tolerances.
5.
Required adjustments.
6.
Recommendations for cleaning and protection.
R.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized
service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
1.
Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative
making report.
2.
Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3.
Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4.
Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
5.
Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
6.
Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7.
Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
S.
Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of
insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of
coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
T.
Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit information directly to Owner. If submitted to Owner’s
representative, Owner’s representative will not review this information but will return it with no
action taken.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A.
Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note
corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Owner’s
representative.
B.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 9
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2
OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE'S ACTION
A.
General: Owner’s representative will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's
approval stamp and will return them without action.
B.
Action Submittals: Owner’s representative will review each submittal, make marks to indicate
corrections or modifications required, and return it. Owner’s representative will stamp each
submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken.
C.
Informational Submittals: Owner’s representative will review each submittal and will not return
it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Owner’s representative
will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
D.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.
END OF SECTION 013300
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
015369 - 1
SECTION 015639 - TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes general protection and pruning of existing trees and plants that are affected by
execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary site fencing.
2.
Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for removing existing trees and shrubs.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Caliper: Diameter of a trunk measured by a diameter tape or the average of the smallest and
largest diameters at 6 inches (150 mm) above the ground for trees up to, and including, 4-inch
(100-mm) size; and 12 inches (300 mm) above the ground for trees larger than 4-inch (100-mm)
size.
B.
Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other
vegetation to be protected during construction, to match edge of canopy.
C.
Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected
during construction, and defined by a circle concentric with each tree with a radius 1.5 times the
diameter of the drip line unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples for Verification: For each type of the following:
1.
Organic Mulch: 1-quart (1-L) volume of organic mulch; in sealed plastic bags labeled
with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source of mulch.
2.
Protection-Zone Fencing: Assembled Samples of manufacturer's standard size made from
full-size components
3.
Protection-Zone Signage: Full-size Samples of each size and text, ready for installation.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
015369 - 2
C.
Tree Pruning Schedule: Written schedule detailing scope and extent of pruning of trees to
remain that interfere with or are affected by construction.
1.
Species and size of tree.
2.
Location on site plan. Include unique identifier for each.
3.
Reason for pruning.
4.
Description of pruning to be performed.
5.
Description of maintenance following pruning.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified arborist and tree service firm.
B.
Certification: From arborist, certifying that trees indicated to remain have been protected during
construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly
treated and repaired when damaged.
C.
Maintenance Recommendations: From arborist, for care and protection of trees affected by
construction during and after completing the Work.
D.
Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings indicated to remain, which
establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
construction activities.
1.
Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape.
2.
Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each
tree or other plants designated to remain.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Arborist Qualifications: Certified Arborist as certified by ISA
B.
Tree Service Firm Qualifications: An experienced tree service firm that has successfully
completed temporary tree and plant protection work similar to that required for this Project and
that will assign an experienced, qualified arborist to Project site during execution of the Work.
C.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site
1.
Review methods and procedures related to temporary tree and plant protection including,
but not limited to, the following:
a.
Construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, personnel, and equipment
needed to make progress and avoid delays.
b.
Enforcing requirements for protection zones.
c.
Arborist's responsibilities.
d.
Field quality control.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
015369 - 3
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:
1.
Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.
2.
Parking vehicles or equipment.
3.
Foot traffic.
4.
Erection of sheds or structures.
5.
Impoundment of water.
6.
Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.
7.
Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust toward protection zones.
C.
Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones and
organic mulch.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Topsoil: Natural or cultivated top layer of the soil profile or manufactured topsoil; containing
organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of
brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and
other objects more than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and toxic and
other nonsoil materials.
1.
Obtain topsoil only from well-drained sites where topsoil is 4 inches (100 mm) deep or
more; do not obtain from bogs or marshes.
B.
Topsoil: Stockpiled topsoil from location shown on Drawings
C.
Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing for trees and
shrubs, consisting of one of the following:
1.
Type: Partially composted Shredded hardwood, Ground or shredded bark, or Wood and
bark chips
2.
Size Range: 3 inches (76 mm) maximum, 1/2 inch (13 mm) minimum
3.
Color: Natural.
D.
Protection-Zone Fencing: Fencing fixed in position and meeting the following requirements.
1.
Chain-Link Protection-Zone Fencing: Galvanized-steel fencing fabricated from minimum
2-inch (50-mm) opening, 0.148-inch- (3.76-mm-) diameter wire chain-link fabric; with
pipe posts, minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts, and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD
corner and pull posts and 0.177-inch- (4.5-mm-) diameter bottom tension wire; with tie
wires, hog ring ties, and other accessories for a complete fence system.
a.
Height: 6 feet (1.8 m)
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
015369 - 4
2.
Wood Protection-Zone Fencing: Constructed of two 2-by-4-inch (50-by-100-mm)
horizontal rails, with 4-by-4-inch (100-by-100-mm) preservative-treated wood posts
spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart, and lower rail set halfway between top rail and
ground.
a.
Height: 4 feet (1.2 m)
3.
Plastic Protection-Zone Fencing: Plastic construction fencing constructed of high-density
extruded and stretched polyethylene fabric with 2-inch (50-mm) maximum opening in
pattern and weighing a minimum of 0.4 lb/ft. (0.6 kg/m); remaining flexible from minus
60 to plus 200 deg F (minus 16 to plus 93 deg C); inert to most chemicals and acids;
minimum tensile yield strength of 2000 psi (13.8 MPa) and ultimate tensile strength of
2680 psi (18.5 MPa); secured with plastic bands or galvanized-steel or stainless-steel
wire ties; and supported by tubular or T-shape galvanized-steel posts spaced not more
than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart.
a.
Height: 4 feet (1.2 m)
b.
Color: High-visibility orange, nonfading.
E.
Protection-Zone Signage: Shop-fabricated, rigid plastic or metal sheet with attachment holes
prepunched and reinforced; legibly printed with nonfading lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Examine the site to verify that temporary erosion- and
sedimentation-control measures are in place. Verify that flows of water redirected from
construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.
B.
For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by arborist, listing conditions detrimental to tree
and plant protection.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated.
B.
Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while
mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding,
or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations.
C.
Tree-Protection Zones: Mulch areas inside tree-protection zones and other areas indicated.
1.
Apply 4-inch (100-mm) average thickness of organic mulch. Do not place mulch within
6 inches (150 mm) of tree trunks.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
015369 - 5
3.3
TREE- AND PLANT-PROTECTION ZONES
A.
Protection-Zone Fencing: Install protection-zone fencing along edges of protection zones
[before materials or equipment are brought on the site and construction operations begin]
<Insert requirement> in a manner that will prevent people[ and animals] from easily entering
protected area except by entrance gates. Construct fencing so as not to obstruct safe passage or
visibility at vehicle intersections where fencing is located adjacent to pedestrian walkways or in
close proximity to street intersections, drives, or other vehicular circulation.
1.
Chain-Link Fencing: Install to comply with ASTM F 567 and with manufacturer's written
instructions.
2.
Posts: Set or drive posts into ground one-third the total height of the fence without
concrete footings. Where a post is located on existing paving or concrete to remain,
provide appropriate means of post support acceptable to Architect.
3.
Access Gates: Install [where indicated] <Insert requirement>; adjust to operate smoothly,
easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment,
misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm
that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
B.
Protection-Zone Signage: Install protection-zone signage in visibly prominent locations in a
manner approved by Architect. Install one sign spaced approximately every 20 feet (6 m) on
protection-zone fencing, but no fewer than four signs with each facing a different direction.
C.
Maintain protection zones free of weeds and trash.
D.
Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are
damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.
E.
Maintain protection-zone fencing and signage in good condition as acceptable to Architect and
remove when construction operations are complete and equipment has been removed from the
site.
1.
Do not remove protection-zone fencing, even temporarily, to allow deliveries or
equipment access through the protection zone.
2.
Temporary access is permitted subject to preapproval in writing by arborist if a root
buffer effective against soil compaction is constructed as directed by arborist. Maintain
root buffer so long as access is permitted.
3.4
EXCAVATION
A.
General: Excavate at edge of protection zones and for trenches indicated within protection
zones according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
B.
Trenching near Trees: Where utility trenches are required within protection zones, hand
excavate under or around tree roots or tunnel under the roots by drilling, auger boring, or pipe
jacking. Do not cut main lateral tree roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with
installation of utilities. Cut roots as required for root pruning.
C.
Redirect roots in backfill areas where possible. If encountering large, main lateral roots, expose
roots beyond excavation limits as required to bend and redirect them without breaking. If
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
015369 - 6
encountered immediately adjacent to location of new construction and redirection is not
practical, cut roots approximately 3 inches (75 mm) back from new construction and as required
for root pruning.
D.
Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill. Provide temporary
earth cover or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and maintain in a moist
condition. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently
relocated and covered with soil.
3.5
ROOT PRUNING
A.
Prune roots that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune roots as follows:
1.
Cut roots manually by digging a trench and cutting exposed roots with sharp pruning
instruments; do not break, tear, chop, or slant the cuts. Do not use a backhoe or other
equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.
2.
Cut Ends: Per Arborist Direction
3.
Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected
and covered with soil.
4.
Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly.
5.
Backfill as soon as possible according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth
Moving."
B.
Root Pruning at Edge of Protection Zone: Per Arborist Direction
C.
Root Pruning within Protection Zone: Per Arborist Direction. Clear and excavate by hand to the
depth of the required excavation to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading
forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible.
3.6
CROWN PRUNING
A.
Prune branches that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune branches per
Arborist Direction.
1.
Prune trees to remain to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root
system. Provide subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by
arborist.
2.
Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 (Part 1)
3.
Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop.
4.
Do not apply pruning paint to wounds.
B.
Chip removed branches and spread over areas identified by Landscape Architect and Arborist.
3.7
REGRADING
A.
Lowering Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope
grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
015369 - 7
B.
Lowering Grade within Protection Zone: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing
grade around trees, slope grade away from trees as recommended by arborist unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
Root Pruning: Prune tree roots exposed by lowering the grade. Do not cut main lateral
roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots. Cut roots as required for root pruning.
C.
Raising Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated above existing grade around trees, slope
grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone.
D.
Minor Fill within Protection Zone: Where existing grade is 2 inches (50 mm) or less below
elevation of finish grade, fill with topsoil. Place topsoil in a single uncompacted layer and hand
grade to required finish elevations.
3.8
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspections: Engage a qualified arborist to direct plant-protection measures in the vicinity of
trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain and to prepare inspection reports.
3.9
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
A.
General: Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be
relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.
1.
Submit details of proposed root cutting and tree and shrub repairs.
2.
Have arborist perform the root cutting, branch pruning, and damage repair of trees and
shrubs.
3.
Treat damaged trunks, limbs, and roots according to arborist's written instructions.
4.
Perform repairs within 24 hours.
5.
Replace vegetation that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as
determined by Architect.
B.
Trees: Remove and replace trees indicated to remain that are more than 50 percent dead or in an
unhealthy condition before the end of the corrections period or are damaged during construction
operations that Architect determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern.
1.
Provide new trees of same size and species as those being replaced for each tree that
measures 4 inches (100 mm) or smaller in caliper size.
2.
Provide one new tree(s) of 4-inch (100-mm) caliper size for each tree being replaced that
measures more than 4 inches (100 mm) in caliper size.
a.
Species: Species selected by Landscape Architect
3.
Plant and maintain new trees as specified in Section 329300 "Plants."
3.10
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A.
Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, trash and debris, and legally
dispose of them off Owner's property.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
015369 - 8
END OF SECTION 015639
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 1
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,
mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:
1.
Concrete headers.
2.
Site walls.
3.
Slab on Grade.
4.
Footings
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 321316 "Decorative Concrete Paving" for decorative concrete pavement and
walks.
2.
Section 321373 " Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for concrete pavement and walks.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the
following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-
furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
1.
Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
C.
Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and
placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar
diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing,
and supports for concrete reinforcement.
D.
Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional
engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 2
1.
Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork,
shoring removal, and reshoring installation and removal.
E.
Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the
structure.
1.
Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Landscape Architect.
F.
Samples: For vapor retarder.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer manufacturer and testing agency.
B.
Welding certificates.
C.
Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
1.
Cementitious materials.
2.
Admixtures.
3.
Form materials and form-release agents.
4.
Steel reinforcement and accessories.
5.
Fiber reinforcement.
6.
Waterstops.
7.
Curing compounds.
8.
Floor and slab treatments.
9.
Bonding agents.
10.
Adhesives.
11.
Vapor retarders.
12.
Semirigid joint filler.
13.
Joint-filler strips.
14.
Repair materials.
D.
Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance
with requirements:
1.
Aggregates: Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of
concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.
E.
Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified
tolerances.
F.
Field quality-control reports.
G.
Minutes of preinstallation conference.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 3
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as
ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified
Concrete Flatwork Technician.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
1.
Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities."
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
1.
Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.
2.
Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing
Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency
laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician -
Grade II.
D.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from
single source from single manufacturer.
E.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M,
"Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."
F.
ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1.
ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
G.
Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
H.
Mockups: Cast concrete slab-on-grade and formed-surface panels to demonstrate typical joints,
surface finish, texture, tolerances, floor treatments, and standard of workmanship.
1.
Build panel approximately 100 sq. ft. for slab-on-grade and 60 sq. ft. for formed surface
in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Landscape Architect.
2.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
I.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine
procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each
entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 4
a.
Contractor's superintendent.
b.
Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
c.
Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
d.
Concrete subcontractor.
e.
Special concrete finish subcontractor.
2.
Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality
control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures,
curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips,
semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring
procedures, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation
tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness
measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and
damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A.
Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1.
Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.
2.
Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,
and as follows:
a.
Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge
sealed.
3.
Reckli formliner 2/208 Volta, or equal.
B.
Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic,
paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not
exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to
resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
C.
Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic
concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
D.
Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient
to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.
E.
Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.
F.
Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 5
G.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
1.
Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
H.
Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic
form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of
concrete on removal.
1.
Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane
of exposed concrete surface.
2.
Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in
diameter in concrete surface.
3.
Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing
or waterproofing.
2.2
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B.
Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as-
drawn steel wire into flat sheets.
2.3
REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A.
Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel smooth bars, cut true to length
with ends square and free of burrs.
B.
Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating
on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 775M.
C.
Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780, zinc-based solder, paint containing zinc dust, or sprayed
zinc.
D.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel
wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater
compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
1.
For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use
CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
2.
For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated
wire bar supports.
2.4
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source, throughout Project:
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 6
1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II Supplement with the following:
a.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618,
b.
Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
B.
Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.
C.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide
aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years'
satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and
cementitious materials.
1.
Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal.
D.
Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
2.5
ADMIXTURES
A.
Air-Entraining Admixture ASTM C 260.
B.
Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those
permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium
chloride.
1.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2.
Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
5.
High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
6.
Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
2.6
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive
or pressure-sensitive tape.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; Blackline 400.
b.
Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 15.
c.
Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Florprufe 120.
d.
Insulation Solutions, Inc.; Viper VaporCheck 16
e.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 10 mil
f.
Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 10.
g.
Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn 10 mil Green.
h.
Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 10 mil Class A.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 7
2.7
CURING MATERIALS
A.
Evaporation Retarder: ASTM C309 Type 2 Waterborne, monomolecular film forming,
manufactured for application to fresh concrete.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CimFilm.
b.
BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm.
c.
ChemMasters; SprayFilm.
d.
Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm.
e.
Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74).
f.
Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm.
g.
Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar.
h.
Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor-Aid.
i.
Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin.
j.
L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON.
k.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE.
l.
Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold.
m.
Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM.
n.
Sika Corporation; SikaFilm.
o.
SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film.
p.
Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid.
q.
TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM.
r.
Unitex; PRO-FILM.
s.
Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Envio Set.
B.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.
C.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
D.
Water: Potable.
2.8
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber
B.
Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a
Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.
C.
Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or
styrene butadiene.
D.
Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing
and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit
requirements, and as follows:
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 8
1.
Types I and II, non-load bearing Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or
freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.
E.
Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet.
Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.
F.
Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) thick,
with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of
concrete or debris.
2.9
CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
A.
Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
1.
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture
designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.
B.
Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than
portland cement in concrete as follows:
1.
Fly Ash: 25 percent.
2.
Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.
3.
Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent.
4.
Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent
portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent.
5.
Silica Fume: 10 percent.
6.
Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not
exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent.
7.
Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag, and Silica
Fume: 50 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not
exceeding 10 percent.
C.
Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to [0.06] [0.15] [0.30] [1.00]
percent by weight of cement.
D.
Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Use water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.
2.
Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
3.
Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial
slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a
water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
4.
Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.
2.10
CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS
A.
Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 9
1.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 3500 psi (24.1 MPa) at 28 days.
2.
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40
3.
Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to
100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture
plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
4.
Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch (38-
mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.
5.
Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-
mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.
B.
Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 3500 psi (24.1 MPa) at 28 days.
2.
Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 470 lb/cu. yd. (279 kg/cu. m
3.
Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
4.
Air Content: 5.5percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch (38-
mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.
5.
Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-
mm)] nominal maximum aggregate size.
6.
Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
7.
a rate of [50 lb/cu. yd. (29.7 kg/cu. m)] <Insert weight>.
8.
Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's
recommended rate, but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd. (0.60 kg/cu. m)
C.
Building Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 3500 psi (24.1 MPa) at 28 days.
2.
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40
3.
Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to
100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture,
plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
4.
Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch (38-
mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.
5.
Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch (19-
mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.
2.11
FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A.
Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.12
CONCRETE MIXING
A.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1.
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32
deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 10
B.
Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.
1.
For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2
minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of
batch is released.
2.
For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15 seconds
for each additional 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m).
3.
Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project
identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount
of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FORMWORK
A.
Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure
can support such loads.
B.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C.
Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1.
Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces.
2.
Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces.
D.
Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide
top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
1.
Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
2.
Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F.
Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed
strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G.
Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork
is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to
prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous
locations.
H.
Chamfer, refer to details for finish of exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed
concrete.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 11
I.
Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
J.
Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and
other debris just before placing concrete.
K.
Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.
L.
Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.2
EMBEDDED ITEMS
A.
Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that
is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1.
Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with
tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges."
2.
Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face
of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and
other conditions.
3.
Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.
3.3
REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A.
General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does
not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50
deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be
damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be
maintained.
1.
Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports
weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day
design compressive strength.
2.
Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without
loosening or disturbing shores.
B.
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply
new form-release agent.
C.
When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete
surfaces unless approved by Architect.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 12
3.4
SHORES AND RESHORES
A.
Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of
shoring and reshoring.
1.
Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.
B.
In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to
distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will
induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.
C.
Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and
provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.
3.5
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
B.
Bituminous Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair bituminous vapor retarder according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Granular Course: Cover vapor retarder with fine-graded granular material, moisten, and
compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm) or minus 3/4
inch (19 mm).
1.
Place and compact a 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick layer of fine-graded granular material over
granular fill.
3.6
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1.
Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that
would reduce bond to concrete.
C.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack
weld crossing reinforcing bars.
1.
Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated.
D.
Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 13
E.
Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to
minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset
laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with
wire.
F.
Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair
coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten
epoxy-coated steel reinforcement.
G.
Zinc-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material
according to ASTM A 780. Use galvanized steel wire ties to fasten zinc-coated steel
reinforcement.
3.7
JOINTS
A.
General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B.
Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Architect.
1.
Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through
sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
2.
Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.
3.
Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset
joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder
intersection.
4.
Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and
girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
5.
Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls,
near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.
6.
Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
7.
Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened
or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C.
Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-
fourth of concrete thickness as follows:
1.
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints
after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2.
Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete
when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before
concrete develops random contraction cracks.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 14
D.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
other locations, as indicated.
1.
Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch
(25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated.
3.
Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.
E.
Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate
or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
3.8
WATERSTOPS
A.
Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a
continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed
waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated,
according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and
firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.
3.9
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless
approved by Architect.
C.
Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to
limitations of ACI 301.
1.
Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to
mixture.
D.
Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1.
Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures
and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
2.
Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 15
3.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6
inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of
concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration
to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and
other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
E.
Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1.
Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2.
Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3.
Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4.
Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
5.
Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured
surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb
slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
F.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1.
When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C)
for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the
temperature range required by ACI 301.
2.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete
on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
G.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
1.
Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled
mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water
equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to
cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2.
Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.10
FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A.
Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified
limits on formed-surface irregularities.
1.
Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view
B.
Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in
an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 16
defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface
irregularities.
1.
Apply to concrete surfaces to receive a rubbed finish
C.
Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where
indicated:
1.
Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete
surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform
color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing
process.
D.
“Sand” or Acid Etch Finish: Dayton Superior Products Topcast 05 surface retarder finish. Refer
to Manufacturer’s installation recommendations for vertical applications.
E.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3.11
FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A.
General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B.
Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere
as indicated.
1.
Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with
fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish
with Landscape Architect before application.
3.12
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A.
Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in
place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-
place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to
complete the Work.
B.
Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still
green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and
terminations slightly rounded.
C.
Equipment Bases and Foundations:
1.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
2.
Construct concrete bases 6 inches (150 mm) high unless otherwise indicated; and extend
base not less than 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 17
of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor
support.
3.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 3500 psi (24.1 MPa) at 28 days.
4.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete
base.
5.
For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base, and anchor into structural concrete substrate.
6.
Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings,
templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
7.
Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper
attachment to supported equipment.
3.13
CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatues. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather
protection during curing.
B.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and
during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after
placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C.
Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after
loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the
remainder of the curing period.
D.
Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
E.
Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a.
Water.
b.
Continuous water-fog spray.
c.
Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at
least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less
than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover
material and waterproof tape.
a.
Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
floor coverings.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 18
b.
Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
penetrating liquid floor treatments.
c.
Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining
cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with
bonding of floor covering used on Project.
3.
Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
a.
Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without
damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound
manufacturer.
3.14
JOINT FILLING
A.
Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joint clean and dry.
C.
Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in
formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.15
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A.
Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Landscape Architect.
Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Landscape Architect's
approval.
B.
Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one-part portland cement to two
and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water
for handling and placing.
C.
Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1.
Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than
1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19
mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water,
and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching
mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone
plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
2.
Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding
color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 19
before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher
than surrounding surface.
3.
Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Architect.
D.
Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
1.
Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or
that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
2.
After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3.
Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4.
Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with
clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm)
clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and
apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original
concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with
adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
5.
Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching
mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt,
and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to
match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E.
Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Landscape Architect's approval, using epoxy
adhesive and patching mortar.
F.
Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's
approval.
3.16
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and
inspections and to submit reports.
B.
Inspections:
1.
Steel reinforcement placement.
2.
Steel reinforcement welding.
3.
Headed bolts and studs.
4.
Verification of use of required design mixture.
5.
Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.
6.
Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 20
7.
Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and
slabs.
C.
Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1.
Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for
each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.
a.
When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests
for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
2.
Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform
additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
3.
Air
Content:
ASTM C 231,
pressure
method,
for
normal-weight
concrete;
ASTM C 173/C 173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test
for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture.
4.
Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is
40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test
for each composite sample.
5.
Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.
a.
Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
b.
Cast and field cure [two] sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
6.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured
specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.
a.
Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens
at 28 days.
b.
A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of
two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.
7.
When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-
cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures
for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
8.
Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength
and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by
more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).
9.
Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and
Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain
Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete
testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 21
strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking
strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
10.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may
be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of
concrete.
11.
Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency
may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with
ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.
12.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
13.
Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply
with the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION 033000
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213 - 1
SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Steel pipe and tube railings.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a
qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable
design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:
1.
Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
2.
Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength.
C.
Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1.
Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a.
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.
b.
Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
c.
Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2.
Infill of Guards:
a.
Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
(0.093 sq. m).
b.
Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
D.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1.
Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213 - 2
E.
Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.
2.
Railing brackets.
3.
Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
1.
Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails,
posts, and balusters.
2.
Fittings and brackets.
3.
Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including top rail,
post, handrail, and infill. Sample need not be full height.
a.
Show method of [finishing] [connecting] members at intersections.
E.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
B.
Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements.
C.
Welding certificates.
D.
Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
E.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213 - 3
B.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
C.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2.
AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
3.
AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
1.8
COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A.
Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
B.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
C.
Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support
railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1.
Steel Pipe and Tube Railings:
a.
Pisor Industries, Inc.
b.
Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies.
2.
Aluminum Pipe and Tube Railings:
a.
ATR Technologies, Inc.
b.
Blum, Julius & Co., Inc.
c.
Braun, J. G., Company; a division of the Wagner Companies.
d.
CraneVeyor Corp.
e.
Hollaender Manufacturing Company.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213 - 4
f.
Kee Industrial Products, Inc.
g.
Moultrie Manufacturing Company.
h.
Pisor Industries, Inc.
i.
Sterling Dula Architectural Products, Inc.; Div. of Kane Manufacturing.
j.
Superior Aluminum Products, Inc.
k.
Thompson Fabricating, LLC.
l.
Tri Tech, Inc.
m.
Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc.
n.
Tuttle Railing Systems; Div. of Tuttle Aluminum & Bronze, Inc.
o.
Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies.
3.
Stainless-Steel Pipe and Tube Railings:
a.
Blum, Julius & Co., Inc.
b.
Paragon Aquatics; Division of Pentair, Inc.
c.
Pisor Industries, Inc.
d.
Stainless Fabricators, Inc.
e.
Sterling Dula Architectural Products, Inc.; Div. of Kane Manufacturing.
f.
Tri Tech, Inc.
g.
Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc.
h.
Tuttle Railing Systems; Div. of Tuttle Aluminum & Bronze, Inc.
i.
Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies.
2.2
METALS, GENERAL
A.
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B.
Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
2.3
STEEL AND IRON
A.
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B.
Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.
C.
Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless
another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
1.
Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
D.
Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
E.
Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless
otherwise indicated.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213 - 5
F.
Perforated Metal: Cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, or hot-rolled steel sheet,
ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel Type B, See Details.
G.
Perforated Metal: Galvanized-steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating,
commercial steel Type B, See Details.
H.
Woven-Wire Mesh: See Details.
2.4
STAINLESS STEEL
A.
Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.
B.
Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 304.
C.
Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8 or CF 20
D.
Woven-Wire Mesh: See Details.
2.5
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide the following:
1.
Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.
2.
Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel
fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.
3.
Aluminum Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.
4.
Stainless-Steel Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.
B.
Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and
class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of
construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
C.
Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:
1.
Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching
them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching
them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard
fastening method for railings indicated.
3.
Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless
otherwise indicated.
D.
Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable
of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213 - 6
1.
Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.
Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy [Group 1
(A1)] [Group 2 (A4)] stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts,
ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).
2.6
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
1.
For aluminum and stainless-steel railings, provide type and alloy as recommended by
producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and
compatibility in fabricated items.
B.
Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
C.
Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.
D.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
E.
Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting,"
F.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
G.
Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion
cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching,
and grouting compound.
2.7
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to
support structural loads.
B.
Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213 - 7
C.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
D.
Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E.
Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
F.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
G.
Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
1.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3.
Remove flux immediately.
4.
At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
I.
Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.
Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
1.
Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is
manufacturer's standard splicing method.
J.
Form changes in direction as follows:
1.
As detailed.
2.
By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings].
3.
By flush bends or by inserting prefabricated flush-elbow fittings].
4.
By radius bends of radius indicated or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings of
radius indicated].
K.
Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain
cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or
otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
L.
Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
M.
Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends
of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.
N.
Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,
and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213 - 8
1.
At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-
resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural
supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
O.
Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry
work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
P.
For railing posts set in concrete, provide stainless-steel sleeves not less than 6 inches (150 mm)
long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) greater than outside dimensions of
post, with metal plate forming bottom closure.
Q.
For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from stainless-steel tube or pipe whose ID
is sized for a close fit with posts; limit movement of post without lateral load, measured at top,
to not more than one-fortieth of post height. Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to
resist being dislodged.
1.
Provide chain with eye, snap hook, and staple across gaps formed by removable railing
sections at locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal as railings.
R.
Perforated-Metal Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from perforated metal made from
galvanized steel
1.
Edge panels with U-shaped channels made from metal sheet, of same metal as perforated
metal and not less than 0.043 inch (1.1 mm) thick.
2.
Orient perforated metal with pattern as indicated on Drawings
S.
Woven-Wire Mesh Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from woven-wire mesh crimped into 1-
by-1/2-by-1/8-inch (25-by-13-by-3-mm) metal channel frames. Make wire mesh and frames
from same metal as railings in which they are installed.
1.
Orient wire mesh as indicated on Drawings
T.
Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of
open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.
2.8
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213 - 9
D.
Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of
railings.
2.9
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A.
Galvanized Railings:
1.
Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication.
2.
Hot-dip galvanize indicated steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication.
3.
Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.
4.
Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.
5.
Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint
adhesion.
6.
Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to
remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
B.
For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and
other ferrous components.
C.
Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings
of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.
D.
For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets,
fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or
masonry.
E.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-
SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
1.
Exterior Railings: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2.
Railings Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial
Blast Cleaning."
3.
Railings Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance
Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
4.
Other Railings: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
F.
Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1:
Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied
to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
1.
Shop prime uncoated railings with primers specified in Section 099113 "Exterior
Painting"
2.
Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.
G.
Shop-Painted Finish: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting."
1.
Color: As indicated on Materials Schedule
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213 - 10
2.10
STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A.
Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
B.
Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated,
free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.
C.
180-Grit Polished Finish: Oil-ground, uniform, directionally textured finish.
D.
320-Grit Polished Finish: Oil-ground, uniform, fine, directionally textured finish.
E.
Polished and Buffed Finish: Oil-ground, 180-grit finish followed by buffing.
F.
Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
G.
Dull Satin Finish: No. 6.
H.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter
and leave surfaces chemically clean.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify
that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate
reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B.
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in
location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
1.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or
other means without further cutting or fitting.
2.
Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m).
3.
Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel
with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5
mm in 3 m).
C.
Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout,
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
D.
Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213 - 11
E.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
3.3
RAILING CONNECTIONS
A.
Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing
components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored
to match finish of railings.
B.
Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components.
Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is
performed in the shop or in the field.
C.
Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than
required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2
inches (50 mm) beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and
locate joint within 6 inches (150 mm) of post.
3.4
ANCHORING POSTS
A.
Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been
inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic
grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material
manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches (125 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger than
OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill
annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring
cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written
instructions.
C.
Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, attached to post with set screws.
D.
Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by
conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:
1.
For aluminum pipe railings, attach posts using fittings designed and engineered for this
purpose.
2.
For stainless-steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to supporting surfaces.
3.
For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.
E.
Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete.
3.5
ATTACHING RAILINGS
A.
Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded to
railing ends or connected to railing ends using nonwelded connections.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213 - 12
B.
Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and [welded to
railing ends] [or] [connected to railing ends using nonwelded connections].
C.
Attach railings to wall with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance
from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not
indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.
1.
Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger
bolt.
2.
Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural
loads.
D.
Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
1.
For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or
lag bolts.
2.
For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3.
For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between
studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members.
4.
For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardant-treated wood
backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members.
5.
For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to
concealed steel reinforcements.
6.
For steel-framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or
through concealed steel reinforcements.
3.6
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Clean stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean
water.
B.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.
C.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting"
D.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.7
PROTECTION
A.
Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective
coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of
Substantial Completion.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213 - 13
END OF SECTION 055213
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 1
SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
exterior substrates:
1.
Concrete – Lagoon Barrier Rails
2.
CMU w Stucco – Lagoon Barrier Columns and Existing Walls
3.
Galvanized Metal – Guardrails and Infill Meshes
B.
See Architectural Specification for painting at Restrooms, Park Structures and Pavilion.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
B.
Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
C.
Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according
to ASTM D 523.
D.
Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
E.
Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F.
Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.
1.
Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 2
2.
Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3.
Label each coat of each Sample.
4.
Label each Sample for location and application area.
D.
Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1.
Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2.
Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified,
with the proposed product highlighted.
3.
VOC content.
1.5
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to
verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each paint system specified in Part 3.
a.
Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).
b.
Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2.
Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.
a.
If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of
additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
3.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
4.
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).
1.
Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2.
Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 3
1.8
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).
B.
Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following]
[provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
1.
Behr Process Corporation.
2.
Benjamin Moore & Co.
3.
Benjamin Moore & Co. (Canada).
4.
Bennette Paint Manufacturing Company, Inc.
5.
Betonel Ltd.
6.
BLP Mobile Paint Manufacturing.
7.
California Paints.
8.
Cloverdale Paint.
9.
Color Wheel Paints & Coatings.
10.
Columbia Paint & Coatings.
11.
Conco Paints.
12.
Coronado Paint.
13.
Davis Paint Company.
14.
Del Technical Coatings.
15.
Diamond Vogel Paints.
16.
Dunn-Edwards Corporation.
17.
Durant Performance Coatings.
18.
Duron, Inc.
19.
Envirocoatings Canada Inc.
20.
Euclid Chemical Company.
21.
Farrell-Calhoun.
22.
Frazee Paint.
23.
General Paint.
24.
Hallman Lindsay Paints.
25.
Hirshfield's, Inc.
26.
ICI Paints.
27.
ICI Paints (Canada).
28.
Insl-x.
29.
Kelly-Moore Paints.
30.
Kwal Paint.
31.
Life Paint Corp.
32.
M.A.B. Paints.
33.
Microblend Technologies Inc.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 4
34.
Miller Paint.
35.
Mills Paint.
36.
PARA Paints.
37.
Parex LaHabra Inc.
38.
Parker Paint Mfg. Co. Inc.
39.
PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
40.
Pratt & Lambert.
41.
Rodda Paint Co.
42.
Scott Paint.
43.
Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
44.
Sico, Inc.
45.
Vista Paint.
46.
Zinsser.
2.2
PAINT, GENERAL
A.
MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed
in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B.
Material Compatibility:
1.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C.
VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
D.
Colors: As indicated in a color materials schedule – LM001
2.3
BLOCK FILLERS
A.
Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior: MPI #4.
2.4
PRIMERS/SEALERS
A.
Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based:[ MPI #3.]
B.
Primer, Bonding, Water Based:[ MPI #17.]
C.
Primer, Bonding, Solvent Based:[ MPI #69.]
D.
Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in
paint system indicated.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 5
2.5
METAL PRIMERS
A.
Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive for Metal:[ MPI #79.]
B.
Primer, Alkyd, Quick Dry, for Metal:[ MPI #76.]
C.
Primer, Galvanized, Water Based:[ MPI #134.]
D.
Primer, Galvanized: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.
E.
Primer, Quick Dry, for Aluminum:[ MPI #95.]
2.6
WATER-BASED PAINTS
A.
Latex, Exterior Flat (Gloss Level 1):[ MPI #10.]
B.
Latex, Exterior Low Sheen (Gloss Level 3-4):[ MPI #15.]
C.
Latex, Exterior Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5):[ MPI #11.]
D.
Latex, Exterior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6:[ MPI #119.]
E.
Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based (Gloss Level 3):[ MPI #161.]
F.
Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5):[ MPI #163.]
G.
Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Gloss (Gloss Level 6):[ MPI #164.]
2.7
SOLVENT-BASED PAINTS
A.
Alkyd, Exterior Flat (Gloss Level 1):[ MPI #8.]
B.
Alkyd, Exterior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5):[ MPI #94.]
C.
Alkyd, Exterior Gloss (Gloss Level 6):[ MPI #9.]
D.
Alkyd, Quick Dry, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5):[ MPI #81.]
E.
Alkyd, Quick Dry, Gloss (Gloss Level 7):[ MPI #96.]
2.8
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1.
Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials.
Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If
paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at
Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.
2.
Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 6
3.
Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being
used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying
paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with
rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from
previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are
incompatible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1.
Concrete: 12 percent.
2.
Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3.
Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent.
C.
Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.
D.
Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
E.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
F.
Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.
Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"
applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B.
Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.
C.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 7
D.
Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do
not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture
content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's
written instructions.
F.
Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.
1.
SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."
2.
SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
3.
SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning."
4.
SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."
G.
Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop
paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with
SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
H.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by
mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of
subsequently applied paints.
I.
Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.
J.
Wood Substrates:
1.
Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer recommended
in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint system indicated.
2.
Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3.
Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4.
After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
K.
Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might
impair bond of paints to substrates.
3.3
APPLICATION
A.
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI
Manual."
1.
Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2.
Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final
installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.
3.
Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door
frames.
4.
Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 8
5.
Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
6.
Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed
or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B.
Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate
identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C.
If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
E.
Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety
and Security Work:
1.
Paint the following work where exposed to view:
a.
Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear.
b.
Uninsulated metal piping.
c.
Uninsulated plastic piping.
d.
Pipe hangers and supports.
e.
Metal conduit.
f.
Plastic conduit.
g.
Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1.
Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
2.
If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply
additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.5
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B.
After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 9
C.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
D.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
3.6
EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE – See materials schedule LM001 for color information.
A.
Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:
1.
Latex System:
a.
Prime Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
b.
Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based[, MPI #3].
c.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
d.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #10].
e.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4)[, MPI #15].
f.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #11].
g.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #119].
2.
Latex Aggregate/Latex System:
a.
Prime Coat: Textured coating, latex, flat[, MPI #42].
b.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #10].
d.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4)[, MPI #15].
e.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #11].
f.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #119].
g.
B.
CMU Substrates:
1.
Latex System:
a.
Prime Coat: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior[, MPI #4].
b.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #10].
d.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4)[, MPI #15].
e.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #11].
f.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #119].
2.
Latex over Alkali-Resistant Primer System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based[, MPI #3].
b.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #10].
d.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4)[, MPI #15].
e.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #11].
f.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #119].
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 10
C.
Steel Substrates:
1.
Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive for metal[, MPI #79].
b.
Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified.
c.
Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching
topcoat.
d.
Topcoat:
Light
industrial
coating,
exterior,
water
based
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #161].
e.
Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss
Level 5)[, MPI #163].
f.
Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, gloss (Gloss
Level 6)[, MPI #164].
2.
Alkyd System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anticorrosive for metal[, MPI #79].
b.
Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified.
c.
Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
d.
Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, flat (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #8].
e.
Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #94].
f.
Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #9].
3.
Quick-Drying Enamel System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal[, MPI #76].
b.
Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, quick dry, matching topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Alkyd, quick dry, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #81].
d.
Topcoat: Alkyd, quick dry, gloss (Gloss Level 7)[, MPI #96].
4.
Aluminum Paint System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive for metal[, MPI #79].
b.
Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified.
c.
Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint[, MPI #1].
d.
Topcoat: Aluminum paint[, MPI #1].
D.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1.
Latex System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based[, MPI #134].
b.
Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal[, as recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat
indicated].
c.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
d.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #10].
e.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4)[, MPI #15].
f.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #11].
g.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #119].
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 11
2.
Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based[, MPI #134].
b.
Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal, as recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat
indicated.
c.
Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching
topcoat.
d.
Topcoat:
Light
industrial
coating,
exterior,
water
based
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #161].
e.
Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss
Level 5)[, MPI #163].
f.
Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, gloss (Gloss
Level 6)[, MPI #164].
3.
Alkyd System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal, as recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat
indicated.
b.
Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, flat (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #8].
d.
Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #94].
e.
Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #9].
E.
Aluminum Substrates:
1.
Latex System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum[, MPI #95].
b.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #10].
d.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4)[, MPI #15].
e.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #11].
f.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #119].
2.
Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum[, MPI #95].
b.
Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching
topcoat.
c.
Topcoat:
Light
industrial
coating,
exterior,
water
based
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #161].
d.
Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss
Level 5)[, MPI #163].
e.
Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, gloss (Gloss
Level 6)[, MPI #164].
3.
Alkyd System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum[, MPI #95].
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 12
b.
Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, flat (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #8].
d.
Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #94].
e.
Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #9].
F.
Portland Cement Plaster Substrates:
1.
Latex System:
a.
Prime Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
b.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #10].
d.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4)[, MPI #15].
e.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #11].
f.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #119].
2.
Latex over Alkali-Resistant Primer System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based[, MPI #3].
b.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #10].
d.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4)[, MPI #15].
e.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #11].
f.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #119].
END OF SECTION 099113
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
SITE FURNISHINGS
129300 - 1
SECTION 129300 - SITE FURNISHINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Seating.
2.
Tables.
3.
Bike Racks.
4.
Trash Receptacles.
5.
Planter Pots.
6.
Bollards.
B.
Required Requirements:
1.
Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing pipe sleeves cast, installing
anchor bolts cast, and formed voids in concrete footings.
2.
Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavation for installing concrete footings.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS.
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory applied finishes.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, not less than 6-inch long linear
components and 4-inch square sheet components.
1.
Include full-size samples of moveable chairs (all types).
E.
Product Schedule: For site furnishings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
1.
Material Certificates: For site furnishings.
2.
Wood Preservative Treatment: Include certification by treating plant stating type of
preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and
compliance with applicable standards.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
SITE FURNISHINGS
129300 - 2
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Maintenance Data: For all site furnishings to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Bench replacement slats: No fewer than two full size units for each size indicated.
2.
Trash Receptacles Inner Containers: Five Full Size units for each size indicated.
3.
Anchors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SITE FURNISHINGS: SEE MATERIALS SCHEDULE LM100 FOR ALL PRODUCT
INFORMATION. THIS INCLUDES BENCHES, TRASH RECEPTACLES, PLANTER POTS,
BIKE RACKS, MOVABLE TABLES AND CHAIRS, UNLIT BOLLARDS AND OTHER
SITE FURNISHINGS AS DEPICTED ON DRAWINGS.
A.
Seating:
1.
Loll
a.
Adirondack Chair. Refer to LM100 Materials Schedule for finish and color.
2.
MMCITE
a.
Vera Solo-on Circular Bench. Refer to LM100 Materials Schedule for finish and
color.
3.
Landscape Forms
a.
Bravo Bistro. Refer to LM100 Materials Schedule for finish and color.
b.
Perisphere 59” backed bench. Refer to LM100 Materials Schedule for finish and
color.
c.
Perisphere 117” bench. Refer to LM100 Materials Schedule for finish and color.
d.
Perisphere 175” bench. Refer to LM100 Materials Schedule for finish and color.
e.
Harpo Chaise Lounge. Refer to LM100 Materials Schedule for finish and color.
B.
Tables
1.
Landscape Forms
a.
Bravo Bistro. Refer to LM100 Materials Schedule for finish and color.
b.
Take-Out. Refer to LM100 Materials Schedule for finish and color.
c.
Parc Centre Table – Square Chess. Refer to LM100 Materials Schedule for finish
and color.
2.
POPP
a.
Hero Ping Pong Table. Refer to LM100 Materials Schedule for finish and color.
b.
Installation Method: As indicated on Hardscape Detail Sheets.
C.
Bicycle Racks:
1.
Landscape Forms
a.
Ring. Refer to LM100 Materials Schedule for finish and color.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
SITE FURNISHINGS
129300 - 3
b.
Installation Method: As indicated on Hardscape Detail Sheets.
D.
Trash Receptacles:
1.
Forms + Surfaces
a.
Tonyo. Refer to LM100 Materials Schedule for finish and color.
b.
Installation Method: As indicated on Hardscape Detail Sheets.
c.
Capacity: Not less than 36 gal.
2.
MMCITE
a.
Valet. Refer to LM100 Materials Schedule for finish and color.
b.
Installation Method: As indicated on Hardscape Detail Sheets.
E.
Planter Pots:
1.
Landscape Forms
a.
Agave. Refer to LM100 Materials Schedule for finish and color.
b.
Installation Method: As indicated on Hardscape Detail Sheets.
2.
QCP
a.
California Round. Refer to LM100 Materials Schedule for finish and color.
b.
Installation Method: As indicated on Hardscape Detail Sheets.
F.
Drinking Fountains:
1.
Urban+
a.
CF200. Refer to LM100 Materials Schedule for finish and color.
b.
Installation Method: As indicated by manufacturer.
G.
Removable Bollard
1.
Reliance Foundry
a.
R-8464 Removable Bollard. Refer to LM100 Materials Schedule for finish and
color.
b.
Installation Method: As indicated on Hardscape Detail Sheets.
H.
Shade Umbrella
1.
Bahama
a.
Jumbrella. Refer to LM100 Materials Schedule for finish and color.
b.
Installation Method: As indicated on Hardscape Detail Sheets.
I.
Shade Structure and Swing
1.
Studio 431.
a.
Custom Swing Bench. Refer to LM100 Materials Schedule for finish and color.
b.
Installation Method: As indicated on Hardscape Detail Sheets.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
1.
Rolled or Cold-Finished Bars, Rods, and Wire: ASTM B 211.
2.
Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
3.
Structural Pipe and Tube: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
4.
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
5.
Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
SITE FURNISHINGS
129300 - 4
B.
Steel and Iron:
1.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 135/A 135M.
3.
Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500/A 500M.
4.
Mechanical Tubing: Cold-rolled, electric-resistance-welded carbon or alloy steel tubing
complying with ASTM A 513, or steel tubing fabricated from steel complying with
ASTM A 1011/A 1011M and complying with dimensional tolerances in ASTM A 500/A
500M; zinc coated internally and externally.
5.
Steel Sheet: Commercial steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
6.
Perforated Metal: From steel sheet not less than 0.090-inch (2.3-mm) nominal thickness;
7.
manufacturer's standard perforation pattern.
8.
Expanded Metal: Carbon-steel sheets deburred after expansion, and complying with
9.
ASTM F 1267.
10.
Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, grade as recommended by fabricator for
type of use intended.
11.
Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 200.
C.
Stainless Steel
1.
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A666.
2.
Pipe: Schedule 40 steel pipe complying with ASTM A 312/A 312M.
3.
Tubing: ASTM A 554.
D.
Wood: Surfaced smooth on four sides with eased edges; kiln dried, free of knots, solid stock of
species indicated.
1.
Wood Species: Manufacturer's standard.
2.
Certified Wood: Fabricate site furnishings with components produced from wood
obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with
FSC STD-01-001, “FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship.”
3.
Finish: Manufacturer’s recommendation.
E.
Fiberglass: Multiple laminations of glass-fiber-reinforced polyester resin with UV-light stable,
colorfast, nonfading, weather- and stain-resistant, colored polyester gel coat, and manufacturer's
standard finish.
F.
Plastic: Color impregnated, color and UV-light stabilized, and mold resistant.
1.
Polyethylene: Fabricated from virgin plastic HDPE resin.
2.
Recycled Content of Polyethylene: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-
consumer recycled content not less than 50 percent.
G.
Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, and Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant-coated
or noncorrodible materials; commercial quality, tamperproof, vandal and theft resistant,
concealed, recessed, and capped or plugged.
1.
Angle Anchors: For inconspicuously bolting legs of site furnishings to on-grade
substrate; extent as indicated.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
SITE FURNISHINGS
129300 - 5
H.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; recommended in writing by
manufacturer, for exterior applications.
1.
Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining,
hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at
Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound; resistant to
erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof
coating; recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.
I.
Galvanizing: Where indicated for steel and iron components, provide the following protective
zinc coating applied to components after fabrication:
1.
Zinc-Coated Tubing: External, zinc with organic overcoat, consisting of a minimum of
0.9 oz./sq.ft. (0.27 kg/sq. m) of zinc after welding, a chromate conversion coating, and a
clear, polymer film. Internal, same as external or consisting of 81 percent zinc pigmented
coating, not less than 0.3 mil (0.0076 mm) thick.
2.
Hot-Dip Galvanizing: According to ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 153/A 153M, or
ASTM A 924/A 924M.
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
Metal Components: Form to required shapes and sizes with true, consistent curves, lines, and
angles. Separate metals from dissimilar materials to prevent electrolytic action.
B.
Welded Connections: Weld connections continuously. Weld solid members with full-length,
full penetration welds and hollow members with full-circumference welds. At exposed
connections, finish surfaces smooth and blended, so no roughness or unevenness shows after
finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
C.
Pipes and Tubes: Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce
uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section
of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming
exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components.
D.
Preservative-Treated Wood Components: Complete fabrication of treated items before
treatment if possible. If cut after treatment, apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to
cut surfaces.
E.
Exposed Surfaces: Polished, sanded, or otherwise finished; all surfaces smooth, free of burrs,
barbs, splinters, and sharpness; all edges and ends rolled, rounded, or capped.
F.
Factory Assembly: Assemble components in the factory to greatest extent possible to minimize
field assembly. Clearly mark units for assembly in the field.
2.4
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
SITE FURNISHINGS
129300 - 6
2.5
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Baked-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer’s standard, baked, polyester, powder-coat
finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation,
including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
2.6
STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES
A.
Baked-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer’s standard, baked, polyester, powder-coat
finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation,
including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
B.
PVC Finish: Manufacturer’s standard, UV-light stabilized, mold-resistant, slip-resistant, matte-
textured, dipped or sprayed-on, PVC-plastisol finish, with flame retardant added; complying
with coating manufacturer's written instructions for pretreatment, application, and minimum dry
film thickness.
2.7
IRON FINISHES
A.
Baked-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer’s standard, baked, polyester, powder-coat
finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation,
including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
2.8
STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES
A.
Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
B.
Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.
1.
Run directional finishes with long dimensions of each piece.
2.
Directional Satin Finish: No 4.
3.
Dull Satin Finish: No. 6.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer’s written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements
are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
SITE FURNISHINGS
129300 - 7
B.
Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been
completed.
C.
Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored or positioned at locations
indicated on Drawings.
D.
Post Setting: Set cast-in support posts in concrete footing with smooth top, shaped to shed
water. Protect portion of posts above footing from concrete splatter. Verify that posts are set
plumb or at correct angle and are aligned and at correct height and spacing. Hold posts in
position during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured.
E.
Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core-drill holes for installing posts in concrete to
depth recommended in writing by manufacturer of site furnishings and 3/4 inch (19 mm) larger
than OD of post. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post
and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to
comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, with top smoothed and
shaped to shed water.
F.
Pipe Sleeves: Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After
posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material
manufacturer's written instructions, with top smoothed and shaped to shed water.
END OF SECTION 129300
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 1
SECTION 321313 – CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
exterior substrates:
1.
Concrete – Lagoon Barrier Rails
2.
CMU w Stucco – Lagoon Barrier Columns and Existing Walls
3.
Galvanized Metal – Guardrails and Infill Meshes
B.
See Architectural Specification for painting at Restrooms, Park Structures and Pavilion.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
B.
Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
C.
Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
D.
Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
E.
Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F.
Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.
1.
Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 2
2.
Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3.
Label each coat of each Sample.
4.
Label each Sample for location and application area.
D.
Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1.
Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2.
Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified,
with the proposed product highlighted.
3.
VOC content.
1.5
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to
verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each paint system specified in Part 3.
a.
Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).
b.
Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2.
Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.
a.
If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of
additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
3.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
4.
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).
1.
Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2.
Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 3
1.8
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).
B.
Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following]
[provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
1.
Behr Process Corporation.
2.
Benjamin Moore & Co.
3.
Benjamin Moore & Co. (Canada).
4.
Bennette Paint Manufacturing Company, Inc.
5.
Betonel Ltd.
6.
BLP Mobile Paint Manufacturing.
7.
California Paints.
8.
Cloverdale Paint.
9.
Color Wheel Paints & Coatings.
10.
Columbia Paint & Coatings.
11.
Conco Paints.
12.
Coronado Paint.
13.
Davis Paint Company.
14.
Del Technical Coatings.
15.
Diamond Vogel Paints.
16.
Dunn-Edwards Corporation.
17.
Durant Performance Coatings.
18.
Duron, Inc.
19.
Envirocoatings Canada Inc.
20.
Euclid Chemical Company.
21.
Farrell-Calhoun.
22.
Frazee Paint.
23.
General Paint.
24.
Hallman Lindsay Paints.
25.
Hirshfield's, Inc.
26.
ICI Paints.
27.
ICI Paints (Canada).
28.
Insl-x.
29.
Kelly-Moore Paints.
30.
Kwal Paint.
31.
Life Paint Corp.
32.
M.A.B. Paints.
33.
Microblend Technologies Inc.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 4
34.
Miller Paint.
35.
Mills Paint.
36.
PARA Paints.
37.
Parex LaHabra Inc.
38.
Parker Paint Mfg. Co. Inc.
39.
PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
40.
Pratt & Lambert.
41.
Rodda Paint Co.
42.
Scott Paint.
43.
Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
44.
Sico, Inc.
45.
Vista Paint.
46.
Zinsser.
2.2
PAINT, GENERAL
A.
MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed
in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B.
Material Compatibility:
1.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C.
VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Colors: As indicated in a color materials schedule – LM001
2.3
BLOCK FILLERS
A.
Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior: MPI #4.
2.4
PRIMERS/SEALERS
A.
Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: [ MPI #3.]
B.
Primer, Bonding, Water Based: [ MPI #17.]
C.
Primer, Bonding, Solvent Based: [ MPI #69.]
D.
Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in
paint system indicated.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 5
2.5
METAL PRIMERS
A.
Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive for Metal:[ MPI #79.]
B.
Primer, Alkyd, Quick Dry, for Metal:[ MPI #76.]
C.
Primer, Galvanized, Water Based:[ MPI #134.]
D.
Primer, galvanized: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.
E.
Primer, Quick Dry, for Aluminum: [ MPI #95.]
2.6
WATER-BASED PAINTS
A.
Latex, Exterior Flat (Gloss Level 1):[ MPI #10.]
B.
Latex, Exterior Low Sheen (Gloss Level 3-4):[ MPI #15.]
C.
Latex, Exterior Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5):[ MPI #11.]
D.
Latex, Exterior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6:[ MPI #119.]
E.
Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based (Gloss Level 3):[ MPI #161.]
F.
Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5):[ MPI #163.]
G.
Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Gloss (Gloss Level 6):[ MPI #164.]
2.7
SOLVENT-BASED PAINTS
A.
Alkyd, Exterior Flat (Gloss Level 1):[ MPI #8.]
B.
Alkyd, Exterior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5):[ MPI #94.]
C.
Alkyd, Exterior Gloss (Gloss Level 6):[ MPI #9.]
D.
Alkyd, Quick Dry, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5):[ MPI #81.]
E.
Alkyd, Quick Dry, Gloss (Gloss Level 7):[ MPI #96.]
2.8
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1.
Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials.
Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If
paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at
Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.
2.
Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 6
3.
Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being
used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying
paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with
rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from
previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are
incompatible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1.
Concrete: 12 percent.
2.
Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3.
Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent.
C.
Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.
D.
Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
E.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
F.
Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.
Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"
applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B.
Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.
After completing painting operations, workers skilled in the trades invoinvolvednstall
items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.
C.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 7
D.
Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do
not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content
or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written
instructions.
F.
Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.
1.
SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."
2.
SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
3.
SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning."
4.
SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."
G.
Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop
paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with
SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
H.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by
mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of
subsequently applied paints.
I.
Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.
J.
Wood Substrates:
1.
Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer recommended
in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint system indicated.
2.
Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3.
Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4.
After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
K.
Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might
impair bond of paints to substrates.
3.3
APPLICATION
A.
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI
Manual."
1.
Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2.
Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final
installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.
3.
Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door
frames.
4.
Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 8
5.
Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
6.
Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed
or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B.
Tint undercoats same color as topcoat but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate
identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C.
If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
E.
Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety
and Security Work:
1.
Paint the following work where exposed to view:
a.
Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear.
b.
Uninsulated metal piping.
c.
Uninsulated plastic piping.
d.
Pipe hangers and supports.
e.
Metal conduit.
f.
Plastic conduit.
g.
Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1.
Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
2.
If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply
additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.5
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B.
After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 9
C.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
D.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
3.6
EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE – See materials schedule LM001 for color information.
A.
Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:
1.
Latex System:
a.
Prime Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
b.
Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based[, MPI #3].
c.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
d.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #10].
e.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4)[, MPI #15].
f.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #11].
g.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #119].
2.
Latex Aggregate/Latex System:
a.
Prime Coat: Textured coating, latex, flat[, MPI #42].
b.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #10].
d.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4)[, MPI #15].
e.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #11].
f.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #119].
g.
B.
CMU Substrates:
1.
Latex System:
a.
Prime Coat: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior[, MPI #4].
b.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #10].
d.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4)[, MPI #15].
e.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #11].
f.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #119].
2.
Latex over Alkali-Resistant Primer System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based[, MPI #3].
b.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #10].
d.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4)[, MPI #15].
e.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #11].
f.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #119].
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 10
C.
Steel Substrates:
1.
Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive for metal[, MPI #79].
b.
Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified.
c.
Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching
topcoat.
d.
Topcoat:
Light
industrial
coating,
exterior,
water
based
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #161].
e.
Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss
Level 5)[, MPI #163].
f.
Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, gloss (Gloss
Level 6)[, MPI #164].
2.
Alkyd System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anticorrosive for metal[, MPI #79].
b.
Prime Coat Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified.
c.
Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
d.
Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, flat (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #8].
e.
Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #94].
f.
Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #9].
3.
Quick-Drying Enamel System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal[, MPI #76].
b.
Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, quick dry, matching topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Alkyd, quick dry, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #81].
d.
Topcoat: Alkyd, quick dry, gloss (Gloss Level 7)[, MPI #96].
4.
Aluminum Paint System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive for metal[, MPI #79].
b.
Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified.
c.
Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint[, MPI #1].
d.
Topcoat: Aluminum paint[, MPI #1].
D.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1.
Latex System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based[, MPI #134].
b.
Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal[, as recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat
indicated].
c.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
d.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #10].
e.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4)[, MPI #15].
f.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #11].
g.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #119].
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 11
2.
Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based[, MPI #134].
b.
Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal, as recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat
indicated.
c.
Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching
topcoat.
d.
Topcoat:
Light
industrial
coating,
exterior,
water
based
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #161].
e.
Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss
Level 5)[, MPI #163].
f.
Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, gloss (Gloss
Level 6)[, MPI #164].
3.
Alkyd System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal, as recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat
indicated.
b.
Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, flat (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #8].
d.
Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #94].
e.
Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #9].
E.
Aluminum Substrates:
1.
Latex System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum[, MPI #95].
b.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #10].
d.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4)[, MPI #15].
e.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #11].
f.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #119].
2.
Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum[, MPI #95].
b.
Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching
topcoat.
c.
Topcoat:
Light
industrial
coating,
exterior,
water
based
(Gloss
Level 3)[, MPI #161].
d.
Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss
Level 5)[, MPI #163].
e.
Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, gloss (Gloss
Level 6)[, MPI #164].
3.
Alkyd System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum[, MPI #95].
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 12
b.
Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, flat (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #8].
d.
Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #94].
e.
Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #9].
F.
Portland Cement Plaster Substrates:
1.
Latex System:
a.
Prime Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
b.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #10].
d.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4)[, MPI #15].
e.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #11].
f.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #119].
2.
Latex over Alkali-Resistant Primer System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based[, MPI #3].
b.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #10].
d.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (Gloss Level 3-4)[, MPI #15].
e.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5)[, MPI #11].
f.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #119].
END OF SECTION 099113
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
321316 - 1
SECTION 321316 - DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes colored concrete paving.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general building applications of concrete.
2.
Section 033300 "Architectural Concrete" for general building applications of specially
finished formed concrete.
3.
Section 003351 “Exposed Aggregate Concrete” for cast-in-place concrete paving finish.
4.
Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for cast-in-place concrete paving with other finishes,
curbs and gutters, pavement markings, and wheel stops.
5.
Section 321373 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants in expansion and
contraction joints within decorative concrete paving and in joints between decorative
concrete paving and asphalt paving or adjacent construction.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended
hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed color, pattern, or texture indicated.
C.
Other Action Submittals:
1.
Design Mixtures: For each decorative concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design
mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or
other circumstances warrant adjustments.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified installer, ready-mix concrete manufacturer and testing agency.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
321316 - 2
B.
Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer:
1.
Color Pigment Admixtures.
2.
Applied finish materials.
3.
Joint fillers.
C.
Material Test Reports: For each of the following:
1.
Aggregates.
D.
Field quality-control reports.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer of
decorative concrete paving systems.
B.
Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-
mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for
production facilities and equipment.
1.
Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities" (Quality Control Manual - Section 3, "Plant Certification
Checklist").
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for
testing indicated.
1.
Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.
D.
Source Limitations: Obtain decorative concrete paving products and each type or class of
cementitious material of the same brand from same manufacturer's plant, and obtain each
aggregate from single source.
E.
Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform material evaluation tests
and to design concrete mixtures.
F.
ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Build mockups of full-thickness sections of decorative concrete paving to demonstrate
typical joints; surface color, pattern, and texture; curing; and standard of workmanship.
2.
Build mockups of decorative concrete paving in the location and of the size indicated or,
if not indicated, build mockups where directed by Architect and not less than 96 inches
by 96 inches.
3.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
321316 - 3
4.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
H.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
Review methods and procedures related to decorative concrete paving, including but not
limited to, the following:
a.
Concrete mixture design.
b.
Quality control of concrete materials and decorative concrete paving construction
practices.
2.
Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with decorative concrete paving
to attend, including the following:
a.
Contractor's superintendent.
b.
Decorative concrete paving Installer.
c.
Owner’s Representative.
d.
Landscape Architect.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other
construction activities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FORMS
A.
Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type
materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces.
1.
Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves of a radius of 100 feet or less. Do not
use notched and bent forms.
B.
Forms for Textured Finish Concrete: Units of face design, size, arrangement, and configuration
indicated. Provide solid backing and form supports to ensure stability of textured form liners.
C.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
2.2
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled
content not less than 25 percent.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
321316 - 4
B.
Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from as-drawn steel
wire into flat sheets.
C.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed.
D.
Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed bars;
assembled with clips.
E.
Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, as drawn.
F.
Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 plain-steel bars. Cut bars true to length
with ends square and free of burrs.
G.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports
according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete
of greater compressive strength than concrete specified, and as follows:
1.
Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will
not support chair legs.
2.3
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source, throughout Project:
1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, gray portland cement Type II. Supplement with the
following:
B.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single
source with documented service-record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar
paving applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.
1.
Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal.
2.
Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C.
Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
D.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
E.
Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of
cementitious material.
1.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A, colored.
2.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D, colored.
3.
Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E.
F.
Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing
admixtures; color stable, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
321316 - 5
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
a.
Davis Colors.
1)
Kailua
2)
Cocoa
2.4
CURING AND SEALING MATERIALS
A.
Curing Paper: Nonstaining, waterproof paper, consisting of two layers of kraft paper cemented
together and reinforced with fiber, and complying with ASTM C 171.
B.
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
C.
Type I, Class B, manufactured for colored concrete.
1.
For integrally colored concrete, curing compound shall be pigmented type approved by
coloring admixture manufacturer.
2.5
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber in preformed strips.
B.
Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
C.
Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881/C 881M, two-component epoxy resin capable of
humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces; of class suitable for application temperature, of
grade complying with requirements, and of the following types:
1.
Type II, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.
D.
Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 4397, 1 mil thick, clear.
2.6
CONCRETE MIXTURES
A.
Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of
normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field
experience.
1.
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete
design mixtures for the trial batch method.
B.
Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:
1.
Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi.
2.
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.50.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
321316 - 6
C.
Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written
instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.
2.7
CONCRETE MIXING
A.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch
discharged and used in the Work.
1.
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from
1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and
delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for
dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.
B.
Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below decorative concrete paving to identify soft pockets
and areas of excess yielding.
1.
Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction.
Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).
2.
Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of [1/2
inch according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.
B.
Protect adjacent construction from discoloration and spillage during application of color
hardeners, release agents, stains, curing compounds, and sealers.
3.3
EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines,
grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can
remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B.
Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete
without damage.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
321316 - 7
3.4
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.
C.
Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during
concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.
D.
Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at
least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent
continuous laps in either direction.
E.
Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and
free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required
before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap to adjacent mats.
3.5
JOINTS
A.
General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with
faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to
centerline unless otherwise indicated.
1.
When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed
joints unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at
locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving
terminates at isolation joints.
1.
Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do
not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Butt Joints: Use epoxy bonding adhesive at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed
against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
3.
Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys
unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.
4.
Dowelled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated.
Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to
one side of joint.
C.
Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as
indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete
thickness, as follows:
1.
Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) wide joints into concrete
when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before
developing random contraction cracks.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
321316 - 8
2.
Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where
indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete
bonding to one side of joint.
D.
Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an
edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes.
Eliminate edging tool marks on concrete surfaces.
3.6
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation and items to be embedded
or cast-in.
B.
Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not
place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and
alignment.
C.
Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.
D.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh
concrete after testing.
E.
Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push
or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
F.
Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented
by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.
1.
Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an
internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side
forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate
with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels and joint devices.
G.
Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.
H.
Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform
surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further
disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.
I.
Cold-Weather Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that
could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 and the
following:
1.
When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat
water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less
than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.
J.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions
exist:
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
321316 - 9
1.
Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time
of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature,
provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using
liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2.
Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed
ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3.
Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.7
INTEGRALLY COLORED CONCRETE FINISH
A.
See Section 003351 – EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE
3.8
CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
B.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.
C.
Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
D.
Curing Compound: Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing. Apply uniformly
in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas that have been subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after
application. Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period.
1.
Cure integrally colored concrete with a pigmented curing compound.
E.
Scoring: Score decorative jointing in paving surfaces 1 inch deep with diamond blades to match
pattern indicated. Rinse until water is clear.
1.
Joint Width: 1/4 inch.
3.9
PAVING TOLERANCES
A.
Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:
1.
Elevation: 3/4 inch.
2.
Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch , minus 1/4 inch.
3.
Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Dowels: 1 inch.
4.
Vertical Alignment of Dowels: 1/4 inch.
5.
Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge:
6.
Joint Spacing: 3 inches.
7.
Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
321316 - 10
8.
Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.
3.10
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1.
Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 5000 sq. ft. or fraction
thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.
a.
When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests
for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
2.
Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform
additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
3.
Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not
less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.
4.
Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is
40 deg F and below and when it is 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite
sample.
5.
Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of
three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.
6.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one specimen at seven days and
two specimens at 28 days.
a.
A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two
specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days.
C.
Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive
compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no
compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500
psi.
D.
Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor
within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project
identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and
inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days,
concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break
for both 7- and 28-day tests.
E.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.
F.
Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when
test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements
have not been met, as directed by Architect.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
321316 - 11
G.
Decorative concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
H.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
I.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.11
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Remove and replace decorative concrete paving that is broken or damaged or does not comply
with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless
otherwise approved by Architect.
B.
Detailing: Grind concrete "squeeze" left from tool placement. Color ground areas with slurry of
color hardener mixed with water and bonding agent. Remove excess release agent with high-
velocity blower.
C.
Protect decorative concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14
days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as
possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
D.
Maintain decorative concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material
E.
Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion
inspections.
3.12
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING SCHEDULE
A.
See LM100 Materials Schedule for concrete paving color and finishes.:
END OF SECTION 321316
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
PLANTING IRRIGATION
328400 - 1
SECTION 321373 - CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Cold-applied joint sealants.
2.
Hot-applied joint sealants.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for constructing joints in concrete pavement.
1.3
PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A.
Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for
testing indicated below, Samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
1.
Use manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other specific
joint-preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint
sealants to joint substrates.
2.
Submit no fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates,
shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
3.
Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
4.
For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.
5.
Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint-preparation data
that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for
compatibility with and adhesion to joint substrates and other materials matching those
submitted.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B.
Pavement-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1.
Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
2.
Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3.
Joint-sealant formulation.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
PLANTING IRRIGATION
328400 - 2
4.
Joint-sealant color.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency.
B.
Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.
C.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for joint sealants.
D.
Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From joint-sealant manufacturer,
indicating the following:
1.
Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility with and adhesion to joint sealants.
2.
Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant from single source from single
manufacturer.
C.
Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.
1.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1.
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-
sealant manufacturer
2.
When joint substrates are wet.
3.
Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4.
Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
PLANTING IRRIGATION
328400 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
2.2
COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Single-Component, Nonsag, Silicone Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM D 5893, Type NS.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Crafco Inc., an ERGON company; RoadSaver Silicone.
b.
Dow Corning Corporation; 888.
c.
Pecora Corporation; 301 NS.
B.
Single-Component, Self-Leveling, Silicone Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM D 5893,
Type SL.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Crafco Inc., an ERGON company; RoadSaver Silicone SL.
b.
Dow Corning Corporation; 890-SL.
c.
Pecora Corporation; 300 SL.
C.
Multicomponent, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM C 920,
Type M, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-200.
2.3
HOT-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Hot-Applied, Single-Component Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM D 3406.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Crafco Inc., an ERGON company; Superseal 444/777.
B.
Hot-Applied, Single-Component Joint Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: ASTM D 6690,
Types I, II, and III.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
PLANTING IRRIGATION
328400 - 4
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; [Sealtight Hi-Spec] [Sealtight 3405].
b.
Right Pointe; D-3405 Hot Applied Sealant.
2.4
JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated
by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B.
Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness
and width required to control joint-sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and
fill remainder of joint opening under sealant.
2.5
PRIMERS
A.
Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-
sealant performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by
joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining
surfaces.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
PLANTING IRRIGATION
328400 - 5
3.3
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A.
General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Joint-Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of
joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C.
Install joint-sealant backings of kind indicated to support joint sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to
joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1.
Do not leave gaps between ends of joint-sealant backings.
2.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint-sealant backings.
3.
Remove absorbent joint-sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.
D.
Install joint sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same
time backings are installed:
1.
Place joint sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2.
Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3.
Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
E.
Tooling of Nonsag Joint Sealants: Immediately after joint-sealant application and before
skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to the following requirements to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint:
1.
Remove excess joint sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2.
Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do
not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
F.
Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions
unless otherwise indicated.
3.4
CLEANING
A.
Clean off excess joint sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses, by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and
of products in which joints occur.
3.5
PROTECTION
A.
Protect joint sealants, during and after curing period, from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants
are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such
protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
PLANTING IRRIGATION
328400 - 6
sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations in repaired areas are
indistinguishable from the original work.
3.6
PAVEMENT-JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A.
Joint-Sealant Application: Joints within cement concrete pavement
1.
Joint Location:
a.
Expansion and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete pavement.
b.
Contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
c.
Other joints as indicated.
2.
Silicone Joint Sealant for Concrete: Single component, nonsag Single component, self-
leveling
3.
Urethane Joint Sealant for Concrete: Multicomponent, pourable, traffic-grade
4.
Hot-Applied Joint Sealant for Concrete: Single component
B.
Joint-Sealant Application: Joints between cement concrete and asphalt pavement.
1.
Joint Location:
a.
Joints between concrete and asphalt pavement.
b.
Joints between concrete curbs and asphalt pavement.
c.
Other joints as indicated.
2.
Hot-Applied Joint Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: Single component
C.
Joint-Sealant Application: Joints within cement concrete pavement at Splash Pad.
1.
Joint Location:
a.
Expansion and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete pavement at splash pad.
b.
Contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs pavement at splash pad.
2.
Silicone Joint Sealant for Concrete: Single component, nonsag Single component, self-
leveling
END OF SECTION 321373
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
UNIT PAVING
321400 - 1
SECTION 321400 - UNIT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Samples for selecting unit pavers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
UNIT PAVERS
A.
Concrete Pavers: Solid, interlocking paving units, ASTM C 936/C 936M, made from normal-
weight aggregates.
1.
Ackerstone
a.
Thickness: 8cm min. 100 cm where indicated on LM100.
b.
Face Size and Shape: Refer to LM100.
c.
Chamfer: Micro
d.
Color: Refer to LM100.
2.
Wausau
a.
Thickness: 2-3/4”.
b.
Face Size and Shape: 24” x 24” Square.
c.
Ribbed.
d.
Color: Refer to LM100.
2.2
AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS
A.
Graded Aggregate for Base: Sound-crushed stone or gravel, ASTM D 448, Size No. 8.
B.
Sand for Leveling Course: ASTM C 33/C 33M, fine aggregate.
C.
Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing the No. 16
sieve and no more than 10 percent passing the No. 200 sieve.
D.
Geotextile: Woven or nonwoven polyester or polypropylene complying with AASHTO M 288.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Proof-roll prepared subgrade surface and correct deficiencies before installing unit pavers.
B.
Cut unit pavers with masonry saw or block splitter.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
UNIT PAVING
321400 - 2
C.
Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch unit-to-unit offset (lippage) nor 1/4 inch in 10 feet from
level or indicated slope.
3.2
AGGREGATE SETTING-BED PAVER INSTALLATION
A.
Place aggregate base and compact with plate vibrator.
B.
Place geotextile over compacted base course overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches.
C.
Place sand for leveling course to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 inches.
D.
Treat leveling base with soil sterilizer.
E.
Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch and a maximum of 1/8 inch. If pavers have
spacer bars, place pavers hand-tight against spacer bars.
F.
Vibrate pavers into leveling course with at least three passes of a low-amplitude plate vibrator
capable of a 3500- to 5000-lbf compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz.
G.
Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate
pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand.
H.
Repeat joint-filling process 30 days later.
END OF SECTION 321400
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
POROUS UNIT PAVING
321443 - 1
SECTION 321443 - POROUS UNIT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Samples for selecting unit pavers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS
A.
Concrete Grid Pavers: ASTM C 1319, made from normal-weight aggregates.
1.
Ackerstone.
2.
Thickness: 100cm.
2.2
AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS
A.
Graded Aggregate for Base: Sound-crushed stone or gravel, ASTM D 448 for Size No. 47.
B.
Sand for Leveling Course: ASTM C 33/C 33M, fine aggregate.
C.
Graded Aggregate for Porous Paver Fill: Sound-crushed stone or gravel complying with
ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8 or No. 9.
D.
Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, complying with AASHTO M 288.
1.
Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.
2.
Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Proof-roll prepared subgrade surface and correct deficiencies before installing unit pavers.
B.
Cut unit pavers with masonry saw or block splitter.
C.
Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch unit-to-unit offset (lippage) nor 1/4 inch in 10 feet from
level or indicated slope.
D.
Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
POROUS UNIT PAVING
321443 - 2
3.2
AGGREGATE SETTING-BED PAVER INSTALLATION
A.
Place aggregate base, compact with plate vibrator, and screed to depth indicated.
B.
Place drainage geotextile over compacted base course, overlapping ends and edges at least 12
inches.
C.
Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of [1 to 1-1/2 inches (25 to 38 mm)] [2 to 2-1/2
inches (50 to 64 mm)] [3 inches (76 mm)] <Insert dimension>.
D.
Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch and a maximum of 1/8 inch. If pavers have
spacer bars, place pavers hand-tight against spacer bars.
E.
Vibrate pavers into leveling course with at least three passes of a low-amplitude plate vibrator
capable of a 3500- to 5000-lbf compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz.
F.
Place graded aggregate fill immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Spread and
screed aggregate fill level with tops of pavers.
END OF SECTION 321443
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CRUSHED STONE PAVING
321540 - 1
SECTION 32 15 40 - CRUSHED STONE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Contract Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes requirements for demolition, earthwork, grading, furnishing, and
placement of crushed stone paving.
1.
Furnish and place crushed stone paving, bonded with fine aggregate, constructed on a
prepared underlying base course in accordance with these specifications and in
conformity with the dimensions, typical cross section, and the lines and grades shown on
the Contract Drawings. The locations where crushed stone paving will be used are
shown on the Contract Drawings.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C117 – Test Method for Materials Finer than No. 200 (75-um) Sieve in Mineral
Aggregates by Washing.
B.
ASTM C136 – Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
C.
ASTM D4318 – Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Material Analysis: Contractor shall provide copies of the following test data required by
ASTM:
1.
ASTM C136 - Sieve Analysis.
2.
ASTM C127 - Specific Gravity and Absorption.
3.
ASTM C131 - L.A. Abrasion.
B.
Samples: Provide a one (1) gallon sample of material for approval.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing
weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance
with state and federal laws if applicable.
B.
Bulk Materials:
1.
Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements,
or on existing turf areas, plant materials or within critical root zones.
2.
Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials,
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties,
water conveyance systems, or walkways.
3.
Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CRUSHED STONE PAVING
321540 - 2
C.
Rejection of material.
1.
Evidence of inadequate protection or improper handling or storage shall be cause for
rejection.
2.
Any product or material exhibiting signs of damage due to nonconformity to
specifications or due to delivery, storage or handling shall be rejected by the Project
Manager. Contractor shall be responsible for hauling off-site and disposing of according
to general conditions and codes of the governing jurisdiction.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental requirements: Work shall occur only when weather and soil conditions permit in
accordance with locally accepted practice.
B.
Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation
system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with proposed
crushed stone paving areas by field measurements before proceeding with work.
C.
Interruption of Existing Services or Utilities: Do not interrupt services or utilities to facilities
occupied by Owner or others.
D.
Existing Conditions:
1.
Utilities: Determine location of existing and proposed underground utilities. Perform
work in a manner to avoid damage. Hand excavate, as required.
2.
Excavation: Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon
by parties concerned.
E.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be
obtained.
1.7
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
General: Maintain Work in accordance with Division 01.
1.
Maintenance Period: Begin maintenance immediately after Work is completed.
Maintain areas until the end of the Warranty period.
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
See Division 01 Section “Warranty”.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CRUSHED STONE PAVING
A.
Type: Crushed granite stone or gravel. Shall be unused material free of shale, lay, friable
materials, organics and debris.
1.
Size Range: 1/4 inch Minus
2.
Color: See Materials Schedule LM001
3.
Acceptable Supplier: Rock Pros
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CRUSHED STONE PAVING
321540 - 3
2.2
SOIL STABILIZER
A.
Soil stabilizer or binder:
1.
Acceptable manufacturer: ROMEX® 1-844-529-2330
2.
Product: ROMEX® PROFI-DEKO Gravel Binder
3.
Color: Colorless when cured.
4.
Form: Liquid
B.
Construction Site Preparation: Prepare the foundation for expected traffic loads. Ensure the
substructure is water-permeable. Follow regulations and guides for paved stone surfaces. Ensure
the subsurface won't settle by using clear gravel and optional geogrid.
C.
Preparation: Ensure there is a water-permeable substrate. Tape off adjoining surfaces not to be
affected. Clean and dry aggregate before using PROFI-DEKO. NOTE: wet or dirty aggregate
will negatively affect the finished result!
D.
Cleaning if Required: Ensure stone is clean before use, dirty aggregate will negatively effect the
end result. Contact a ROMEX rep to determine the best way to clean your stone.
E.
Mixing: Follow the mixing ratio in the consumption table, typically for ¼” clean aggregate mix
approx. 150 - 160 lbs stone with each set of Profi Deko. Pour clean and dry gravel into the
mixer. Slowly add the two-component resin while mixing for at least 4 minutes.
F.
Application: Pour the mix onto the prepared surface. Disperse if necessary and level to at least
30 mm | 1 1/4” (depending on expected loads and substrate condition). Smoothen and level
using screeds, magnesium trowels and smoothing trowels. Smooth the surface, ensuring good
light compaction and avoiding impurities. Paint thinner or soap and water in a squirt bottle
should be applied periodically to the tools during installation to keep them clean. The mixer
should be periodically cleaned to prevent build-up on hot days, paint thinner and some clean
stone is a great way to keep the mixer clean every 1- 2 hours.
G.
Subsequent Treatment: Protect the freshly jointed surface from rain for 12-24 hours. Do not lay
the rain protection layer directly onto the surface, a raised cover must be utilized, if that is not
possible the project should not happen until the right conditions present themselves. For heavy-
use or commercial surfaces, ensure a minimum surface depth of 5 cm I 2” After hardening or
the following day, roll ROMEX® - PROFI-DEKO undiluted over the surface using a paintbrush
or roller for extra strength. A future topcoat may be needed depending on the surface use with
consumption of approx. 200-300 ml/m² | 0.04-0.06 lbs/sqft or around 150 sq ft/ full set of resin.
A top coat should be considered every 3 years depending on the use of the space and site
specifics.
H.
Important Notes: Test a sample surface if uncertain. Ensure washed gravel is completely clean
and dry to avoid loss of strength due to dust or dampness. Use ROMEX-approved aggregate and
call before you install.
2.3
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas where the Work of this Section will be performed for compliance with
requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance.
1.
Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout,
concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel,
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CRUSHED STONE PAVING
321540 - 4
paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within
the work area.
2.
Verify that final grades are completed in accordance with the drawings.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and approved
by Project Manager.
2.4
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Mock-up: Provide field constructed sample installation of crushed stone paving, and prepared
subgrade.
1.
Mock-up to be ten foot (10’) x ten foot (10’) and located where directed by Construction
Manager. Mock-up shall include proposed edge and banding, and surface stabilization if
specified.
2.
Project Manager shall review mock up within forty eight (48) hours of notification by the
contractor.
3.
Make necessary adjustments as directed by Project Manager.
4.
Obtain approval from Project Manager before proceeding with the Work.
5.
Retain and protect mock-up during construction as a standard for judging completed
crushed stone paving work. Do not remove or destroy mock-up until work is completed.
6.
Accepted and properly maintained sample installations may remain in completed work if
approved in writing by Project Manager.
7.
All work shall match accepted field mock-up.
2.5
PREPARATION
A.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, turf areas, existing
landscape areas, and trees from damage.
B.
Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of
C.
Install edging of type and in locations shown on drawings. Obtain acceptance of layout by
Project Manager before excavating or installing. Make minor adjustments as required.
2.6
PLACEMENT OF CRUSHED STONE PAVING
A.
Cut earthwork to width of trail/area to receive crusher fines paving to approximate depth section
as specified on the Contract Drawings. Remove, haul and dispose of excess material off site, or
use on-site with approval of Project Manager.
B.
Complete excavation required in sub-grade before fine grading and final compaction of sub-
grade is performed. Extend sub-grade compaction one foot (1’) beyond proposed edge of
crushed stone paving or as indicated on drawings.
1.
Where earth moving is required the sub-grade shall be compacted to ninety five percent
(95%) standard proctor within two percent (2%) of the optimum moisture.
2.
Keep areas being graded or compacted shaped and drained during construction. Ruts
greater than or equal to 1 inch deep in sub-grade shall be graded out and reshaped as
required, and re-compacted before crushed stone paving placement.
C.
Prior to placement of Crushed Stone Paving material, the sub-grade shall be proof rolled.
Where soft spots are detected, scarify subgrade beneath Crushed Stone Paving trail to a
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CRUSHED STONE PAVING
321540 - 5
minimum of six inch (6”) depth. Moisture treat and compact to a minimum ninety five percent
(95%) proctor density as determined by ASTM D698 or AASHTO T-99. Take moisture density
tests every two hundred fifty (250) lineal feet of trail or proof roll. Treat and compact sub-
grade, leaving it 5-inches below final grade for placement of Crushed Stone Paving. Compact
material and retest by proof rolling to achieve approval of Project Manager.
D.
Install crushed stone paving only after excavation and construction work which might injure it
have been completed, and after edging has been completely installed on the compacted sub-
grade. Install crushed stone paving, over compacted base course in areas indicated on plan.
E.
Spread crushed stone evenly to fifty percent (50%) of specified depth. Avoid segregation of
aggregate and contamination with lower courses or sub-grade.
F.
Compact to ninety five percent (95%) of maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557.
1.
Maintain surface course moisture content within plus/minus three percent (± 3%) of
optimum. Add water to quarry fines paving as required to achieve optimum moisture
content and a uniform, compacted surface conforming to the finish grades indicated.
2.
Compact areas inaccessible to rolling by mechanical tamping.
G.
Protect crushed stone paving from soil or other contaminates during and following installation.
H.
Spread and compact additional crushed stone paving to achieve the required minimum
compacted thickness. Compact per 3.3.F above.
2.7
PLACEMENT OF STABILIZED CRUSHED STONE PAVING
A.
Do not allow traffic on stabilized crushed stone paving for two days.
2.8
MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS:
A.
Crusher Fines Paving:
1.
Areas that do not compact, become eroded or are degraded in visual quality and/or
performance as determined by the Project Manager are to be removed and/or repaired.
Obtain approval of repair methods from Project Manager prior to affecting repairs.
B.
Stabilized Crusher Fines Paving:
1.
To repair, excavate damaged area leaving a minimum one inch depth of existing
stabilized crushed stone paving. Apply stabilized crusher fines to existing surface as
described above. Compact per 3.3.F above.
2.
Do not allow traffic on repaired stabilized crushed stone paving for two days or until
paving has fully cured.
2.9
CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A.
All areas shall be clean at the end of each workday.
B.
The contractor shall maintain protection during installation, curing, and maintenance periods.
1.
Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required protecting newly
installed Crushed Stone Paving areas from traffic, other trades, and trespassers. Maintain
fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove with approval
of Project Manager.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
CRUSHED STONE PAVING
321540 - 6
C.
Project completion: All debris, soil, trash, and excavated and/or stripped material resulting from
Crushed Stone Paving operations and unsuitable for or in excess of requirements for completing
work of this Section shall be disposed of off-site.
D.
Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. See Division 1. Treat, repair
or replace damaged work as required.
2.10
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Refer to Division 1 Section “Quality Assurance”.
END OF SECTION 32 15 40
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES
323119 - 1
SECTION 323119 - DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Decorative steel fences.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete"
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: For gates. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
1.
Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Samples: For each fence material and for each color specified.
1.
Provide Samples 12 inches in length for linear materials.
2.
Provide Samples 12 inches square for bar grating and sheet or plate materials.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Field quality-control reports.
B.
Product Test Reports: For decorative metallic-coated-steel tubular picket fences, including
finish, indicating compliance with referenced standard and other specified requirements.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
B.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate
aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES
323119 - 2
1.
Include 8’-0"
2.
length of fence complying with requirements.
3.
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Lightning-Protection System: Maximum grounding-resistance value of 25 ohms under normal
dry conditions.
2.2
DECORATIVE STEEL FENCES
A.
Decorative Steel Fences: Fences made from steel tubing, bars and shapes, hot-dip galvanized.
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product for approval by landscape architect.
B.
Posts: Square steel tubing.
1.
Line Posts: Per Details
2.
End and Corner Posts: Per Details
C.
Post Caps: Per Details
D.
Rails: Per Details
E.
Infill: Per Details
F.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel carriage bolts and tamperproof nuts.
G.
Fabrication: Assemble fences into sections by welding pickets to rails.
1.
Fabricate sections with clips welded to rails for field fastening to posts.
2.
Drill posts and clips for fasteners before finishing to maximum extent possible.
H.
Fabrication: Fabricate bar grating infill into sections of size indicated.
1.
Fabricate rails with clips welded to rails for field fastening to posts.
2.
Drill posts and bar grating for fasteners before finishing to maximum extent possible.
I.
Finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA Guideline 1, Finish #2 - completely sanded
joint, some undercutting and pinholes okay
J.
Galvanizing: For items other than hardware that are indicated to be galvanized, hot-dip
galvanize to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. For hardware items, hot-dip galvanize to
comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES
323119 - 3
1.
Hot-dip galvanize posts and rails.
2.
Hot-dip galvanize rail and picket assemblies after fabrication.
3.
Hot-dip galvanize bar grating infill after fabrication.
4.
Hot-dip galvanize custom-design rail and infill assemblies after fabrication.
K.
Finish for Bar Grating Infill: Powder coating.
L.
Finish for Steel Items: Primed Shop painted or High-performance coating.
M.
Finish for Metallic-Coated-Steel Items: High-performance coating
2.3
STEEL AND IRON
A.
Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B.
Bars (Pickets): Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010.
C.
Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.
D.
Bar Grating: NAAMM MBG 531.
1.
Bars: Hot-rolled steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel, Type B.
2.
Wire Rods: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M).
E.
Uncoated Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Structural Steel,
Grade 45 (Grade 310) or cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel,
Grade 50 (Grade 340).
F.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 50 (Grade 340), with
[G90 (Z275)] [G60 (Z180)] coating.
G.
Aluminum-Zinc, Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, structural quality, Grade 50
(Grade 340), with AZ60 (AZM180) coating.
H.
Castings: Either gray or malleable iron unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30.
2.
Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M.
2.4
COATING MATERIALS
A.
Shop Primers for Steel: Provide primers that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior
Painting."
B.
Shop Primer for Steel: Manufacturer's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-
inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
C.
Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer for Uncoated Steel: Complying with MPI #20 and compatible with
coating specified to be applied over it.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES
323119 - 4
D.
Epoxy Primer for Galvanized Steel: Epoxy primer recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturer.
E.
Epoxy Intermediate Coat for Uncoated Steel: Complying with MPI #77 and compatible with
primer and topcoat.
F.
Intermediate Coat for Uncoated Steel: Epoxy or polyurethane intermediate recommended in
writing by primer and topcoat manufacturer.
G.
Polyurethane Intermediate Coat and Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible with
undercoat.
2.5
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
1.
For aluminum, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be
welded and as required for strength and compatibility in fabricated items.
B.
Concrete: Normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete complying with requirements in
Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000
psi (20 MPa), 3-inch (75-mm) slump, and 1-inch (25-mm) maximum aggregate size.
C.
Nonshrink Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying
with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M and specifically recommended by manufacturer for exterior
applications.
2.6
GROUNDING MATERIALS
A.
Grounding Conductors: Bare, solid wire for No. 6 AWG and smaller; stranded wire for
No. 4 AWG and larger.
1.
Material above Finished Grade: Copper
2.
Material on or below Finished Grade: Copper.
3.
Bonding Jumpers: Braided copper tape, 1 inch (25 mm) wide, woven of No. 30 AWG
bare copper wire, terminated with copper ferrules.
B.
Grounding Connectors and Grounding Rods: Comply with UL 467.
1.
Connectors for Below-Grade Use: Exothermic-welded type.
2.
Grounding Rods: Copper-clad steel.
a.
Size: 5/8 by 96 inches (16 by 2440 mm).
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES
323119 - 5
2.7
STEEL FINISHES
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces according to SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal
Blast Cleaning
1.
After cleaning, apply a conversion coating compatible with the organic coating to be
applied over it.
B.
Powder Coating: Immediately after cleaning, apply two-coat finish consisting of epoxy primer
and TGIC polyester topcoat, with a minimum total dry film thickness of not less than 8 mils
(0.20 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Color and Gloss: As indicated by manufacturer's designations
C.
Primer Application: Apply zinc-rich epoxy primer immediately after cleaning, to provide a
minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm) per applied coat, to surfaces that are exposed
after assembly and installation, and to concealed surfaces.
D.
Shop-Painted Finish: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting."
E.
High-Performance Coating: Apply intermediate and polyurethane topcoats to prime-coated
surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions and with requirements in
SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of
Steel," for shop painting. Apply at spreading rates recommended by coating manufacturer.
1.
Match approved Samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove and refinish or recoat
work that does not comply with specified requirements.
2.8
METALLIC-COATED-STEEL FINISHES
A.
Galvanized Finish: Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
B.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and
other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a zinc-phosphate conversion coating suited to the
organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas,
and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
C.
Powder Coating: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply TGIC polyester powder-coat
finish, with a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).
1.
Color and Gloss: As indicated by manufacturer's designations
D.
Powder Coating: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply two-coat finish consisting of
zinc-rich epoxy prime coat and TGIC polyester topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of
2 mils (0.05 mm) for topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions to
achieve a minimum total dry film thickness of 4 mils (0.10 mm).
1.
Color and Gloss: As indicated by manufacturer's designations
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES
323119 - 6
E.
High-Performance Coating: Apply epoxy primer, polyurethane intermediate coat, and
polyurethane topcoat to prepared surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written
instructions and with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1:
Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Apply at spreading rates
recommended by coating manufacturer.
F.
Match approved Samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove and refinish or recoat work
that does not comply with specified requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install fences by setting posts as indicated and fastening rails and infill panels to posts. Peen
threads of bolts after assembly to prevent removal.
B.
Post Excavation: Excavate holes to a diameter of not less than 4 times post size and a depth of
not less than 24 inches plus 3 inches for each foot or fraction of a foot that fence height exceeds
4 feet.
C.
Post Setting: Set posts in concrete with mechanical anchors by mechanically driving into
soil] at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil.
1.
Posts Set in Concrete: Extend post to within 6 inches of specified excavation depth, but
not closer than 3 inches to bottom of concrete.
2.
Space posts uniformly per details.
D.
Install gates level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach hardware
using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate
where necessary.
END OF SECTION 323119
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
LANDSCAPE SYNTHETIC TURF
325200 - 1
SECTION 325200 – LANDSCAPE SYNTHETIC TURF
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Synthetic turf at play
1.2
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of synthetic turf, supply 12”x12” sample for approval.
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Maintenance Data: Include in maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SYNTHETIC TURF AT PLAY AREA
A.
Basis of Design Manufacturer: Artificial Grass superstore. 221 E. Willis Rd. Bldg A #2,
Chandler, AZ 82586
B.
Acceptable Product: Kid Play 60
2.2
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining turf rolls are not acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
correct and level finished grade, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
LANDSCAPE SYNTHETIC TURF
325200 - 2
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements
are indicated.
END OF SECTION 325200
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
PLANTING IRRIGATION
328400 - 1
SECTION 328400 - PLANTING IRRIGATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product data and Shop Drawings showing sprinkler layout and flow characteristics.
Include wiring diagrams.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design 100 percent water-coverage irrigation system for lawns and exterior plants indicated.
B.
Minimum System Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.2
PIPES AND FITTINGS
A.
Pipe Materials: PE, ASTM F 771; PE 3408 compound; SIDR 15.
1.
Insert Fittings: ASTM D 2609, nylon or propylene plastic.
B.
Pipe Materials: PVC pipe, ASTM D 2241, PVC 1120, SDR 26.
1.
Fittings: PVC plastic pipe fittings, ASTM D 2467, Schedule 80, socket type with
ASTM F 656 primer and ASTM D 2564 solvent cement.
2.3
VALVES
A.
Curb Valves:
1.
Description: Bronze body, ground-key plug or ball with wide tee head.
2.
Curb-Valve Casing: Similar to AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve casings.
B.
Plastic Ball Valves:
1.
Description: MSS SP-122, Full Port with socket or threaded ends.
C.
Bronze Gate Valves:
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
PLANTING IRRIGATION
328400 - 2
D.
Description: MSS SP-80, Type 2, solid bronze wedge; nonrising bronze stem; Class 125 with
integral seat, screw-in bonnet, and malleable-iron, bronze, or aluminum handwheel.
E.
Water Control Valves:
1.
Description: Cast- or ductile-iron body globe valve, AWWA C550 or FDA-approved
interior epoxy coating; or stainless-steel body.
F.
Bronze Automatic Control Valves:
1.
Description: Cast-bronze body, normally closed, diaphragm type with manual-flow
adjustment, and operated by 24-V ac solenoid.
G.
Plastic Automatic Control Valves:
1.
Description: Molded-plastic body, normally closed, diaphragm type with manual-flow
adjustment, and operated by 24-V ac solenoid.
H.
Automatic Drain Valves: Spring-loaded-ball type of corrosion-resistant construction and
designed to open for drainage if line pressure drops below 2-1/2 to 3 psig.
I.
Antisiphon, Pressure-Type Vacuum Breakers: Spring-loaded check valve.
J.
Pressure Regulators: Single-seated, direct-operated type with integral Y-pattern strainer.
2.4
QUICK COUPLERS
A.
Two-piece assembly, with coupler water-seal valve; removable upper body with spring-loaded
or weighted, rubber-covered cap; hose swivel with ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH threads for
garden hose on outlet; and operating key.
2.5
SPRINKLERS
A.
Metal, Surface Spray Sprinklers:
1.
Sprinklers: Brass housing; flush, surface, fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment.
B.
Plastic, Surface Spray Sprinklers:
1.
Sprinklers: Plastic housing; flush, surface, fixed pattern, with screw-type flow
adjustment.
C.
Metal, Exposed, Impact-Drive Rotary Sprinklers:
1.
Impact drive, full circle and part circle as indicated.
D.
Plastic, Exposed, Impact-Drive Rotary Sprinklers:
1.
Impact drive, full circle and part circle as indicated.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
PLANTING IRRIGATION
328400 - 3
E.
Plastic, Pop-up, Gear-Drive Rotary Sprinklers:
1.
Gear drive, full-circle and adjustable part-circle type.
F.
Metal, Surface, Pop-up Spray Sprinklers:
1.
Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment and stainless-steel spring.
G.
Plastic, Surface, Pop-up Spray Sprinklers:
1.
Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment and stainless-steel spring.
H.
Metal Shrub Sprinklers:
1.
Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment.
I.
Plastic Shrub Sprinklers:
1.
Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment.
2.6
DRIP IRRIGATION SPECIALTIES
A.
Emitters: Plastic body with multiple outlets, to deliver flow at approximately 20 psig of 0.5 gph,
1 gph, and 2 gph
B.
Drip Tubes: Flexible PVC, NPS ½, NPS ¾, and NPS 1.
2.7
CONTROLLERS
A.
Description: Automatic low-voltage control system made for control of irrigation-system
automatic control valves. Controller operates on 120-V ac; provides 24-V ac power to control
valves.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
B.
Lay piping on solid subbase, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions. Slope circuit
piping down toward drain valve a minimum of 0.4 percent.
C.
Drain Pockets: Excavate to sizes indicated. Backfill with cleaned gravel or crushed stone to 12
inches below grade. Cover with asphalt-saturated felt and excavated material.
D.
Minimum Cover: Provide the following minimum cover over top of buried piping:
1.
Pressure Piping: Refer to City of Chandler details.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/2025
PLANTING IRRIGATION
328400 - 4
2.
Circuit Piping: Refer to City of Chandler details.
3.
Drain Piping: Refer to City of Chandler details.
4.
Sleeves: Refer to City of Chandler details .
5.
Install water meters in meter boxes, with shutoff valve on meter inlet. Include valve on
meter outlet and valved bypass around meter.
E.
Install pressure regulators with shutoff valve and strainer on inlet and pressure gage on outlet.
Install shutoff valve on outlet and valved bypass.
F.
Sprinklers: Flush circuit piping with full head of water and install sprinklers after hydrostatic
test is completed.
END OF SECTION 328400
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
SOIL PREPARATION
329113 - 1
SECTION 329113 - SOIL PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section includes the composition and mixing of planting soils cited in other Sections.
B.
Definitions:
1.
Planting Soil: Existing soil modified as specified with soil amendments and perhaps
fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.
2.
Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the
top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
C.
Submittals: Product data and bulk Samples for each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PLANTING SOILS SPECIFIED BY COMPOSITION
A.
Planting-Soil Type: Refer to subsurface materials sheets.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium
carbonate equivalent; in the form of ground dolomitic limestone, calcitic limestone, or mollusk
shells.
B.
Sulfur: Containing a minimum of 90 percent elemental sulfur, with a minimum of 99 percent
passing a No. 6 sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through a No. 40 sieve.
C.
Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent
sulfur.
D.
Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, ground with 90 percent passing a
No. 50 sieve.
E.
Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, free of toxic materials, and according to
ASTM C 33.
F.
Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter produced by composting and
bearing U.S. Composting Council's "Seal of Testing Assurance."
G.
Wood Derivatives: Shredded and composted, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood
waste; of uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
SOIL PREPARATION
329113 - 2
H.
Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of [20] [33] [50] percent
available phosphoric acid.
I.
Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of
fast- and slow-release nitrogen; composition resulting in 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4
percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight:
J.
Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble
nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium; composed of 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent
phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Place planting soil and fertilizers according to requirements in other Specification Sections.
B.
Unacceptable Materials: Clean soil of concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement,
plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing
compound, acid, and other extraneous materials that are harmful to plant growth. Clean soil to
contain a maximum of 8 percent by dry weight of stones, roots, plants, sod, clay lumps, and
pockets of coarse sand.
3.2
PLACING AND MIXING PLANTING SOIL
A.
Mixing: Blend unamended soil with amendments to produce full depth of required planting soil
with uniform texture. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy,
or excessively wet.
B.
Compaction: Compact each blended lift of planting soil to 75 to 82 percent of maximum
Standard Proctor density according to ASTM D 698 unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Finish Grading: Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly
fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.
D.
Protect areas of in-place soil from additional compaction, disturbance, and contamination.
E.
Remove surplus soil and waste material off Owner's property unless otherwise indicated.
END OF SECTION 329113
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
TURF AND GRASSES
329200 - 1
SECTION 329200 - TURF AND GRASSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Sodding.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling.
2.
Section 328400 "Planting Irrigation " for turf irrigation.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
B.
Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand
with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.
C.
Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a
pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and
molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator,
defoliant, or desiccant.
D.
Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants,
animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents
(gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
E.
Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface
soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and
perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.
F.
Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface
of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
G.
Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic
matter and soil organisms.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
TURF AND GRASSES
329200 - 2
H.
Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In
undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as urban
environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.
Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application
instructions specific to this Project.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture stating
the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and
percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of
packaging.
1.
Certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass sod. Include identification of source and
name and telephone number of supplier.
B.
Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer.
C.
Product Certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers, from manufacturer.
D.
Material Test Reports: For standardized ASTM D 5268 topsoil, existing native surface topsoil,
existing in-place surface soil and imported or manufactured topsoil.
E.
Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for
maintenance of turf during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required initial
maintenance periods.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful
turf establishment.
1.
Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the
Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association.
2.
Experience: Five years' experience in turf installation in addition to requirements in
Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."
3.
Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time
supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.
4.
Personnel Certifications: Installer's field supervisor have certification in one of the
following categories from the Professional Landcare Network:
a.
Certified Landscape Technician - Exterior, with installation, maintenance,
irrigation specialty area(s), designated CLT-Exterior.
b.
Certified Turfgrass Professional, designated CTP.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
TURF AND GRASSES
329200 - 3
c.
Certified Turfgrass Professional of Cool Season Lawns, designated CTP-CSL.
5.
Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's
place of business to Project site.
6.
Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.
B.
Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory or university laboratory,
recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.
C.
Soil Analysis: or each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a
qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt,
and clay content; cation exchange capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH;
and mineral and plant-nutrient content of the soil.
1.
Testing methods and written recommendations shall comply with USDA's Handbook
No. 60.
2.
The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling, with depth, location, and number
of samples to be taken per instructions from Architect. A minimum of [three] <Insert
number> representative samples shall be taken from varied locations for each soil to be
used or amended for planting purposes.
3.
Report suitability of tested soil for turf growth.
a.
Based on the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil
amendments to be incorporated. State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft.
(92.9 sq. m) or volume per cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for nitrogen, phosphorus, and
potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting
soil suitable for healthy, viable plants.
b.
Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals, including aluminum,
arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If such
problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective
action.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for
Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation"
in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod in time for planting
within 24 hours of harvesting. Protect sod from breakage and drying.
B.
Bulk Materials:
1.
Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements,
or on existing turf areas or plants.
2.
Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials,
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties,
water conveyance systems, or walkways.
3.
Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers and soil amendments with appropriate
certificates.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
TURF AND GRASSES
329200 - 4
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Planting Restrictions: Coordinate planting periods with initial maintenance periods to provide
required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be
obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
1.9
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape
Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is
planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but for not less than the following
periods:
1.
Sodded Turf: 60 days from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TURFGRASS SOD
A.
Sod Quality: Certified Number 1 Quality/Premium, including limitations on thatch, weeds,
diseases, nematodes, and insects, complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials"
in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density,
color, and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when
planted.
B.
Species: Tahoma 31 Bermuda Grass.
2.2
INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
A.
Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium
carbonate equivalent and as follows:
1.
Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a
minimum of 75 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve.
2.
Provide lime in form of ground dolomitic limestone.
B.
Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, and with a
minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 (3.35-mm) sieve and a maximum of 10 percent
passing through No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve.
C.
Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent
sulfur.
D.
Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
TURF AND GRASSES
329200 - 5
E.
Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.
F.
Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent
passing through No. 50 (0.30-mm) sieve.
G.
Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials.
H.
Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water
absorption capacity by weight.
I.
Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight.
2.3
ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
A.
Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture
content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch (25-mm) sieve; soluble
salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of
substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:
1.
Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight.
2.
Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or
source-separated or compostable mixed solid waste.
B.
Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or of granular
texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.
C.
Muck Peat: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat, finely divided or
of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water-absorbing capacity of 1100
to 2000 percent.
D.
Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of
uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.
E.
Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by
volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks,
soil, weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth.
2.4
FERTILIZERS
A.
Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 1 percent nitrogen and
10 percent phosphoric acid.
B.
Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available
phosphoric acid.
C.
Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of
fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea
formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
TURF AND GRASSES
329200 - 6
1.
Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) of actual nitrogen, 4 percent
phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.
2.
Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil
reports from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.
D.
Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble
nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:
1.
Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by
weight.
2.
Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil
reports from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.
2.5
PLANTING SOILS
A.
Planting Soil: Existing, in-place surface soil. Verify suitability of existing surface soil to
produce viable planting soil. Remove stones, roots, plants, sod, clods, clay lumps, pockets of
coarse sand, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, and
other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Mix surface soil with the following soil
amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil:
1.
Ratio of Loose Compost to Surface Soil by Volume: 1:4
2.
Weight of Sulfur per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): 5 lbs.
3.
Weight of Agricultural Gypsum per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): 5 lbs.
4.
Weight of Ammonium phosphate per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): 5 lbs.
B.
Planting Soil: Imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain topsoil
displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least
4 inches (100 mm) deep; do not obtain from agricultural land.
1.
Additional Properties of Imported Topsoil or Manufactured Topsoil: Screened and free
of stones 1 inch (25 mm) or larger in any dimension; free of roots, plants, sod, clods, clay
lumps, pockets of coarse sand, paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or
chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner,
turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant
growth; free of obnoxious weeds and invasive plants including quackgrass, Johnsongrass,
poison ivy, nutsedge, nimblewill, Canada thistle, bindweed, bentgrass, wild garlic,
ground ivy, perennial sorrel, and bromegrass; not infested with nematodes, grubs, other
pests, pest eggs, or other undesirable organisms and disease-causing plant pathogens;
friable and with sufficient structure to give good tilth and aeration. Continuous, air-filled,
pore-space content on a volume/volume basis shall be at least 15 percent when moisture
is present at field capacity. Soil shall have a field capacity of at least 15 percent on a dry
weight basis.
2.
Mix imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil with the following soil amendments[ and
fertilizers] in the following quantities to produce planting soil:
a.
Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4
b.
Weight of Sulfur per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): 5 lbs.
c.
Weight of Agricultural Gypsum per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): 5 lbs.
d.
Weight of Ammonium phosphate per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): <Insert weight>.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
TURF AND GRASSES
329200 - 7
2.6
PESTICIDES
A.
General: Pesticide, registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as
required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless
authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling the
germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch
layer.
C.
Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth
that has already germinated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
performance.
1.
Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout,
concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel,
paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within
a planting area.
2.
Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions.
3.
Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil
moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.
4.
Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C.
If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting
area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting
soil.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and
plantings from damage caused by planting operations.
1.
Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them.
B.
Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of
soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
3.3
TURF AREA PREPARATION
A.
Limit turf subgrade preparation to areas to be planted.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
TURF AND GRASSES
329200 - 8
B.
Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 8 inches (200 mm).
Remove stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and
other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
1.
Apply Gypsum, Sulfur, and Ammonium Phosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before
loosening.
2.
Thoroughly blend planting soil off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil
amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil.
a.
Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few
days.
b.
Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer.
3.
Spread planting soil to a depth of 6 inches (150 mm) minimum but not less than required
to meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting
soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.
a.
Spread approximately 1/2 the thickness of planting soil over loosened subgrade.
Mix thoroughly into top 4 inches (100 mm) of subgrade. Spread remainder of
planting soil.
b.
Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.
4.
Remove stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and
other extraneous matter.
5.
Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's
property.
C.
Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly
fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finish elevation. Roll and rake,
remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can
be planted in the immediate future.
D.
Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry
before planting. Do not create muddy soil.
E.
Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded
or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.
3.4
PREPARATION FOR GRASS-PAVING MATERIALS
A.
Reduce subgrade elevation soil to allow for thickness of grass-paving system. Grade planting
areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade so that
installed paving is within plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finish elevation. Roll and rake,
remove ridges, and fill depressions.
B.
Install base course and sand course as recommended by paving-material manufacturer for site
conditions; comply with details shown on Drawings. Compact according to paving-material
manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Install paving mat and fasten according to paving-material manufacturer's written instructions.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
TURF AND GRASSES
329200 - 9
D.
Before planting, fill cells of paving mat with planting soil and compact according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Moisten prepared area before planting if surface is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to
dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.
3.5
SODDING
A.
Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or
muddy.
B.
Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch
or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to
subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade,
eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor
cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass.
1.
Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3.
2.
Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs or steel staples spaced as
recommended by sod manufacturer but not less than 2 anchors per sod strip to prevent
slippage.
C.
Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after
planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth
of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) below sod.
3.6
TURF MAINTENANCE
A.
Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and
performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and
replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials
and installation the same as those used in the original installation.
1.
Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes.
Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.
2.
Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease.
Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of
pesticides and reduce hazards.
B.
Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf-watering equipment to convey
water from sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches (100 mm).
1.
Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or
mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly
planted areas.
2.
Water turf with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch (25 mm) per week unless rainfall
precipitation is adequate.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
TURF AND GRASSES
329200 - 10
C.
Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified
height without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass-leaf
growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over
and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings
to maintain the following grass height:
1.
Mow bermudagrass to a height of 1 inch (13 to 25 mm).
D.
Turf Postfertilization: Apply fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry.
1.
Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9
sq. m) to turf area.
3.7
SATISFACTORY TURF
A.
Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Landscape Architect:
1.
Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-
colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and
surface irregularities.
B.
Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue
maintenance until turf is satisfactory.
3.8
PESTICIDE APPLICATION
A.
Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations.
Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify
Owner before each application is performed.
B.
Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply only as necessary to treat
already-germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.9
CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A.
Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of
vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.
B.
Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted
areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and
remove after plantings are established.
3.10
Remove nondegradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.
END OF SECTION 329200
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
PLANTS
329300 - 1
SECTION 329300 - PLANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Plants
2.
Planting Soils
3.
Tree Stabilization
4.
Mulches
5.
Landscape Edings
6.
Tree Grates
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 01 56 39 “Temporary Tree and Plant Protection” for prote4cting, trimming,
pruning, repairing, and replacing existing trees to remain that interfere with, or are
affected by, execution of the Work.
2.
Section 12 93 00 “Site Furnishings” for exterior unit planters.
3.
Section 31 10 00 “Site Clearing” for protection of existing trees and plantings, topsoil
stripping and stockpiling, and site clearing.
4.
Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling, and rough grading and for
subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backfill materials.
5.
Section 334600 "Subdrainage" for below-grade drainage of landscaped areas, paved
areas, and wall perimeters.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.
B.
Bare-Root Stock: Plants with a well-branched, fibrous-root system developed by transplanting
or root pruning, with soil or growing medium removed, and with not less than minimum root
spread according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.
C.
Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants grown in a container, with a
removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root
mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.
D.
Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
PLANTS
329300 - 2
E.
Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand
with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.
F.
Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a
pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and
molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator,
defoliant, or desiccant.
G.
Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants,
animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents
(gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
H.
Planting Area: Areas to be planted.
I.
Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface
soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and
perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.
J.
Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs,
vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation.
K.
Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the
stem or trunk broadens to form roots, the area of transition between the root system and the
stem or trunk.
L.
Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top
surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
M.
Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile and typified by the lack of organic
matter and soil organisms.
N.
Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In
undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban
environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils.
1.
Plant Materials: Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for plant materials.
2.
Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application
instructions specific to the Project.
3.
Plant Photographs: Include color photographs in digital format of each required species
and size of plant material as it will be furnished to the Project. Take photographs from an
angle depicting true size and condition of the typical plant to be furnished. Include a scale
rod or other measuring device in each photograph. For species where more than 20 plants
are required, include a minimum of three photographs showing the average plant, the best
quality plant, and the worst quality plant to be furnished. Identify each photograph with
the full scientific name of the plant, plant size, and name of the growing nursery.
4.
Samples for Verification: For each of the following:
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
PLANTS
329300 - 3
a.
Organic Compost Mulch: 1-quart (1-liter) volume of each organic mulch required;
in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of
weight and source of mulch. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to
be furnished; provide an accurate representation of color, texture, and organic
makeup.
b.
Mineral Mulch: 5 lb. (2.5 kg) of each mineral mulch required, in sealed plastic
bags labeled with source of mulch. Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to
be delivered and installed on the site; provide an accurate indication of color,
texture, and makeup of the material.
c.
e. Root Barrier: Width of panel by 12 inches (300 mm)
1.5
INFORMATION SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer. Include list of similar projects completed
by Installer demonstrating Installer's capabilities and experience. Include project names,
addresses, and year completed, and include names and addresses of owners' contact persons.
B.
Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and complying
with the following:
1.
Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products.
2.
Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods
established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.
3.
Material Test Reports: For existing native surface topsoil and imported or manufactured
topsoil.
4.
Retain first paragraph below if Owner's personnel will provide maintenance after plants
are established and if Contractor's recommendations will be sought.
5.
Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for
maintenance of plants during a calendar year. Submit before start of required
maintenance periods
6.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful
establishment of plants.
1.
Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the
Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association.
2.
Experience: Five years' experience in landscape installation in addition to requirements in
Section 014000 "Quality Requirements.”
3.
Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time
supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.
4.
Personnel Certifications: Installer's field supervisor shall have certification in all of the
following categories from the Professional Landcare Network:
a.
Certified Landscape Technician - Exterior, with installation, maintenance, and
irrigation specialty area(s), designated CLT-Exterior.
b.
Certified Landscape Technician - Interior, designated CLT-Interior.
c.
Certified Ornamental Landscape Professional, designated COLP.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
PLANTS
329300 - 4
B.
Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent or university laboratory, recognized by
the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing
indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.
C.
Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a
and clay content; cation exchange capacity; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-
nutrient content of the soil.
1.
Testing methods and written recommendations shall comply with USDA's Handbook No.
60.
2.
The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling; with depth, location, and number
of samples to be taken per instructions from Architect. A minimum of three
representative samples shall be taken from varied locations for each soil to be used or
amended for planting purposes.
3.
Report suitability of tested soil for plant growth.
a.
Based upon the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil
amendments to be incorporated. State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft.
(92.9 sq. m) or volume per cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for nitrogen, phosphorus, and
potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting
soil suitable for healthy, viable plants.
b.
Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals, including aluminum,
arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If such
problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective
action.
D.
Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable
requirements in ANSI Z60.1.
1.
Selection of plants purchased under allowances will be made by Architect, who will tag
plants at their place of growth before they are prepared for transplanting.
E.
Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain required sizes.
1.
Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position.
Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for field-grown stock and
container grown stock. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not
measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take caliper measurements 6 inches (150 mm) above
the root flare for trees up to 4-inch (100-mm) caliper size, and 12 inches (300 mm) above
the root flare for larger sizes.
2.
Other Plants: Measure with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position.
F.
Plant Material Observation: Architect may observe plant material either at place of growth or at
site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, cultivar, size,
and quality. Architect retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of
balls and root systems, pests, disease symptoms, injuries, and latent defects and to reject
unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees
or shrubs immediately from Project site.
1.
Notify Architect of sources of planting materials 30 days in advance of delivery to site.
G.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
PLANTS
329300 - 5
1.7
DEVLIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing
weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance
with state and federal laws if applicable.
B.
Bulk Materials:
1.
Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements,
or on existing turf areas or plants.
2.
Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials,
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties,
water conveyance systems, or walkways.
3.
Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers and soil amendments with appropriate
certificates.
C.
Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from
sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not
bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide
protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery
and handling.
D.
Handle planting stock by root ball.
E.
Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If
planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate
aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep
roots moist.
1.
Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other
acceptable material.
2.
Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.
3.
Water root systems of plants stored on-site deeply and thoroughly with a fine-mist spray.
Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not overly-wet
condition.
1.8
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation
system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new
plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work.
B.
Interruption of Existing Services or Utilities: Do not interrupt services or utilities to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary services or utilities according to requirements indicated:
1.
Notify Construction Manager no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed
interruption of each service or utility.
2.
Do not proceed with interruption of services or utilities without Construction Manager's
written permission.
3.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
PLANTS
329300 - 6
obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to
manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.
C.
Retain paragraph below if there are turf areas (lawns) or revise if contrary to planting schedule.
D.
Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grades
are established and before planting turf areas unless otherwise indicated.
1.
When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas, protect turf areas,
and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations.
1.9
WARRANTY
A.
A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in
materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of
adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond
Contractor's control.
b.
Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over.
c.
Faulty performance of tree stabilization, edgings, and tree grates.
d.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
2.
Warranty Periods from Date of Substantial Completion:
a.
Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months.
b.
Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 6 months.
c.
Annuals: 3 months.
3.
Include the following remedial actions as a minimum:
a.
Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the
succeeding planting season.
b.
Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at
end of warranty period.
c.
A limit of one replacement of each plant will be required except for losses or
replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.
d.
Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for
replaced plant material.
1.10
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
A. Initial Maintenance Service for Trees and Shrubs: Provide maintenance by skilled employees
of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after
plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but
for not less than maintenance period below.
1.
1. Maintenance Period: 90 days from date of Substantial Completion.
B.
B. Initial Maintenance Service for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Provide maintenance by
skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance
immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and
well established but for not less than maintenance period below.
1.
Maintenance Period: 90 days from date of Substantial Completion.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
PLANTS
329300 - 7
C.
C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly
(or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is
concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future
renewal options.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PLANT MATERIALS
A.
General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form,
shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings
and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or
when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald,
injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.
1.
Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight vertical branches where bark is
squeezed between two branches or between branch and trunk ("included bark"); crossing
trunks; cut-off limbs more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter; or with stem girdling roots
will be rejected.
2.
Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands, from an
established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1 for types
and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Architect, with a
proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.
C.
Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which
shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting.
D.
Labeling: Label each plant of each variety, size, and caliper with a securely attached,
waterproof tag bearing legible designation of common name and full scientific name, including
genus and species. Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar, if applicable for the
plant as shown on Drawings.
E.
If formal arrangements or consecutive order of plants is shown on Drawings, select stock for
uniform height and spread, and number the labels to assure symmetry in planting.
2.2
FERTILIZERS AND MULCHES
A.
Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip type, long-lasting, slow-release, commercial-grade
planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria, converting
nutrients into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots.
1.
Size: [5-gram] [10-gram] [21-gram] <Insert size> tablets.
2.
Nutrient Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent
potassium, by weight plus micronutrients.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
PLANTS
329300 - 8
B.
Mineral Mulch: Hard, durable stone, washed free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign
substances, of following type, size range, and color:
1.
Size Range: Refer to LM100 for size of all crushed stone and decomposed granite.
2.
Color: Refer to LM100 for color of all crushed stone and decomposed granite.
2.3
PLANTING SOILS
A.
Planting Soil: Existing, native surface topsoil formed under natural conditions with the duff
layer retained during excavation process and stockpiled on-site. Verify suitability of native
surface topsoil to produce viable planting soil. Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay
lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
1.
Supplement with imported planting soil when quantities are insufficient
2.
Mix existing, native surface topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in
the following quantities to produce planting soil
a.
Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: [1:4].
b.
Ratio of Loose Wood Derivatives to Topsoil by Volume: 1:5.
c.
Weight of Sulfur per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): 5 lbs.
d.
Weight of Agricultural Gypsum per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): 5 lbs.
e.
Weight of Ammonium phosphate per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sw. m): 5 lbs
B.
Planting Soil: Existing, in-place surface soil. Verify suitability of existing surface soil to
produce viable planting soil. Remove stones, roots, plants, sod, clods, clay lumps, pockets of
coarse sand, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, and
other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Mix surface soil with the following soil
amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil
1.
Ratio of Loose Compost to Surface Soil by Volume: 1:4.
2.
Ratio of Loose Wood Derivatives to Surface Soil by Volume: 1:5.
3.
Weight of Sulfur per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): 5 lbs.
4.
Weight of Agricultural Gypsum per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): 5 lbs.
5.
Weight of Ammonium phosphate per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): 5 lbs
C.
Planting Soil: Imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain topsoil
displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least
4 inches (100 mm) deep; do not obtain from agricultural land.
1.
Additional Properties of Imported Topsoil or Manufactured Topsoil: Screened and free of
stones 1 inch (25 mm) or larger in any dimension; free of roots, plants, sod, clods, clay
lumps, pockets of coarse sand, paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or
chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner,
turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant
growth; free of obnoxious weeds and invasive plants including quackgrass, Johnsongrass,
poison ivy, nutsedge, nimblewill, Canada thistle, bindweed, bentgrass, wild garlic,
ground ivy, perennial sorrel, and bromegrass; not infested with nematodes; grubs; or
other pests, pest eggs, or other undesirable organisms and disease-causing plant
pathogens; friable and with sufficient structure to give good tilth and aeration.
Continuous, air-filled pore space content on a volume/volume basis shall be at least 15
percent when moisture is present at field capacity. Soil shall have a field capacity of at
least 15 percent on a dry weight basis.
2.
Mix imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil with the following soil amendments and
fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil:
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
PLANTS
329300 - 9
a.
Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4.
b.
Ratio of Loose Wood Derivatives to Topsoil by Volume: 1:5
c.
Weight of Sulfur per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): 5 lbs.
d.
d. Weight of Agricultural Gypsum per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): 5 lbs.
e.
e. Weight of Ammonium phosphate per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): 5 lbs.
D.
Structural Planting Soil
2.4
TREE GRATES
A.
Tree Grates and Frames: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 35 (Class 250) or better, gray-iron castings
of shape, pattern, and size indicated
1.
Shape and Size: As Indicated on Details.
2.
Finish: As Indicated on Details.
3.
Color: As Indicated on Details.
2.5
PESTICIDES
A.
General: Pesticide registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as
required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless
authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling the
germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch
layer.
C.
Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth
that has already germinated.
2.6
TREE STAKING
2.7
LANDSCAPE EDINGS
A.
Mortar Set Edge Pavers, Per Details.
B.
Steel Edge, Per Details.
2.8
MISCELLANEOUS
A.
Root Barrier: Black, molded, modular panels manufactured with 50 percent recycled
polyethylene plastic with ultraviolet inhibitors, 85 mils (2.2 mm) thick, with vertical root
deflecting ribs protruding 3/4 inch(19 mm) out from panel, and each panel 24 inches (610 mm)
wide.
1.
Manufacturer: Deep Root. info@deeproot.com 415 781 9700 (or equal)
2.
Product: UB 36-2 (or equal)
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
PLANTS
329300 - 10
B.
Antidesiccant Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees
and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas to receive plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting
installation and performance.
1.
Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout,
concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel,
paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within
a planting area.
2.
Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions.
3.
Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil
moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.
4.
Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C.
If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting
area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting
soil.
3.2
3.2 PREPARATION
A.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing
plants from damage caused by planting operations.
B.
Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of
soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
C.
Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations,
outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Architect's acceptance of layout
before excavating or planting. Make minor adjustments as required.
D.
Lay out plants at locations directed by Architect. Stake locations of individual trees and shrubs
and outline areas for multiple plantings.
E.
Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over
trunks (before wrapping), branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging,
handling, and transportation.
1.
If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery
before moving and again two weeks after planting.
F.
Wrap trees and shrubs with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to
protect from wind and other damage during digging, handling, and transportation.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
PLANTS
329300 - 11
3.3
3.3 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT
A.
A. Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 9 inches (200 mm). Remove
stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other
extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
1.
Apply Sulfur, Gypsum, and Ammonium Phosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before
loosening.
2.
Thoroughly blend planting soil, soil amendments and fertilizer.
a.
Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few
days.
b.
Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer.
3.
Spread planting soil to a depth of 9 inches (150 mm) but not less than required to meet
finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen,
muddy, or excessively wet.
B.
Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly
fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.
C.
Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded
or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.
3.4
3.4 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS
A.
Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-
degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom
leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away
from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to
prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.
1.
Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for container-grown stock.
2.
Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the
bottom of the root ball.
3.
If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct level
and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling.
4.
Maintain required angles of repose of adjacent materials as shown on the Drawings. Do
not excavate subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or
existing improvements.
5.
Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours.
6.
Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected when unattended by Installer's
personnel.
7.
Retain subparagraph below if applicable.
8.
If drain tile is shown on Drawings or required under planting areas, excavate to top of
porous backfill over tile.
B.
Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as planting soil.
C.
Obstructions: Notify Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs
are encountered in excavations.
D.
Drainage: Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention
in tree or shrub planting pits.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
PLANTS
329300 - 12
E.
Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs.
3.5
3.5 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PLANTING
A.
Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. If
root flare is not visible, remove soIl in a level manner from the root ball to where the top-most
root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare, verify that root ball still
meets size requirements.
B.
Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not
break.
C.
Set container-grown stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch
(25 mm)above adjacent finish grades.
1.
Use planting soil for backfill.
2.
2. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.
3.
3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air
pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before
placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.
4.
Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled; in
amounts recommended in soil reports from soil-testing laboratory. Place tablets beside
the root ball about 1 inch (25 mm) from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the
hole.
5.
Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.
D.
Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape.
E.
When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the
surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the
surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball.
3.6
3.6 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING
A.
Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape.
B.
Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines as directed by Architect.
C.
Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural
and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders;
remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural
character.
D.
Do not apply pruning paint to wounds.
3.7
3.7 ROOT-BARRIER INSTALLATION
A.
Install root barrier where trees are planted within 10 feet from utility lines and as shown on
Drawings.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
PLANTS
329300 - 13
B.
Align root barrier vertically and run it linearly along and adjacent to the paving or other
hardscape elements to be protected from invasive roots.
C.
Install root barrier continuously for a distance of 60 inches 1500 mm in each direction from the
tree trunk, for a total distance of 10 feet (3 m) per tree. If trees are spaced closer, use a single
continuous piece of root barrier.
1.
Position top of root barrier flush with finish grade
2.
Overlap root barrier a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) at joints.
3.
Do not distort or bend root barrier during construction activities.
4.
Do not install root barrier surrounding the root ball of tree.
3.8
PLANTING IN PLANTERS
A.
Place a layer of drainage gravel at least 4 inches (100 mm) thick in bottom of planter. Cover
bottom with filter fabric and wrap filter fabric 6 inches (150 mm) up on all sides. Duct tape
along the entire top edge of the filter fabric, to secure the filter fabric against the sides during
the soil-filling process.
B.
Fill planter with planting soil. Place soil in lightly compacted layers to an elevation of 2 inches
(50.8 mm) below top of planter, allowing natural settlement.
3.9
GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING
A.
Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines as indicated in
even rows with triangular spacing.
B.
Use planting soil for backfill.
C.
Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots.
D.
For rooted cutting plants supplied in flats, plant each in a manner that will minimally disturb the
root system but to a depth not less than two nodes.
E.
Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around
plants to hold water.
F.
Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.
G.
Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery
from transplanting shock.
3.10
PLANT AREA MULCHING
A.
Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated.
1.
Mineral Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 3-inch (75-mm) average thickness of mineral
mulch over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades.
Do not place mulch within 3 inches (75 mm) of trunks or stems.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
PLANTS
329300 - 14
2.
Wood Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 4-inch (150-mm) average thickness of wood
mulch over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades.
Do not place mulch within 3 inches (75 mm) of trunks or stems.
3.11
PLANT MAINTENANCE
A.
Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring
planting saucers, adjusting and repairing tree-stabilization devices, resetting to proper grades or
vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable
plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease.
B.
Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes.
Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.
C.
Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and
pathogens or disease. Use integrated past management practices whenever possible to minimize
the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing
off foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents.
3.12
3.12 PESTICIDE APPLICATION
A.
A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance
with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate
applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before
each application is performed.
B.
Pre-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply to tree, shrub, and ground-cover
areas in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not apply to seeded
areas.
C.
Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply only as necessary to treat
already germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.13
3.13 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A.
During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly
condition.
B.
Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and
trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace
damaged plantings.
C.
After installation and before Substantial Completion, remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie
tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site.
AJ Chandler Park
9/18/25
PLANTS
329300 - 15
3.14
3.14 DISPOSAL
A.
Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and
debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 329300
CA2402.201
DR AJ CHANDLER PARK
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
90% SUBMITTAL
BID ITEMS
001 - 1
SECTION 340
CONCRETE CURB, GUTTER, SIDEWALK, CURB RAMPS,
DRIVEWAY AND ALLEY ENTRANCE
MAG Specification as written.
City of Chandler Supplemental Specification as written.
END OF SECTION 340
CA2402.201
DR AJ CHANDLER PARK
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
90% SUBMITTAL
BID ITEMS
001 - 1
SECTION 345
ADJUSTING FRAMES, COVER, AND VALVE BOXES
MAG Specification as written.
City of Chandler Supplemental Specification as written.
END OF SECTION 345
CA2402.201
DR AJ CHANDLER PARK
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
90% SUBMITTAL
BID ITEMS
001 - 1
SECTION 350
REMOVAL OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS
350.1
DESCRIPTION:
Replace with the following:
The work shall consist of removal and disposal of various existing improvements, such as asphalt
pavement, structures, pipes, conduits, concrete curbs and gutters, concrete sidewalk, concrete
pads, and other items necessary for the accomplishment of the improvement.
END OF SECTION 350
CA2402.201
DR AJ CHANDLER PARK
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
90% SUBMITTAL
BID ITEMS
001 - 1
SECTION 505
CONCRETE STRUCTURES
MAG Specification as written.
END OF SECTION 505
CA2402.201
DR AJ CHANDLER PARK
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
90% SUBMITTAL
BID ITEMS
001 - 1
SECTION 601
TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION
MAG Specification as written.
City of Chandler Supplemental Specification as written.
END OF SECTION 601
CA2402.201
DR AJ CHANDLER PARK
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
90% SUBMITTAL
BID ITEMS
001 - 1
SECTION 610
WATER LINE CONSTRUCTION
City of Chandler Supplemental Specification as written.
610.16
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
Add the following:
(XX)
3 PVC Water Line: Measurement of and payment for
water line shall be by the
linear foot item furnished and installed, including fittings.
(XX)
PVC water line shall be by the
linear foot item furnished and installed, including fittings and temporary cap.
(XX)
PVC
PVC water line shall be by the
linear foot item furnished and installed, including fittings and temporary cap.
END OF SECTION 610
CA2402.201
DR AJ CHANDLER PARK
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
90% SUBMITTAL
BID ITEMS
001 - 1
SECTION 615
SANITARY SEWER LINE CONSTRUCTION
615.17
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
Add the following:
(XX)
shall be by the linear foot item furnished and installed, including fittings.
(XX)
6
Line: Measurement of and payment for 6
shall be by the linear foot item furnished and installed, including fittings.
(XX)
6
: Measurement of and payment for 6
shall be by for
each item furnished and installed, including electronic ball markers.
Replace the following:
(C)
Sanitary Sewer Cleanout:
Measurement of and payment for sewer cleanout shall be by for each item furnished and
installed, including pipe, fittings, and frame and cover as called for on the plans and in
accordance with the standard details.
END OF SECTION 615
CA2402.201
DR AJ CHANDLER PARK
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
90% SUBMITTAL
BID ITEMS
001 - 1
SECTION 618
STORM DRAIN CONSTRUCTION
MAG Specification as written.
END OF SECTION 618
EXHIBIT D
Project Name: Dr. A.J. Chandler Park Renovation Phase 1
Page D-1
Project No.: CA2402.401
Rev. 1/16/2024
ACCEPTED GMP/PRICE PROPOSAL
COST BREAKDOWN
Dr. A.J. Chandler Park - 90% GMP - Final
Est. Date:
11/12/2025
Division
Estimate
Item
TOTALS
#
- Description/Scope Of Work
Refer.
Qty.
U/M
Unit Price
01 30 Design & Engineering
19.
Reproduction Costs - Plans/Specifications
Gen Requirements
1
ls
2,500.00
2,500.00
01 30
Subtotal
2,500.00
01 40 Permits/Develop. Fees/Utility Company Charges
1.
ADEQ Dust Control Permit
Gen Requirements
1
ls
4,000.00
4,000.00
2.
SWPPP Notice of Intent & Review
Gen Requirements
1
ls
1,000.00
1,000.00
3.
Water Meter Fee - By Owner
Gen Requirements
By Owner
By Owner
01 40
Subtotal
5,000.00
01 70 Construction Cleanup
1.
General Clean Up
Gen Requirements
1,460
hrs
35.00
51,100.00
01 70
Subtotal
51,100.00
02 21 Survey & Staking
1.
Construction Field Staking & Willmeng Layout
Gen Requirements
1.00
ls
75,000.00
75,000.00
2.
Misc Ped Routing & Traffic Control
Gen Requirements
14.00
mos
3,500.00
49,000.00
3.
Construction Water Buy
Gen Requirements
5,500
mg
8.00
44,000.00
4.
Drone - Site
Gen Requirements
150
hrs
150.00
22,500.00
02 21
Subtotal
190,500.00
02 30 Materials Testing
1.
Material Testing
Gen Requirements
1
ls
65,000.00
65,000.00
2.
Special Inspections
Gen Requirements
1
ls
10,000.00
10,000.00
02 30
Subtotal
75,000.00
02 40 Demolition
1.
1 & 29 Demo - Curb, Curb/Gutter
Demo
2,125
lf
4.00
8,500.00
2.
2, 3, 5 & 33 Demo - Sidewalks, Ramp, Concrete Pads
Demo
6,362
sf
2.00
12,724.00
3.
4 Demo - Fountain Structure
Demo
623
sf
8.00
4,984.00
4.
6 Demo - Pavers
Demo
27,015
sf
1.00
27,015.00
5.
7 & 30 Demo - Light Pole/Base & Decorative Lights (Salvage)
Demo
42
ea
250.00
10,500.00
6.
8 Demo - Large Boulders
Demo
16
ea
250.00
4,000.00
7.
9 Demo - Striping
Demo
9,547
lf
0.25
2,386.75
8.
10 Demo - Trench Drain
Demo
549
lf
7.00
3,843.00
9.
11 Demo - Planter Pot
Demo
4
ea
500.00
2,000.00
10.
12 Demo - Remove Catch Basin
Demo
1
ea
100.00
100.00
11.
13 Demo - Retaining Wall
Demo
844
lf
5.00
4,220.00
12.
14 Demo - Feature Seat Walls
Demo
2,197
sf
3.00
6,591.00
13.
15 Demo - Signage
Demo
11
ea
500.00
5,500.00
14.
16 Demo - Waste Receptacles
Demo
13
ea
50.00
650.00
15.
17 Demo - Bollards
Demo
17
ea
100.00
1,700.00
16.
18 Demo - Buildings
Demo
2,616
sf
10.00
26,160.00
17.
19 Demo - Salvage Backflow Preventer
Demo
4
ea
300.00
1,200.00
18.
20 Demo - Fountain and associated piping
Demo
1,055
sf
5.00
5,275.00
19.
21 Demo - Shade Structures
Demo
7,896
sf
4.00
31,584.00
20.
22 Demo - Tower Structure
Demo
2
ea
7,400.00
14,800.00
21.
23 Demo - Remove and Salvage Water Bollard
Demo
4
ea
350.00
1,400.00
22.
24 Demo - Pump & Fountain Equipment
Demo
3
ea
500.00
1,500.00
23.
25 Demo - Demo Sewer line Cleanouts
Demo
3
ea
250.00
750.00
24.
26 Demo - Stairs/Hardscape
Demo
244
sf
3.00
732.00
25.
27 Demo - Remove and Salvage Parking Pavers
Demo
In Pavers
In Pavers
26.
28 Demo - Demo Sump Structure
Demo
1
ea
500.00
500.00
27.
35 - Demo - Remove Junction Box
Demo
24
ea
50.00
1,200.00
28.
36 - Demo - Remove Elec. Cabinet
Demo
2
ea
1,000.00
2,000.00
29.
37 - Demo - Remove Water Meter
Demo
1
ea
500.00
500.00
30.
40 - Demo - Flag Pole
Demo
1
ea
1,000.00
1,000.00
31.
Demo Trees
Demo
17
ea
200.00
3,400.00
32.
Mobilization
Demo
1
ls
Included
Included
Textura
Demo
$186,714.75
%
0.22%
410.77
02 40
Subtotal
187,125.52
CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY
EXHIBIT 'A'
Willmeng Construction, Inc.
Date
Page 1 of 12
COST BREAKDOWN
Dr. A.J. Chandler Park - 90% GMP - Final
Est. Date:
11/12/2025
Division
Estimate
Item
TOTALS
#
- Description/Scope Of Work
Refer.
Qty.
U/M
Unit Price
31 10 Earthwork
1.
Site Clearing
Earthwork
2.59
acre
2,000.00
5,181.36
2.
Earthwork - Cuts / Fills - Average of 3' on entire site
Earthwork
8,359
cy
8.50
71,053.70
3.
Soil Export
Earthwork
6,580
cy
20.00
131,600.00
4.
Footing Over excavation
Earthwork
480
cy
15.00
7,200.00
5.
Rough & Finish Grade +/-1 tenth - Entire Site
Earthwork
112,850
sf
0.65
73,352.50
6.
Traffic Control
Earthwork
2
month
5,000.00
10,000.00
7.
Mobilization
Earthwork
10
ea
1,500.00
15,000.00
8.
Off-duty Officer
Earthwork
Excluded
Excluded
Textura
Earthwork
$313,387.56
%
0.22%
689.45
31 10
Subtotal
314,077.01
31 25 SWPP Plan & Implementation
1.
SWPP Plan Implementation
SWPPP
1
ls
30,000.00
30,000.00
2.
Dust Control & SWPPP Maintentance
SWPPP
14
month
5,000.00
70,000.00
3.
Temp Fencing & Screening (site perimeter)
SWPPP
2,400
lf
25.00
60,000.00
31 25
Subtotal
160,000.00
31 31 Termite Pretreat
1.
Termite Pretreat
Earthwork
2,592
sf
1.00
2,592.00
Textura
Earthwork
Included
Included
31 31
Subtotal
2,592.00
32 10 Paving & Striping
1.
Pavement Striping @ new parking stalls
Paving/Striping
1
allow
10,000.00
10,000.00
2.
R&R Asphalt Paving
Paving/Striping
In Wet Utilities
In Wet Utilities
3.
Parking Stop
Paving/Striping
Omitted
Omitted
Textura
Paving/Striping
1
min
350.00
350.00
32 10
Subtotal
10,350.00
32 80 Landscaping
1.
Existing Tree - Spade (with in 1/8 mile of project)
Landscape
28
ea
2,000.00
56,000.00
2.
Salvaged Tree Nursery
Landscape
Excluded
Excluded
3.
Existing Tree - PIP (in limit of work area)
Landscape
59
ea
200.00
11,800.00
4.
Existing Tree - PIP (Outside limit of work area)
Landscape
56
ea
Excluded
Excluded
5.
1-01 - DG
Landscape
12,460
sf
2.50
31,150.00
6.
1-02 - Stabilized Aggerate
Landscape
1,240
sf
25.00
31,000.00
7.
1-03 - Rip Rap
Landscape
3,560
sf
10.00
35,600.00
8.
1-04 - Swale Rock - 3"
Landscape
5,280
sf
3.00
15,840.00
9.
1-22 - Flagstone Steps
Landscape
Excluded
Excluded
10.
1-19 - Artificial Turf (4/LS502)
Landscape
1,845
sf
20.00
36,900.00
11.
1-12 - Artificial Turf (5/LS502)
Landscape
200
sf
20.00
4,000.00
12.
1-21 - Artificial Turf (6/LS502 - Fall Protection)
Landscape
520
sf
30.00
15,600.00
13.
3-03 - Tree Guard & Paver Suspension System
Landscape
13
ea
5,000.00
65,000.00
14.
5-01 - Tree Grate
Landscape
9
ea
1,800.00
16,200.00
15.
5-02 - Grate @ Canopy Footing
Landscape
20
ea
1,800.00
36,000.00
16.
5-25 - Planter Pot 36"
Landscape
10
ea
In Site Furn.
In Site Furn.
17.
5-26 - Planter Pot 48"
Landscape
2
ea
In Site Furn.
In Site Furn.
18.
5-27 - Tree Planter 48"
Landscape
5
ea
In Site Furn.
In Site Furn.
19.
1-24 - Curb Drain - Supply grates to match tree grates (5/LS504)
Landscape
4
ea
2,500.00
10,000.00
20.
8-01 - Drainage Rock
Landscape
3,964
sf
In Pavers
In Pavers
21.
8-02 - Amended Soil - 18" Deep
Landscape
1,126
cy
105.00
118,235.83
22.
8-02 - Amended Soil @ Soil Cell - 32" deep per MFG
Landscape
675
cy
In Soil Cell
In Soil Cell
23.
8-02 - 4" AB above Soil Cells for pavers (3/LS501)
Landscape
113
cy
120.00
13,506.67
24.
8-03 - Structural Soil - 4' Deep w/ filter fabric
Landscape
474
cy
240.00
113,742.22
25.
8-04 - Sand Base (Below Sod)
Landscape
11,211
sf
3.75
42,041.25
26.
8-05 - Soil Cell System w/ 4" ABC Below
Landscape
6,078
sf
42.00
255,276.00
27.
8-05 - Drainage System @ Soil Cell
Landscape
Included
Included
28.
8-05 - 1' Perimeter Stone (#57 Rock) per Ferguson Soil Cell Details
Landscape
Included
Included
CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY
EXHIBIT 'A'
Willmeng Construction, Inc.
Date
Page 2 of 12
COST BREAKDOWN
Dr. A.J. Chandler Park - 90% GMP - Final
Est. Date:
11/12/2025
Division
Estimate
Item
TOTALS
#
- Description/Scope Of Work
Refer.
Qty.
U/M
Unit Price
29.
Trees - 60" Box
Landscape
1
ea
12,900.00
12,900.00
30.
Trees - 48" Box
Landscape
58
ea
2,550.00
147,900.00
31.
Trees - 36" Box
Landscape
89
ea
1,010.00
89,890.00
32.
Trees - 24" Box
Landscape
13
ea
350.00
4,550.00
33.
Root Barriers - 6/LP501 - 3 sides/tree
Landscape
161
ea
300.00
48,300.00
34.
Shrubs - 10 Gal.
Landscape
400
ea
160.00
64,000.00
35.
Shrubs - 5 Gal.
Landscape
958
ea
35.00
33,530.00
36.
Accents - 15 Gal.
Landscape
86
ea
175.00
15,050.00
37.
Accents - 10 Gal.
Landscape
29
ea
160.00
4,640.00
38.
Accents - 5 Gal.
Landscape
78
ea
85.00
6,630.00
39.
Grasses - 5 Gal.
Landscape
406
ea
35.00
14,210.00
40.
SOD - CYN DAC Bermudagrass
Landscape
11,211
sf
3.00
33,633.00
41.
Irrigation
Landscape
1
ls
131,453.00
131,453.00
42.
Irrigation - Backflow Preventer
Landscape
2
ea
Included
Included
43.
Mobilization / GCs
Landscape
Included
Included
44.
Landscape fine grading
Landscape
1
ls
25,000.00
25,000.00
45.
Landscape dust control
Landscape
1
ls
40,000.00
40,000.00
46.
90 Day maintenance & warranty
Landscape
1
ls
44,000.00
44,000.00
47.
Textura
Landscape
1,623,578
%
0.22%
3,571.87
48.
Subcontract Bond
Sub Bond
1,627,150
%
2.00%
32,543.00
32 80
Subtotal
1,659,692.84
33 30 Wet Utilities
Sewer Line
1.
6" PVC SDR35 Sewer line (Excludes boring under SRP)
Wet Utilities
220
lf
140.00
30,800.00
2.
8" PVC SDR35 Sewer line (Excludes boring under SRP)
Wet Utilities
139
lf
155.00
21,545.00
3.
Sewer line Cleanout
Wet Utilities
2
ea
3,500.00
7,000.00
4.
Tie-in to existing manhole
Wet Utilities
2
ea
12,250.00
24,500.00
5.
Sump Drain @ Drinking Fountain
Wet Utilities
4
ea
1,650.00
6,600.00
Waterline
6.
1" SCH 80 PVC Water Line
Wet Utilities
296
lf
130.00
38,480.00
7.
2" SCH 80 PVC Water Line
Wet Utilities
493
lf
135.00
66,555.00
8.
3" SCH 80 PVC Water Line
Wet Utilities
10
lf
140.00
1,400.00
9.
Meter Assembly w/ Vault w/ RPBFA
Wet Utilities
3
ea
11,750.00
35,250.00
10.
2" Multi Water Meter Assembly
Wet Utilities
1
ea
7,500.00
7,500.00
11.
Replace 3" Meter
Wet Utilities
By Owner
By Owner
12.
Connect to existing stub
Wet Utilities
1
ea
2,500.00
2,500.00
13.
Waterline Service Connection
Wet Utilities
1
ea
4,500.00
4,500.00
Fireline
14.
6" DIP Fireline
Wet Utilities
123
lf
165.00
20,295.00
15.
Fireline Tap & Street Work (Saw Cut/Asphalt Patch)
Wet Utilities
2
ea
15,000.00
30,000.00
16.
Fire Riser To 8" AFF
Wet Utilities
1
ea
5,000.00
5,000.00
Storm Drain System
17.
6" HDPE Storm Drain
Wet Utilities
34
lf
70.00
2,380.00
18.
8" HDPE Storm Drain
Wet Utilities
43
lf
75.00
3,225.00
19.
12" HDPE Storm Drain
Wet Utilities
68
lf
80.00
5,440.00
20.
Tie-in to existing SD/Basin
Wet Utilities
5
ea
2,500.00
12,500.00
21.
Catch Basin - MAG 535 Type F
Wet Utilities
1
ea
9,000.00
9,000.00
22.
18" Drain Basin
Wet Utilities
1
ea
10,000.00
10,000.00
23.
ACO Radius Drain - 1.5' Wide @ Turf Steps
Wet Utilities
34
lf
In Concrete
In Concrete
24.
Storm Drain Allowance for Soil Cell System
Wet Utilities
Included
Included
25.
Traffic Control
Wet Utilities
1
ls
18,000.00
18,000.00
Textura
Wet Utilities
362,470
%
0.22%
797.43
33 30
Subtotal
363,267.43
CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY
EXHIBIT 'A'
Willmeng Construction, Inc.
Date
Page 3 of 12
COST BREAKDOWN
Dr. A.J. Chandler Park - 90% GMP - Final
Est. Date:
11/12/2025
Division
Estimate
Item
TOTALS
#
- Description/Scope Of Work
Refer.
Qty.
U/M
Unit Price
32 13 Site Concrete
1.
KN02 - Concrete Curb - MAG 220 C&G
Site Concrete
412
lf
40.00
16,480.00
2.
KN03 - Concrete Curb - MAG 222 Vert (2-02, 6" x 18")
Site Concrete
690
lf
65.00
44,850.00
3.
KN04 - Curb Cut - MAG 226
Site Concrete
4
ea
500.00
2,000.00
4.
1-05 - Vehicular Concrete (Type 1)
Site Concrete
1,034
sf
20.00
20,680.00
5.
1-06 - Vehicular Concrete (Type 2)
Site Concrete
15,835
sf
20.00
316,700.00
6.
1-07 - Vehicular Concrete (Type 3)
Site Concrete
2,643
sf
20.00
52,860.00
7.
1-08 - Vehicular Concrete (Type 4)
Site Concrete
4,319
sf
23.00
99,337.00
8.
1-09 - Decorative Banding
Site Concrete
2,687
sf
56.00
150,472.00
9.
1-10 - Concrete Pavement Pedestrian (Type 1)
Site Concrete
684
sf
19.00
12,996.00
10.
1-11 - Concrete Pavement Pedestrian (Type 2 )
Site Concrete
1,030
sf
18.00
18,540.00
11.
1-12 - Vehicular Concrete at Pavers - 6" on 6" ABC (Conc. Only)
Site Concrete
13,250
sf
13.00
172,250.00
12.
1-17 - Truncated Domes
Site Concrete
355
sf
120.00
42,600.00
13.
1-24 - Curb Drain Concrete & Grates Install - Grate by Landscape (5/LS504)
Site Concrete
36
lf
120.00
4,320.00
14.
Dowels at Expansion Joints
Site Concrete
2,720
lf
8.00
21,760.00
15.
2-01 - Raised Concrete Header (6" x 8")
Site Concrete
228
lf
40.00
9,120.00
16.
2-02 - Raised Concrete Header at Parking
Site Concrete
In Conc. Curb
In Conc. Curb
17.
2-03 - Flush Concrete Header (8"x8")
Site Concrete
350
lf
42.00
14,700.00
18.
2-05 - Turf Steps - Acid Etch - curved
Site Concrete
133
lf
200.00
26,600.00
19.
2-06 - Seat Wall (Wall & Footing)
Site Concrete
50
lf
450.00
22,500.00
20.
2-07 - Seat Wall - Retaining (Wall & Footing)
Site Concrete
30
lf
500.00
15,000.00
21.
2-08 - Art Pedestal - 3' Dia. - Acid Etch
Site Concrete
3
ea
2,000.00
6,000.00
22.
3-01 - Swale Bridge Footings
Site Concrete
7
ea
4,500.00
31,500.00
23.
3-03 - Tree Guard & Paver Suspension System
Site Concrete
13
ea
750.00
9,750.00
24.
5-01 - Tree Grate - Install Concrete Ring Only
Site Concrete
9
ea
500.00
4,500.00
25.
5-02 - Canopy Grate - Install Only
Site Concrete
20
ea
500.00
10,000.00
26.
5-03 - Tie Downs - Install/Conc. Only per (4/LS504)
Site Concrete
8
ea
100.00
800.00
27.
5-10 - Ping Pong Table (4/LS505) - Footings Only
Site Concrete
2
ea
750.00
1,500.00
28.
5-16 - Removable Bollards - Install Only
Site Concrete
26
ea
500.00
13,000.00
5-18 - Swing Bench Footing (3/LS505)
Site Concrete
3
ea
2,500.00
7,500.00
29.
5-19 - Umbrella Footings - Install Only
Site Concrete
12
ea
500.00
6,000.00
30.
5-27 - Tree Planter - Footing per 5/LS506
Site Concrete
5
ea
1,000.00
5,000.00
31.
5-43 - Decorative Paving Stud - Provide & Install
Site Concrete
67
ea
200.00
13,400.00
32.
Light Pole Base - 15' Max
Site Concrete
13
ea
1,600.00
20,800.00
33.
Light Pole Base - Over 15'
Site Concrete
22
ea
2,000.00
44,000.00
34.
Steel trench drain at bottom turf steps (3/C202 & 4/LS503)
Site Concrete
36
lf
800.00
28,800.00
35.
Light Totem/Lantern - Footing (5/S3.1)
Light Totem
5
ea
5,000.00
25,000.00
36.
EV Charging Station Footings - Reset per new elevation
Site Concrete
2
ea
2,000.00
4,000.00
37.
Continuous Footing at 1-15 Pavers (9 & 10/LS501)
Site Concrete
2,700
lf
22.00
59,400.00
38.
Mockups - Flatwork
Allowance
1
ls
20,000.00
20,000.00
39.
8" TD, Saw Cuts, Pump Allowance
Site Concrete
1
ls
50,000.00
50,000.00
40.
Wire Mesh over Stratavault (Per MFG, Not on drawings)
Site Concrete
Omitted
Omitted
41.
Vac Truck
Site Concrete
1
ls
25,000.00
25,000.00
42.
Textura
Site Concrete
$1,449,715.00
%
0.22%
3,189.37
43.
Subcontract Bond
Sub Bond
$1,452,904.37
%
2.00%
29,058.09
32 13
Subtotal
1,481,962.46
CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY
EXHIBIT 'A'
Willmeng Construction, Inc.
Date
Page 4 of 12
COST BREAKDOWN
Dr. A.J. Chandler Park - 90% GMP - Final
Est. Date:
11/12/2025
Division
Estimate
Item
TOTALS
#
- Description/Scope Of Work
Refer.
Qty.
U/M
Unit Price
32 14 Pavers
1.
1-12 - Vehicular Concrete Pavers (Paver only - Conc. sub slab in Conc.)
Pavers
13,250
sf
17.50
231,875.00
2.
1-13 - Pavers Pedestrian (Type 1) - Grind/Shotblast
Pavers
534
sf
18.00
9,612.00
3.
1-14- Pavers Pedestrian (Type 2) - Shotblast
Pavers
2,023
sf
17.00
34,391.00
4.
1-15 - Permeable Pavers w/ continuous footer
Pavers
4,222
sf
17.50
73,885.00
5.
1-15 - Permeable Pavers - 18" Drainage Rock #47 Stone + Geo Fabric
Pavers
4,222
sf
13.50
56,997.00
6.
1-16 - Permeable Pavers (On soil cell)
Pavers
4,580
sf
16.00
73,280.00
7.
1-18 - Detectable Warning Paver
Pavers
454
sf
100.00
45,400.00
8.
1-22 - Flagstone steps - Install Only @ Conc.
Pavers
Excluded
Excluded
9.
Paver Suspension System (6/LS504)
Pavers
ea
In Landscape
In Landscape
10.
R&R existing pavers - Parking Lot
Pavers
10,092
sf
11.00
111,012.00
11.
R&R existing pavers - Utility Patch Back
Pavers
1
ls
20,000.00
20,000.00
12.
R&R existing pavers - West Area/Flagpole
Pavers
1
ls
15,000.00
15,000.00
13.
Textura
Pavers
$671,452.00
%
0.22%
1,477.19
14.
Subcontract Bond
Sub Bond
$672,929.19
%
2.00%
13,458.58
32 14
Subtotal
686,387.77
03 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete
1.
Concrete Caisson - West Canopy (48"x17')
West Canopy
8
ea
6,000.00
48,000.00
2.
Concrete Caisson - East Canopy (48"x17')
East Canopy
8
ea
6,000.00
48,000.00
3.
Spread Footings - North Canopy/Storage 103 & 104 (6'x6'x18")
North Canopy
12
ea
2,800.00
33,600.00
4.
Spread Footings - South Canopy/Storage 102 (6'x6'x18")
South Canopy
12
ea
2,800.00
33,600.00
5.
Spread Footings - Restroom 110 (4'x4'x12")
Restrooms
8
ea
1,800.00
14,400.00
6.
Slab On Grade 4" On 4" - Storage 111 South Canopy
South Canopy
636
sf
42.00
26,712.00
7.
Slab On Grade 4" On 4" - Storage 103 North Canopy
North Canopy
426
sf
42.00
17,892.00
8.
Slab On Grade 4" On 4" - Storage 104 North Canopy
North Canopy
407
sf
42.00
17,094.00
9.
Slab On Grade 4" On 4" - Restroom 110
Restrooms
748
sf
42.00
31,416.00
10.
Turndowns/Continuous Footings - Storage 111 South Canopy
South Canopy
116
lf
N/A
N/A
11.
Turndowns/Continuous Footings - Storage 103 North Canopy
North Canopy
86
lf
N/A
N/A
12.
Turndowns/Continuous Footings - Storage 104 North Canopy
North Canopy
112
lf
N/A
N/A
13.
Turndowns/Continuous Footings - Restrooms 110
Restrooms
145
lf
N/A
N/A
14.
Vapor Barrier - 15 Mil.
South Canopy
636
sf
1.00
636.00
15.
Vapor Barrier - 15 Mil.
North Canopy
833
sf
1.00
833.00
16.
Vapor Barrier - 15 Mil.
Restrooms
748
sf
1.00
748.00
17.
Textura
North Canopy
272,931
%
0.22%
600.45
18.
Subcontract Bond
Sub Bond
273,531
%
2.00%
5,470.63
03 00
Subtotal
279,002.08
04 00 Masonry
1.
Storage 111 - 8" CMU - 9' high - Ground Face
South Canopy
1,044
sf
38.00
39,672.00
2.
Storage 103 - 8" CMU - 9' high - Ground Face
North Canopy
774
sf
38.00
29,412.00
3.
Storage 104 - 8" CMU - 9' high - Ground Face
North Canopy
1,008
sf
38.00
38,304.00
4.
Restroom 110 - 8" CMU - 9' high - Ground Face
Restrooms
1,305
sf
38.00
49,590.00
5.
Textura
North Canopy
156,978
%
0.22%
345.35
04 00
Subtotal
157,323.35
05 05 Structural & Misc Steel
1.
3-01 - Swale Bridge - Steel Scope
Landscape
426
sf
350.00
149,100.00
2.
3-02 - Garden Fence
Landscape
1,325
lf
88.00
116,600.00
3.
Demo/Patch Existing Iron Fence
Landscape
Excluded
Excluded
4.
5-18 - Swing Shade Structure
Landscape
3
ea
32,500.00
97,500.00
5.
North Canopy Framing
North Canopy
4,352
sf
60.00
261,120.00
6.
South Canopy Framing
South Canopy
3,314
sf
60.00
198,840.00
7.
East Canopy Framing
East Canopy
4,995
sf
65.00
324,675.00
8.
West Canopy Framing
West Canopy
4,995
sf
65.00
324,675.00
9.
Restroom Canopy
Restrooms
2,122
sf
60.00
127,320.00
10.
Light Lantern - Column
Light Totem
5
ea
6,500.00
32,500.00
11.
South Canopy - Columns
South Canopy
12
ea
3,500.00
42,000.00
12.
East Canopy - Columns
East Canopy
8
ea
5,000.00
40,000.00
13.
West Canopy - Columns
West Canopy
8
ea
5,000.00
40,000.00
14.
Storage 111 - Metal Louvers 3' high
South Canopy
348
sf
50.00
17,400.00
15.
Storage 103 - Metal Louvers 3' high
North Canopy
258
sf
50.00
12,900.00
CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY
EXHIBIT 'A'
Willmeng Construction, Inc.
Date
Page 5 of 12
COST BREAKDOWN
Dr. A.J. Chandler Park - 90% GMP - Final
Est. Date:
11/12/2025
Division
Estimate
Item
TOTALS
#
- Description/Scope Of Work
Refer.
Qty.
U/M
Unit Price
16.
Storage 104 - Metal Louvers 3' high
North Canopy
336
sf
50.00
16,800.00
17.
Restrooms - Metal Louvers 3' high
Restrooms
381
sf
50.00
19,050.00
18.
Storage 111 - Stainless Steel Bug Screen
South Canopy
348
sf
25.00
8,700.00
19.
Storage 103 - Stainless Steel Bug Screen
North Canopy
258
sf
25.00
6,450.00
20.
Storage 104 - Stainless Steel Bug Screen
North Canopy
336
sf
25.00
8,400.00
21.
Restrooms 110 - Stainless Steel Bug Screen
Restrooms
381
sf
25.00
9,525.00
22.
Sliding wire mesh partitions - (2) 6'x9'
Restrooms
2
ea
4,050.00
8,100.00
23.
Wire mesh screen - (1) 12'x5' Above RR Sink
Restrooms
60
sf
50.00
3,000.00
24.
Wire mesh screen - 3' Tall - Above RR walls
Restrooms
249
sf
50.00
12,450.00
25.
Wire mesh screen - 3' Tall - Above RR walls
North Canopy
96
sf
50.00
4,800.00
26.
Structural Support for Adult Changing Station - CMU Wall
Restrooms
1
ls
2,000.00
2,000.00
27.
Steel Plate @ RR Interior Walls - (4 & 5/A800, 4 & 9/A801, 3 & 4 & 5/A802)
Restrooms
1
ls
30,000.00
30,000.00
28.
Scupper Box @ Roof Drain Nozzle (9/A800)
Restrooms
4
ea
1,200.00
4,800.00
29.
Mockup
Allowance
1
ls
73,000.00
73,000.00
30.
AESS 2 at areas >20'. AESS 3 at areas >20' high. SSPC-SP6. Scope TBD
North Canopy
4,505
sf
5.00
22,525.00
31.
AESS 2 at areas >20'. AESS 3 at areas >20' high. SSPC-SP6. Scope TBD
South Canopy
4,404
sf
5.00
22,020.00
32.
AESS 2 at areas >20'. AESS 3 at areas >20' high. SSPC-SP6. Scope TBD
East Canopy
5,989
sf
5.00
29,945.00
33.
AESS 2 at areas >20'. AESS 3 at areas >20' high. SSPC-SP6. Scope TBD
West Canopy
5,960
sf
5.00
29,800.00
34.
AESS 2 at areas >20'. AESS 3 at areas >20' high. SSPC-SP6. Scope TBD
Restrooms
2,225
sf
5.00
11,125.00
35.
Textura
South Canopy
$2,107,120.00
%
0.22%
4,635.66
36.
Subcontract Bond
Sub Bond
$2,111,755.66
%
2.00%
42,235.11
05 05
Subtotal
2,153,990.77
05 70 Decorative Metals
1.
East Canopy - Custom Paneling w/ Kynar Finish (Pattern Not Defined Yet)
East Canopy
5,486
sf
93.00
510,198.00
2.
West Canopy - Custom Paneling w/ Kynar Finish (Pattern Not Defined Yet)
West Canopy
5,486
sf
93.00
510,198.00
3.
East Canopy - Custom Pattern
East Canopy
5,486
sf
7.50
41,145.00
4.
West Canopy - Custom Pattern
West Canopy
5,486
sf
7.50
41,145.00
5.
Light Totem/Lantern - Custom Paneling - 5 total
Light Totem
733
sf
225.00
164,850.00
6.
1/8" Acrylic per 4/A804 & Install
Light Totem
1,026
sf
50.00
51,286.67
7.
Textura
East Canopy
1,318,823
%
0.22%
2,901.41
8.
Subcontract Bond
Sub Bond
1,321,724
%
1.00%
13,217.24
05 70
Subtotal
1,334,941.32
06 10 Rough Carpentry
1.
Rough Carpentry - Roof Blocking
Restrooms
2,209
sf
0.50
1,104.50
2.
Rough Carpentry - Roof Blocking
North Canopy
4,486
sf
0.50
2,243.00
3.
Rough Carpentry - Roof Blocking
South Canopy
3,298
sf
0.50
1,649.00
4.
Textura
West Canopy
4,997
%
0.22%
10.99
06 10
Subtotal
5,007.49
07 10 Waterproofing
1.
Waterproof Footings & Retaining Walls (Tremco 250 GC)
Restrooms
3,105
sf
6.50
20,182.50
2.
Waterproof membrane @ Restroom floors
Restrooms
N/A
N/A
3.
Water Proofing @ Seat Wall
Landscape
1
ls
3,500.00
3,500.00
4.
Fluid Applied Air Barrier @ CMU & Framed walls (Tremco ExoAir 230)
Restrooms
4,131
sf
6.50
26,851.50
5.
Textura
Restrooms
50,534
%
0.22%
111.17
07 10
Subtotal
50,645.17
07 50 Roofing
1.
Roofing - Fluid Applied Restrooms
Restrooms
2,209
sf
8.50
18,776.50
2.
Roofing - Fluid Applied West Canopy
West Canopy
5,230
sf
8.50
44,455.00
3.
Roofing - Fluid Applied East Canopy
East Canopy
5,230
sf
8.50
44,455.00
4.
Roofing - Fluid Applied North Canopy
North Canopy
4,486
sf
8.50
38,131.00
5.
Roofing - Fluid Applied South Canopy
South Canopy
3,298
sf
8.50
28,033.00
6.
Textura
West Canopy
173,851
%
0.22%
382.47
07 50
Subtotal
174,232.97
CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY
EXHIBIT 'A'
Willmeng Construction, Inc.
Date
Page 6 of 12
COST BREAKDOWN
Dr. A.J. Chandler Park - 90% GMP - Final
Est. Date:
11/12/2025
Division
Estimate
Item
TOTALS
#
- Description/Scope Of Work
Refer.
Qty.
U/M
Unit Price
07 92 Caulking & Sealants
1.
Caulking - Hardscape
Site Concrete
41,482
sf
0.40
16,592.80
2.
Caulking - Masonry - North Canopy
North Canopy
1,782
sf
1.00
1,782.00
3.
Caulking - Masonry - South Canopy
South Canopy
1,044
sf
1.00
1,044.00
4.
Caulking - Masonry - Restrooms
Restrooms
1,305
sf
1.00
1,305.00
5.
Textura
Site Concrete
20,724
%
0.22%
45.59
07 92
Subtotal
20,769.39
08 11 Doors, Frames & Hardware
1.
6'x7'-10" Pair HM Door/HM Frame - Storage 102
South Canopy
1
pair
6,200.00
6,200.00
2.
6'x7'-10" Pair HM Door/HM Frame - Storage 103 & 104
North Canopy
2
pair
6,200.00
12,400.00
3.
3'x7'-10" HM Door/HM Frame - Storage 104
North Canopy
2
ea
3,500.00
7,000.00
4.
3'x7'-10" HM Door/HM Frame - Restroom
Restrooms
4
ea
3,500.00
14,000.00
5.
Low Voltage - Hardware at Restroom Doors
North Canopy
11
ls
3,000.00
33,000.00
6.
Textura
North Canopy
72,600
%
0.22%
159.72
08 11
Subtotal
72,759.72
09 22 Metal Stud Framing & Drywall
1.
Framing/Drywall - Restrooms - 9'H
Restrooms
1,169
sf
15.00
17,527.50
2.
Framing @ Stucco Ceiling
North Canopy
870
sf
4.00
3,480.00
3.
Framing @ Stucco Ceiling
South Canopy
1,320
sf
4.00
5,280.00
4.
Roof Framing - Restrooms
Restrooms
2,122
sf
3.50
7,427.00
5.
Roof Framing - North Canopy
North Canopy
4,486
sf
3.50
15,701.00
6.
Roof Framing - South Canopy
South Canopy
3,298
sf
3.50
11,543.00
7.
Textura
North Canopy
60,959
%
0.22%
134.11
09 22
Subtotal
61,092.61
09 24 EIFS & Stucco
1.
Stucco @ Ceilings
North Canopy
870
sf
12.00
10,440.00
2.
Stucco @ Ceilings
South Canopy
1,320
sf
12.00
15,840.00
3.
Textura
South Canopy
26,280
0.00
57.82
09 24
Subtotal
26,337.82
09 30 Floor & Wall Tile
1.
F2 - Thinset Tile Floor
Restrooms
Omitted
Omitted
2.
F2 - Thinset Tile Floor - RR @ North Canopy
Restrooms
Omitted
Omitted
3.
T1 - Wall Tile @ Restrooms
Restrooms
2,685
sf
18.00
48,330.00
4.
T1 - Wall Tile @ Restrooms - RR @ North Canopy
North Canopy
565
sf
18.00
10,170.00
5.
Mock Ups
Allowance
1
ls
2,500.00
2,500.00
6.
Textura
Restrooms
61,000
%
0.22%
134.20
09 30
Subtotal
61,134.20
CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY
EXHIBIT 'A'
Willmeng Construction, Inc.
Date
Page 7 of 12
COST BREAKDOWN
Dr. A.J. Chandler Park - 90% GMP - Final
Est. Date:
11/12/2025
Division
Estimate
Item
TOTALS
#
- Description/Scope Of Work
Refer.
Qty.
U/M
Unit Price
09 50 Acoustical Ceilings
1.
T&G Wood Ceilings - North Canopy
North Canopy
3,394
sf
30.00
101,820.00
2.
T&G Wood Ceilings - South Canopy
South Canopy
2,480
sf
30.00
74,400.00
3.
T&G Wood Ceilings - Restrooms
Restrooms
2,111
sf
30.00
63,330.00
4.
T&G Wood Ceilings - North Canopy - Sealer/Fire Proofing
North Canopy
3,394
sf
4.00
13,576.00
5.
T&G Wood Ceilings - South Canopy - Sealer/Fire Proofing
South Canopy
2,480
sf
4.00
9,920.00
6.
T&G Wood Ceilings - Restrooms - Sealer/Fire Proofing
Restrooms
2,111
sf
4.00
8,444.00
7.
Textura
North Canopy
271,490
%
0.22%
597.28
09 50
Subtotal
272,087.28
09 67 Polish Flooring
1.
Sealed Concrete Flooring
South Canopy
636
sf
2.00
1,272.00
2.
Polish / Seal Concrete Flooring
North Canopy
833
sf
4.00
3,332.00
3.
Polish / Seal Concrete Flooring
Restrooms
748
sf
5.00
3,740.00
4.
Textura
Restrooms
8,344
%
0.22%
18.36
09 67
Subtotal
8,362.36
09 90 Painting
1.
Paint - Site Misc.
Site Concrete
1
ls
16,000.00
16,000.00
2.
North Canopy - Roof Edge Bent Plate
North Canopy
4,352
sf
1.40
6,092.80
3.
South Canopy - Roof Edge Bent Plate
South Canopy
3,314
sf
1.40
4,639.60
4.
East Canopy - Roof Edge Bent Plate
East Canopy
4,995
sf
1.40
6,993.00
5.
West Canopy - Roof Edge Bent Plate
West Canopy
4,995
sf
1.40
6,993.00
6.
Restrooms - Roof Edge Bent Plate
Restrooms
852
sf
1.40
1,192.80
7.
Anti Graffiti Paint @ Exterior CMU (A403)
Restrooms
4,751
sf
2.00
9,501.30
8.
Mesh Partitions above toilet walls
Restrooms
852
sf
5.00
4,260.00
9.
Light Totem - Paint
Light Totem
5
ls
500.00
2,500.00
10.
Textura
Restrooms
58,173
%
0.0022
127.98
09 90
Subtotal
58,300.48
10 14 Signage
1.
Interpretive Signage
Signage
5
ea
9,341.25
46,706.25
2.
Inground Signage
Signage
1
ea
4,215.00
4,215.00
3.
Entry Signage Allowance (New scope from 60% plans)
Signage
Add Alts
Add Alts
4.
ADA/Building Signage
Restrooms
6
ea
300.00
1,800.00
5.
ADA/Building Signage
North Canopy
4
ea
300.00
1,200.00
6.
ADA/Building Signage
South Canopy
1
ea
300.00
300.00
7.
Textura
Signage
54,221
%
0.22%
119.29
10 14
Subtotal
54,340.54
10 20 Interior & Safety Specialties
1.
Restroom Accessories - Grab Bars
Restrooms
12
ea
100.00
1,200.00
2.
Restroom Accessories - TP Disp
Restrooms
9
ea
300.00
2,700.00
3.
Restroom Accessories - Sanitary Napkin Disp
Restrooms
9
ea
300.00
2,700.00
4.
Restroom Accessories - Signage
Restrooms
3
ea
150.00
450.00
5.
Restroom Accessories - Mirrors
Restrooms
3
ea
200.00
600.00
6.
Restroom Accessories - Baby Changing Station
Restrooms
1
ea
850.00
850.00
7.
Restroom Accessories - Grab Bars
North Canopy
6
ea
100.00
600.00
8.
Restroom Accessories - TP Disp
North Canopy
2
ea
300.00
600.00
9.
Restroom Accessories - Sanitary Napkin Disp
North Canopy
2
ea
300.00
600.00
10.
Restroom Accessories - Signage
North Canopy
2
ea
150.00
300.00
11.
Restroom Accessories - Mirrors
North Canopy
2
ea
200.00
400.00
12.
Restroom Accessories - Baby Changing Station
North Canopy
1
ea
850.00
850.00
13.
Adult Changing Station - Powered
Restrooms
1
ea
10,500.00
10,500.00
14.
Textura
Restrooms
22,350
0.00
49.17
10 20
Subtotal
22,399.17
CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY
EXHIBIT 'A'
Willmeng Construction, Inc.
Date
Page 8 of 12
COST BREAKDOWN
Dr. A.J. Chandler Park - 90% GMP - Final
Est. Date:
11/12/2025
Division
Estimate
Item
TOTALS
#
- Description/Scope Of Work
Refer.
Qty.
U/M
Unit Price
12 90 Site Furnishings
Dave Bang
1.
5-03 Tie-Down
Site Furnishings
8
ea
150.00
1,200.00
2.
5-06 Bistro Chair (Spec TBD)
Site Furnishings
137
pair
250.00
34,250.00
3.
5-07 Bistro Table - Round (Spec TBD)
Site Furnishings
76
ea
350.00
26,600.00
4.
5-08 Picnic Table Single
Site Furnishings
2
ea
1,800.00
3,600.00
5.
5-09 Picnic Table
Site Furnishings
12
ea
2,500.00
30,000.00
6.
5-10 Picnic Table Right Extension
Site Furnishings
3
ea
2,900.00
8,700.00
7.
5-11 Picnic Table Left Extension
Site Furnishings
3
ea
2,900.00
8,700.00
8.
5-13 Trash Receptacle
Site Furnishings
19
ea
2,700.00
51,300.00
9.
5-16 Removable Bollard
Site Furnishings
26
ea
1,000.00
26,000.00
10.
5-19 Shade Umbrella
Site Furnishings
12
ea
6,700.00
80,400.00
11.
5-20 Disc Shade with Table
Site Furnishings
Excluded
Excluded
12.
5-21 Chess Table
Site Furnishings
3
ea
2,000.00
6,000.00
13.
5-22 Bench 117"
Site Furnishings
7
ea
5,100.00
35,700.00
14.
5-23 Bench 175"
Site Furnishings
8
ea
7,500.00
60,000.00
15.
5-15 Bike Rack
Site Furnishings
20
ea
650.00
13,000.00
16.
5-33 Swing
Site Furnishings
1
ea
10,000.00
10,000.00
17.
Shipping & Handling
Site Furnishings
337
ea
140.00
47,180.00
18.
Install
Site Furnishings
1
ls
50,000.00
50,000.00
Playspace Designs
19.
5-05 Circular Bench - Pricing doubled since 60% per Play Space
Site Furnishings
13
ea
3,350.00
43,550.00
20.
5-12 Ping Pong Table
Site Furnishings
2
ea
10,000.00
20,000.00
21.
5-14 Dog Bag Station
Site Furnishings
4
ea
700.00
2,800.00
22.
5-27 Tree Planter
Site Furnishings
5
ea
2,500.00
12,500.00
23.
5-28 Pebble 24"x18"
Site Furnishings
1
ea
900.00
900.00
24.
5-29 Pebble 36"x25"
Site Furnishings
1
ea
1,200.00
1,200.00
25.
5-30 Pebble 42"x28"
Site Furnishings
2
ea
1,800.00
3,600.00
26.
5-31 Pebble 56"x37"
Site Furnishings
1
ea
5,000.00
5,000.00
27.
5-32 Distortion Mirrors
Site Furnishings
1
ea
8,500.00
8,500.00
28.
5-34 Effect Disc B with Post
Site Furnishings
1
ea
8,500.00
8,500.00
29.
5-35 Babel Drum large
Site Furnishings
1
ea
4,000.00
4,000.00
30.
5-36 Sound Column
Site Furnishings
1
ea
9,000.00
9,000.00
31.
Global Trade Impact Fee (Tariffs)
Site Furnishings
1
ls
20,000.00
20,000.00
32.
Shipping & Handling
Site Furnishings
1
ls
30,000.00
30,000.00
33.
Install
Site Furnishings
1
ls
20,000.00
20,000.00
Landscape Forms
34.
5-04 Adirondack Chair (LOLL Spec)
Site Furnishings
34
ea
540.00
18,360.00
35.
5-18 Shade Structure - Swing (Shade Structure in Steel)
Site Furnishings
4
ea
13,700.00
54,800.00
36.
5-25 Planter Pot 36"
Site Furnishings
10
ea
1,800.00
18,000.00
37.
5-26 Planter Pot 48"
Site Furnishings
2
ea
3,500.00
7,000.00
38.
Shipping & Handling
Site Furnishings
1
ls
12,000.00
12,000.00
39.
Install
Site Furnishings
1
ls
35,000.00
35,000.00
Miracle Playground Sales
40.
5-37 Glomist
Site Furnishings
3
ea
7,850.00
23,550.00
41.
5-38 Glomist Nano
Site Furnishings
2
ea
7,000.00
14,000.00
42.
Shipping & Handling
Site Furnishings
1
ls
4,500.00
4,500.00
43.
Install
Site Furnishings
1
ls
40,000.00
40,000.00
Cart King
44.
Mobile Game Cart
Site Furnishings
1
ea
5,500.00
5,500.00
45.
Shipping & Handling
Site Furnishings
1
ls
1,200.00
1,200.00
46.
Install
Site Furnishings
N/A
N/A
CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY
EXHIBIT 'A'
Willmeng Construction, Inc.
Date
Page 9 of 12
COST BREAKDOWN
Dr. A.J. Chandler Park - 90% GMP - Final
Est. Date:
11/12/2025
Division
Estimate
Item
TOTALS
#
- Description/Scope Of Work
Refer.
Qty.
U/M
Unit Price
Mecca Designs
47.
Mobile Book Cart
Site Furnishings
1
ea
10,000.00
10,000.00
48.
Shipping & Handling
Site Furnishings
1
ls
2,000.00
2,000.00
49.
Install
Site Furnishings
N/A
N/A
Art Solutions
50.
Statue Removal / Storage (6 months) / Relocate
Site Furnishings
3
ea
13,000.00
39,000.00
51.
Statue Storage - (Beyond 6 months)
Site Furnishings
6
months
1,300.00
7,800.00
Miscellaneous
52.
3-04 - Water Bollards (No Specs)
Site Furnishings
5
ea
In Plumbing
In Plumbing
53.
5-17 Drinking Fountain
Site Furnishings
4
ea
In Plumbing
In Plumbing
54.
5-24 EV Charging Station (New)
Site Furnishings
2
ea
In Electrical
In Electrical
55.
Bollard (Helio 600 LIT)
Site Furnishings
In Electrical
In Electrical
56.
Bench 59"
Site Furnishings
Omitted
Omitted
57.
Textura
Site Furnishings
974,890
%
0.22%
2,144.76
58.
Subcontract Bond
Sub Bond
977,035
%
1.00%
9,770.35
12 90
Subtotal
986,805.11
21 00 Fire Protection
1.
Fire Protection - Restroom 110
Restrooms
852
sf
Excluded
Excluded
2.
Fire Protection - Restroom 104 @ North Canopy
North Canopy
100
sf
152.50
15,250.00
3.
Fire Protection - South Storage Room
South Canopy
655
sf
14.05
9,200.00
4.
Fire Protection - Canopies
Excluded
Excluded
5.
Textura
North Canopy
24,450
%
0.22%
53.79
21 00
Subtotal
24,503.79
22 01 Plumbing
1.
Toilets
Restrooms
9
ea
8,000.00
72,000.00
2.
Urinals
Restrooms
3
ea
8,000.00
24,000.00
3.
Lavatories
Restrooms
3
ea
8,000.00
24,000.00
4.
Floor Drains
Restrooms
6
ea
8,000.00
48,000.00
5.
Trough Sink
Restrooms
1
ls
16,000.00
16,000.00
6.
Roof Drains @ Restrooms
Restrooms
2
ea
7,000.00
14,000.00
7.
Hose Bibs
Restrooms
3
ea
6,000.00
18,000.00
8.
Toilets
North Canopy
2
ea
6,000.00
12,000.00
9.
Urinals
North Canopy
2
ea
6,000.00
12,000.00
10.
Lavatories
North Canopy
2
ea
6,000.00
12,000.00
11.
Floor Drains
North Canopy
2
ea
6,000.00
12,000.00
12.
Hose Bibs
Wet Utilities
6
ea
4,000.00
24,000.00
13.
Drinking Fountains
Wet Utilities
4
ea
12,000.00
48,000.00
14.
3-04 - Water Bollards Stub Up (No Specs)
Wet Utilities
5
ea
2,000.00
10,000.00
15.
Textura
Restrooms
346,000
%
0.22%
761.20
22 01
Subtotal
346,761.20
23 05 HVAC Systems
1.
No Scope
Restrooms
-
23 05
Subtotal
0.00
CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY
EXHIBIT 'A'
Willmeng Construction, Inc.
Date
Page 10 of 12
COST BREAKDOWN
Dr. A.J. Chandler Park - 90% GMP - Final
Est. Date:
11/12/2025
Division
Estimate
Item
TOTALS
#
- Description/Scope Of Work
Refer.
Qty.
U/M
Unit Price
26 05 Electrical
1.
Power & Lighting - General Site Electrical
Site Electrical
112,850
sf
11.10
1,252,635.00
2.
Power & Lighting - North Canopy / Storage 103 & 104
North Canopy
4,352
sf
22.00
95,744.00
3.
Power & Lighting - East Canopy
East Canopy
4,995
sf
17.00
84,915.00
4.
Power & Lighting - West Canopy
West Canopy
4,995
sf
17.00
84,915.00
5.
Power & Lighting - South Canopy / Storage 102
South Canopy
3,314
sf
26.50
87,821.00
6.
Power & Lighting - Restroom/Canopy (Includes Gear/Panels)
Restrooms
2,122
sf
68.00
144,296.00
7.
EG1 - 25' Pole
Site Electrical
4
ea
Included
Included
8.
EG1 - Fixtures
Site Electrical
12
ea
Included
Included
9.
EG2 - 14' Pole
Site Electrical
13
ea
Included
Included
10.
EG2 - Fixtures
Site Electrical
13
ea
Included
Included
11.
EG3 - 21" Bollard
Site Electrical
16
ea
Included
Included
12.
EG4 - Tree Uplight
Site Electrical
34
ea
Included
Included
13.
EG5 - Sculpture Uplight
Site Electrical
9
ea
Included
Included
14.
EG7 - Canopy / Column Uplight (In-ground)
Site Electrical
64
ea
Included
Included
15.
EG8 - 32" Bollard
Site Electrical
5
ea
Included
Included
16.
EG9 - Canopy / Column Uplight (in-ground)
Site Electrical
28
ea
Included
Included
17.
EP1 - Pole (28'-10")
Site Electrical
8
ea
Included
Included
18.
EP1 - Cable
Site Electrical
260
lf
Included
Included
19.
EP1 - Fixtures
Site Electrical
12
ea
Included
Included
20.
EP2 - Pole (22')
Site Electrical
10
ea
Included
Included
21.
EP2 - Cable
Site Electrical
216
lf
Included
Included
22.
EP2 - Fixtures
Site Electrical
50
ea
Included
Included
23.
ER1 - Canopy Downlight
Site Electrical
12
ea
Included
Included
24.
ER2 - Restroom / Storage Downlight
Site Electrical
20
ea
Included
Included
25.
ES1 - Flexible Tape Light
Site Electrical
930
lf
Included
Included
26.
ES2 - Suspended Downlight
Site Electrical
12
ea
Included
Included
27.
EW1 - Scone (Wall Mounted)
Site Electrical
6
ea
Included
Included
28.
EX3 - Lantern Uplight
Light totem
5
ea
Included
Included
29.
EX4 - Lantern Backlight (27' entire height of lantern)
Light totem
5
ea
Included
Included
30.
Fans @ Restrooms
Restrooms
3
ea
5,000.00
15,000.00
31.
Power to (2) future Kiosk
Restrooms
2
ea
5,000.00
10,000.00
32.
Power to EV Charging Station - 50' of Trench
Site Electrical
50
lf
300.00
15,000.00
33.
EV Charger - New Charger In Lieu of Reset Existing
Site Electrical
2
ea
15,000.00
30,000.00
34.
Power to Adult Changing Station
Site Electrical
1
ls
2,500.00
2,500.00
35.
Power to Christmas Tree
Site Electrical
1
ls
5,000.00
5,000.00
36.
HAWK Crossing
Site Electrical
1
pair
90,000.00
90,000.00
37.
HAWK Crossing - Pot holing, tree demo, signage relocate
Site Electrical
1
ls
15,000.00
15,000.00
38.
Light Totem - Fixtures/Power
Light totem
5
ea
32,000.00
160,000.00
39.
Outlet Allowance - Per City Request
Site Electrical
10
ea
1,000.00
10,000.00
40.
Textura
Site Electrical
2,102,826
%
0.22%
4,626.22
41.
Subcontract Bond
Sub Bond
2,107,452
%
1.00%
21,074.52
26 05
Subtotal
2,128,526.74
27 20 Teleco and Data
1.
Telecommunications and Data - WiFi
Site Electrical
Excluded
Excluded
2.
Low Voltage/Access Control By Owner
Site Electrical
By Owner
By Owner
27 20
Subtotal
0.00
28 31 Fire Detection & Alarm
1.
Fire Life Safety Systems
ls
In Elec.
In Elec.
28 31
Subtotal
0.00
01 21 Special/Owner - Allowances
1.
Allowance - Design Contingency (will go to zero at GMP)
Allowance
18,600,962
%
1.50%
279,014.42
2.
Allowance - Mockup (A006, Canopies, Buildings, Landscaping)
Allowance
1
ls
76,000.00
76,000.00
3.
Reduce South Canopy Scope/Cost
Allowance
N/A
N/A
01 21
Subtotal
355,014.42
CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY
EXHIBIT 'A'
Willmeng Construction, Inc.
Date
Page 11 of 12
COST BREAKDOWN
Dr. A.J. Chandler Park - 90% GMP - Final
Est. Date:
11/12/2025
Division
Estimate
Item
TOTALS
#
- Description/Scope Of Work
Refer.
Qty.
U/M
Unit Price
COSTS OF WORK TOTALS:
13,843,893.01
1.
GENERAL CONDITIONS (14 MONTHS)
1,777,625.61
2.
CM@RISK'S FEE (7.5%)
1,171,613.90
3.
BONDS (PAYMENT & PERFORMANCE)
167,931.33
4.
INSURANCE (GEN. LIABILITY & BUILDER RISK)
237,454.89
5.
SALES TAX (CHANDLER, AZ - 5.0700%)
871,964.90
6.
CONTRACTORS CONTINGENCY (3.5%)
632,466.93
7.
OWNERS CONTINGENCY (4.5%)
813,171.76
8.
TOTAL VE DEDUCTS (RED LIST BELOW)
(1,535,165.96)
TOTAL:
17,980,956.36
Summary Cost by Major Work Type
Loaded Cost
General Requirements
423,049
Demolition
244,256
Earthwork
413,349
SWPPP
208,849
Paving & Striping
13,510
Landscaping
2,602,579
Wet Utilities
581,209
Restroom
1,275,014
Site Concrete
1,880,346
Pavers
878,377
West Canopy
1,475,743
East Canopy
1,479,206
South Canopy (With Building)
850,294
North Canopy (With Building)
1,167,898
Site Furnishings
1,275,327
Signage
66,623
Site Electrical
1,859,746
Light Totem
569,291
Allowance - Design Contingency
364,199
Allowance - Mockups
223,860
Sub Bonds
217,761
Contractor's Contingency 3.5%
632,467
Owners Contingency 4.5%
813,172
Total VE Deducts (Red List Below)
(1,535,166)
17,980,956
Deduct Alternates (Included Above)
Loaded Cost
Omit all tree spading. Includes tree demo ILO spade.
(56,020)
Omit 60" Box Tree
(15,182)
Reduce tree barriers from 161 to 60.
(35,660)
Change all 10 gal shrubs to 5 gal shrubs.
(58,845)
Omit scuppers and trench drains at northeast.
(19,207)
Area drain/catch basin in lieu of radius ACO drain at turf steps
Excluded
Reduce 25% of AESS scope. Pending design clarification
(33,958)
Omit all Swale Bridges. Add sidewalks and culverts.
(186,656)
Remove 6" ABC below Vehicular Concrete at Pavers (1-12)
(31,188)
Change (48) Euculiptis trees from 36" box to 24" box
(37,284)
Site Concrete Reduction
(23,538)
Delete Waterproofing at Buildings and Site Walls
(59,604)
Site Furnishings Omit Tree Planters and Pots (5-25, 5-26, & 5-27)
(57,962)
Delete (2) Drinking Fountains
(28,246)
Metal Panel Patern - 25% Open
Excluded
Lighting Reduction - Replace EG1 with EG3 Bollards & Delete 28 EG4 Lights
(150,938)
Wood T&G In Lieu of Metal Panel at E/W Canopy - Includes Solid Panels at Gable Ends and Added Support Framing/Flashing
(634,603)
Reduce Sub Bonds
(106,275)
(1,535,166)
CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY
EXHIBIT 'A'
Willmeng Construction, Inc.
Date
Page 12 of 12
EXHIBIT E
Project Name: Dr. A.J. Chandler Park Renovation Phase 1
Page E-1
Project No.: CA2402.401
Rev. 1/16/2024
SUBCONTRACTOR DOCUMENTS WITH CM@RISK
Any subcontractor assumptions, clarifications, exclusions, terms & conditions, signature blocks, etc. included are strictly between the CM@RISK
and their subcontractors, and do not apply to the Agreement between the CM@RISK and the City.
SUBCONTRACTOR’S LIST FORM
If CM@Risk intends to subcontract any portion of this Agreement, the CM@Risk must submit the name, address, and contractor’s license number (if
applicable) of each subcontractor, including the work component of such subcontracting. Include the form with the bid submittal documents. CM@Risk
may make multiple copies of this form as needed.
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Contact Email:
Contact Phone:
Work Component:
Percentage of Total
Work Performed:
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Contact Email:
Contact Phone:
Work Component:
Percentage of Total
Work Performed:
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Contact Email:
Contact Phone:
Work Component:
Percentage of Total
Work Performed:
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Contact Email:
Contact Phone:
Work Component:
Percentage of Total
Work Performed:
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Contact Email:
Contact Phone:
Work Component:
Percentage of Total
Work Performed:
Company Name:
Contact Name:
Contact Email:
Contact Phone:
Work Component:
Percentage of Total
Work Performed:
EXHIBIT F
Project Name: Dr. A.J. Chandler Park Renovation Phase 1
Page F-1
Project No.: CA2402.401
Rev 1/16/2024
IS / GPS DATA DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS
EXHIBIT G
Project Name: Dr. A.J. Chandler Park Renovation Phase 1
Page G-1
Project No.: CA2402.401
Rev 1/16/2024
SUBCONTRACTOR DOCUMENTS WITH CM@RISK
Any subcontractor assumptions, clarifications, exclusions, terms & conditions,
signature blocks, etc. included are strictly between the CM@Risk and their
subcontractors, and do not apply to the Agreement between the CM@Risk and the
City.
•
•
•
•
•
To:
Contact:
Willmeng Construction
Sam Dul
DR AJ Chandler Park - 90%
Project Name:
Bid Number:
10/8/2025
Fax:
Address:
Phoenix, AZ
Phone:
Project Location:
Arizona Avenue, Chandler, AZ
Bid Date:
10/8/2025
Total Price
Unit Price
Unit
Item Description
Item #
Line #
Estimated Quantity
01-Irrigation
$5,959.00
$5,959.00
1.00
001
EACH
Backflow
$6,234.00
$6,234.00
1.00
001.5
LS
Hand Digging At Existing Trees
New Irrigation For Existing Trees
$14,820.00
$5.70
2,600.00
002
LF
Mainline Sleeves
$8,160.00
$5.10
1,600.00
003
LF
Mainline Pipe
$4,466.00
$2,233.00
2.00
004
EACH
Master Valves
$1,431.00
$1,431.00
1.00
005
EACH
Air Relief Valve
$1,221.00
$407.00
3.00
006
EACH
Gate Valve-2"
$25,392.00
$1,058.00
24.00
007
EACH
Drip RCV 1" Called Out IVM Solenoid Not
Compatible With Baseline Controller
$10,665.00
$711.00
15.00
008
EACH
Turf RCV-1"
$16,848.00
$2.40
7,020.00
009
LF
Lateral Pipe Drip
$4,980.00
$3.00
1,660.00
010
LF
Lateral Pipe Turf
$1,408.00
$0.44
3,200.00
011
LF
Controller Wire
$27,825.00
$26.50
1,050.00
012
EACH
Emitters-Multi
$975.00
$13.00
75.00
013
EACH
Emitters-Pots
$1,710.00
$90.00
19.00
014
EACH
Medium Rotor
$5,109.00
$39.00
131.00
015
EACH
Spray Heads
$2,665.00
$65.00
41.00
016
EACH
Flush Valve
$1,415.00
$283.00
5.00
017
EACH
Mainline Stub-Out
$28,846.00
$14,423.00
2.00
018
EACH
Controllers Need More Specs/Details For
Controller, Bid Reflects Assumptions Of
What Is Needed
$4,416.00
$368.00
12.00
019
EACH
Grounding Rod
$174,545.00
Total Price for above 01-Irrigation Items:
02-Grading
$17,308.00
$17,308.00
1.00
020
LS
Fine Grading
$17,308.00
Total Price for above 02-Grading Items:
03-Dust Control
$41,640.00
$694.00
60.00
021
DY
Dust Control
Page 1 of 5
$41,640.00
Total Price for above 03-Dust Control Items:
$34,584.00
$131.00
264.00
022
EACH
Root Barriers
$12,900.00
$12,900.00
1.00
023
EACH
60"-Trees (Specimen Tree)
$153,120.00
$2,640.00
58.00
024
EACH
48"-Trees
NOTE: 48" Box Alba Fruitless Not Available In
48" Box At Time Of Bid, Assumes Historical 48"
Box Pricing
$87,032.00
$989.00
88.00
025
EACH
36"-Trees
$4,420.00
$340.00
13.00
026
EACH
24"-Trees
$15,288.00
$196.00
78.00
027
EACH
15g Accents
$4,095.00
$52.50
78.00
028
EACH
05g-Accents
$62,339.00
$193.00
323.00
029
EACH
10g-Shrubs
Priced As Allowance Only, Not Available At Time
Of Bid.
$46,048.00
$32.00
1,439.00
030
EACH
05g-Shrubs
$419,826.00
Total Price for above 04-Plant Materials Items:
$17,374.50
$1.30
13,365.00
031
SF
1-01 1/2" (Screened) Express Gold @ 2" Depth
$5,068.00
$5.60
905.00
032
SF
1-02 1/4" (Minus) Express Gold Stabilized @ 2"
Depth W/ 4" ABC
$10,656.00
$3.20
3,330.00
033
SF
1-03 Swale Rock 6-8" Express Gold @ 4" Depth
$7,514.50
$1.90
3,955.00
034
SF
1-04 Swale Rock 3" (Minus) Express Gold @ 3"
Depth
Not Available At Time Of Bid
$40,613.00
Total Price for above 05-Inerts Items:
$34,200.00
$18.00
1,900.00
035
SF
1-19 Artificial Turf
$4,428.00
$18.00
246.00
036
SF
1-20 Artificial Turf @ Play Mound
$9,450.00
$18.00
525.00
037
SF
1-21 Artificial Turf @ Fall Surface
$48,078.00
Total Price for above 06-Artificial Turf Items:
$33,250.00
$95.00
350.00
038
SF
1-22 Flagstone W/ DG Jointing
$11,760.00
$98.00
120.00
039
SF
1-22 Flagstone W/ Stabilized Aggregate Jointing
$600.00
$20.00
30.00
040
SF
1-22 Flagstone In Concrete
NOTE: Siteworks To Provide Flagstone To
Be Installed By Others
$45,610.00
Total Price for above 07-Flagstone Items:
$0.00
$0.00
0.00
041
LF
EXCLUDED Curbing For 2-01, 2-02, 2-03
$0.00
Total Price for above 08-Mow Curb Items:
$110,565.00
$91.00
1,215.00
043
CY
8-02 Open Spaces Amended Soil @ 18" Depth
Excludes Excavation
$133,480.00
$35.50
3,760.00
044
SF
8-03 CU Structural Soil Supply And Install
04-Plant Materials
05-Inerts
06-Artificial Turf
07-Flagstone
08-Mow Curb
10-Soil
Page 2 of 5
Total Price
Unit Price
Unit
Item Description
Item #
Line #
Estimated Quantity
Excludes Excavation
$244,045.00
Total Price for above 10-Soil Items:
11-Sod
$39,445.00
$3.50
11,270.00
045
SF
8-04 Sod-Sand Based Tahoma 31 On 6" USGA
Sand Bed
Excludes Excavation
Non-Overseeded
$39,445.00
Total Price for above 11-Sod Items:
12-Strata Vaults
$277,400.00
$277,400.00
1.00
046
LS
8-05 Strata Vault Construction Includes:
AB Subbase @ 4" Depth Under Strata Vault Base
AB Subbase @ 4" Depth Above Strata Vault Base
(Sand Leveling Course By Paver Installer)
StrataVault Cell System (Excludes Invisigrate
System, Not Specified Or Shown)
Amended Lightweight Soil Infill @ 32" Depth
EXCLUDES:
Excavation
Sand Leveling Course
NOTE: MFG's Website Recommends A
Drainage System Tying Into City Storm
Drain, Our Pricing Excludes This.
NOTE: PER PLAN DETAIL USING
STRATAVAULT SYSTEM! DETAIL AND
MANUFACTURER CALLOUTS CONTRADICT
$277,400.00
Total Price for above 12-Strata Vaults Items:
13-Grates
$40,339.00
$1,391.00
29.00
048
EACH
5-01 Jonite Tree Grates
NOTE: Frames Will Need To Be Installed By
Concrete Sub At Time Of Pour.
$84,500.00
$6,500.00
13.00
049
EACH
3-03 Urban Accessories Tree Guard
$124,839.00
Total Price for above 13-Grates Items:
14-Pottery
$22,220.00
$2,222.00
10.00
050
EACH
5-25 Landscape Forms Pots 36"
$7,170.00
$3,585.00
2.00
051
EACH
5-26 Landscape Forms Pots 48"
$34,800.00
$3,480.00
10.00
052
EACH
5-27/31 QCP Planters Included Below
1 Ea. QPEBBLE7-24
1 Ea. QPEBBLE2-36
2 Ea. QPEBBLE3-42
1 Ea. QPEBBLE5-56
5 Ea. QRCAL4848PLC
$64,190.00
Total Price for above 14-Pottery Items:
15-Maintenance
$75,000.00
$75,000.00
1.00
053
LS
90 Day Maintenance And 2 Year Warranty
$75,000.00
Total Price for above 15-Maintenance Items:
$1,612,539.00
Total Base Bid Price:
Page 3 of 5
Total Price
Unit Price
Unit
Item Description
Item #
Line #
Estimated Quantity
Alternate
$27,900.00
$27,900.00
1.00
054
LS
P&P Bond - If Required (1.44%)
$4,000.00
$4,000.00
1.00
055
LS
Textura Fees
$271,400.00
$271,400.00
1.00
500
LS
8-05 Soil Cell - URBAN FOREST Construction
Includes:
On Compacted Subgrade (By Others)
Drain Stone Backfill On Top @ 6" Depth (Sand
Leveling Course By Paver Installer)
Drain Backfill On Side @ 12" Depth
Soil Cell System Per Ferguson/Urban Forest
Amended Lightweight Soil Infill @ 32" Depth
Root Barriers
Drainage Per Tree In Area Per Detail Exhibit
Filter Fabric
EXCLUDES:
Excavation
Sand Leveling Course
Drainage Pipe Storm Drain Tie-in If
Needed
NOTE: PER FERGUSON SUPPLEMENTAL
DETAIL REV DATE 10/2/25. INCLUDES
ONLY "SYSTEM 1" AREA PER
INSTRUCTION
$303,300.00
Total Price for above Items:
Notes:
• All pricing/quantities per the "9/12/2025 - 90% Permit Submittal" Landscape Plans.
• This proposal excludes all pavers, hardscape, 18" drainage stone under permeable pavers, all excavation, site furnishings, electrical, all metals
except for tree grates and tree guards (excludes canal grates).
• This proposal excludes all site furnishings, except for planter pots, tree grates and tree guards.
• SiteWorks will recieve the site, clean, free of construction debris and at required subgrade elevation, ready to receive topsoil or mulch layer. All
other areas shall be received within 1/10' of finish grade.
• The jobsite shall be readily accessible to our construction equipment.
• This proposal is limited to the items clearly identified on this bid form. Any other specific items not identified herein should be deemed excluded.
• Electrical supply (120v) to the location and final hookup of the automatic irrigation controller to be furnished by others
• No removal, repair, replacement or protection of exsisting landscape or irrigation is included in this proposal.
• Removal of hard dig materials, (materials that requires larger than a 40hp trencher or rubber tired backhoe) is not included in this proposal. Such
material, if encountered shall be removed and charged for on a T & M basis.
• All harscape elements to be installed by others.
• No import, export or translocation of soil is included in this proposal. All planting excavation to be spread onsite.
• No water meter or water meter fees are included in this proposal.
• This proposal is based on all work being performed in one continuous move. Any additional moves may require an additional mobilization fee.
• All permits, sales taxes and fees are excluded from the scope of this proposal.
• Siteworks will have access to the site prior to paving or wall construction to allow for the installation of sleeves. No cutting or patching of concrete
or asphalt paving is included. No boring, jacking or jetting under pavements is included.
• Traffic and pedestrian control measures, if required are to be set up and maintained by others.
• SiteWorks is not responsible for underground utilities not buried to specific depth or clearly marked.
• All costs for water during construction and throughout the maintenance period are excluded.
• All work under this proposal to be performed during regular working hours.
• Material pricing good for 90 days. Any material cost increases between now and actual start of landscape to be passed onto owner without
markup.
Page 4 of 5
ACCEPTED:
The above prices, specifications and conditions are satisfactory
and hereby accepted.
Buyer:
Signature:
Date of Acceptance:
CONFIRMED:
SiteWorks Landscape Development
Authorized Signature:
Estimator:
Jmeyer
jmeyer@siteworksllc.net
Page 5 of 5
•
•
•
•
’
•
•
•
•
3828 N. 35th Ave. Phoenix, Az. 85017 (602) 243-2766
R.O.C. # 203912
City of Phx. Approved Fabricator
Maricopa Cnty Dust Reg. # SC0800100
Attention: Estimating
Company: Willmeng Construction
RE: Dr. AJ Chandler Park
Date: 10/8/2025 REVISED 10.10.25
Allow us to tender our quotation on this project, subject to the following Inclusions, Exclusions, Terms and
Conditions:
Scope of Work
We propose to furnish the following labor and equipment to fabricate and erect the following in accordance with
issued drawings: No specifications, except as may be noted below in our Inclusions, Exclusions and Terms and
Conditions.
We Acknowledge Addenda (0)
This offering includes the following:
Quote No. 2837
REVISED 10.10.25
1.
Columns Excluding caissons (F.O.B. ONLY)
2.
Wide flange and HSS beams
3.
Ledger
4.
Deck
5.
Trusses
6.
Louvers
7.
Wall cap plates (F.O.B. ONLY)
8.
Wire mesh framed doors and partitions
9.
Roof frames at drains (4 total)
10. Galvanized swale bridge 5/LS503 (7 total)
11. Powder coated garden fence 6/LS503
12. Trench grate 5/LS504 (4 total, F.O.B. ONLY)
13. Lantern column 2/A804 (5 total, F.O.B. ONLY)
14. One coat of standard shop primer
15. Detailing
16. FOB Castle Steel, Inc. with freight allowed to the jobsite
Clarifications:
1.
The design team is fully responsible for any errors, omissions, conflicts, violations and improper use of material,
if shown on bid documents. Castle Steel, Inc has prepared this quotation based on measured quantities as
specifically shown on the drawings. If during the preparation of shop drawings we discover errors, omissions or
conflicts that affect pricing. Castle Steel, Inc will immediately submit change orders relating to such incurred
costs.
2.
Castle Steel will not accept any penalties in any type or form due to impedances in schedule related to
unapproved change orders or other trades. Castle Steel Inc is not responsible for these impedances nor will it
accept responsibility.
3.
Castle Steel Inc does not assume or interpret locations of details not shown or designed on the drawings. If a
details is not provided at time of bid this detail is not included in this proposal unless specified above. The
responsibility of the design of the building is the responsibility of others and all details not referenced, shown or
designed are not included. If these details are added at a later date they will be added into the base scope of
work via change order. No work will progress until these change orders are approved by the proper personnel.
This offering excludes the following:
SPECIFIC EXCLUSIONS:
1.
Davis Bacon Wages or Terro wages
2.
All wrought iron, stainless steel, or aluminum
3.
All fencing/gates not listed above
4.
All caissons and associated cages
3828 N. 35th Ave. Phoenix, Az. 85017 (602) 243-2766
5.
All demolition and shoring
6.
All engineering
7.
All of details on sheets LS504, LS505, LS506, LS507 & LS508
8.
Insect screen and attachment at louvres
9.
Sliding restroom door hardware
10. Wall scupper box 8 & 9/A800
11. Shade Structure per detail 3/LS505 (See add alternate allowance)
GENERAL EXCLUSIONS: (unless specifically included elsewhere).
1.
Any item not identified in our inclusions
2.
All bike racks
3.
Access doors, panels, and hatches
4.
Anchorage devices for other trades
5.
Backup plates for other trades
6.
Barricades, fences, lights, and shoring
7.
Any other devices necessary for safety of other than our workmen
8.
Bolts, wood to wood, wood to masonry, other trades
9.
Bonds (cost of) unless otherwise noted
10. Bituminous coatings
11. Brackets, hangers, and frames for other trades
12. Building permits, course of construction insurance
13. Burglar bars
14. Carport canopies
15. Cast iron items, as well as all other non-carbon steel items
16. Catch basins
17. Caulking and sealant
18. Chain link items
19. Chrome items closet rods
20. Cold formed steel (metal studs)
21. Simpson clip
A.
This proposal is subject to acceptance within 5 days from the date tendered and shall be subject to satisfactory
arrangement of details. The Code of Standard Practice of the Americans Institute of Steel Construction, Ninth
Edition, 1989, is hereby made a part of this proposal and shall govern in all matters to which it is applicable not
otherwise provided herein.
B.
It is understood that in the event of errors, nonconforming material/workmanship, or installation difficulties being
experienced with items provided hereunder, we shall be properly notified in writing, given reasonable time to
inspect as to the validity of such claims and a reasonable time to repair. In absence of proper notice as
described above, we will accept no responsibilities for such claims.
C.
The inability of the contractor to be paid shall not be grounds for withholding monthly payments or final retention.
D.
Due to availability and extreme volatility in the steel market, pricing is based on current steel pricing and is
subject to availability of material and Mill allotments. Upon award availability and pricing will be reviewed for
acceptance based on current market conditions.
We propose to provide this project as described above,
For the price of $1,713,177.00 excluding all tax.
•
•
•
•
•
•
3828 N. 35th Ave. Phoenix, Az. 85017 (602) 243-2766
Breakout for Budget Purposes;
West Canopy: $302,183.00
East Canopy: $302,178.00
North Canopy: $330,812.00
South Canopy: $275,406.00
Restroom: $240,433.00
Site: $262,165.00
Add Alternate 001:
This alternate is purely an allowance and budget until final engineered drawings are provided. This
alternate will add the swing canopy structure excluding the swings and support of the swings to the base
bid price. This alternate will allow for two locations. Please add $52,225.00 to the base bid price.
Add Alternate 002:
This alternate is an allowance for the two mockups shown on A020. This is purely an allowance number
for these structures, till a final structural design can be provided clearly showing the scope of materials
needed. Please add $73,000.00 to the base bid price.
Add Alternate 003:
This alternate is an allowance for assistance is placing the columns on the west and east canopies. This
excludes any caisson work drilling or concrete work. Castle Steel will set and brace the column. If the
columns is knocked of moved by any other trade after this has been performed it is the liability of others,
and will be an additional cost to repair. Please add $6,405.00 to the base bid price
Add Alternate 004:
This alternate is an allowance to supply embeds for the top of walls and puddle weld in the field all plates
as noted on note 7 of out inclusion in the field. Please add $33,295.00 to the base bid price
Add Alternate 005:
This alternate is an allowance to place the Lantern Columns in the hole for the caisson and brace in
place. If any other trade knocks or moves the placed post, it will be an additional cost to repair. This
excludes the caisson, drilling, concrete and any other associated work. Please add $1,196.00 to the
base bid price
Add Alternate 006:
This alternate is a deduct to remove the trench drain grating per note 12 of our inclusions above. Please
deduct <-$3,904.00> from the base bid price
Add Alternate 007:
This alternate is an allowance to add the plate scupper boxes per details 8 & 9/A800. Please add
$892.00 to the base bid price
Thank you for the opportunity to quote on this project.
Sincerely,
Larry Capriotti
Castle Steel, Inc.
lcapriotti@castlesteelinc.com
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Date:
From:
Direct:
Email:
Cell:
X Plans and Specifications
X Listed Clarifications
X Local Codes
X Comments Below
Alternates:
1.
$
3.
$
1. This proposal is firm for 30 days
2. Installation is guaranteed for 1 year
3. Mfgs standard warranties transfer to Owner upon
substantial completion
Item Description
Item Description
Item Description
Light Pole Survey
Generator and ATS
Lighting Controls
Concrete Utility Pads
Conc Encasement
Primary Service
AC Unit Connections
Receptacles
Fire Alarm J-boxes
FA Drawings
Asphalt/Conc Patch
Extend primary to
site for temp. pwr
BDA Testing
BDA System
XXX
Furnishing/Installing Access Panels
XXX
Utility Company Fees
Distributed Antenna Systems Raceway
Concrete Pole Bases
XXX
Landscape Repairs
XXX
XXX
Traffic Control
XXX
XXX
Boring (unless noted otherwise)
XXX
XXX
Special Tools/Lifts
XXX
Scaffolding for Elevator
XXX
XXX
XXX
Raceway for beverage lines
Telco Service
XXX
XXX
XXX
XXX
XXX
XXX
Secondary Service
XXX
XXX
XXX
XXX
XXX
Overtime
Demolition
XXX
Hard Dig Conditions
XXX
specifically included in notes above)
XXX
Dumpster For Demo
XXX
XXX
Duct Detectors
XXX
XXX
Power to Smoke/Fire Dampers
120V AC Smoke Detectors (unless
Temporary Power
XXX
Job Office
Ceiling Wire Fixture Supports
XXX
XXX
T-Stats/Mechanical Control Wiring
Cable Tray/ Wiremold Raceway
XXX
XXX
XXX
Data/Telco Stubs & Back Boxes
XXX
XXX
XXX
Job Storage
Trenching
XXX
XXX
XXX
XXX
XXX
CCTV Cable/Termination (RG-6)
XXX
XXX
Voice/Data Cable and Termination
Bond
XXX
Power Poles
Light Fixtures
XXX
Security System Back Boxes
Permits
Sales Tax
XXX
Site Lighting
XXX
Switchgear
Coring Wall/Floor/Saw Cutting
XXX
XXX
WE PROPOSE TO FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL LABOR AND MATERIAL REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION IN
ACCORDANCE WITH:
WE QUOTE ELECTRICAL / 16000
ELECTRICAL PLANS/SPECS
BASE BID AMOUNT
1,710,500.00
$
INCLUDE NEW APS PRIMARY/SECONDARY TO NEW SES
WITH RGBW AND DMX CONTROLS
80,000.00
SPECIFIC INCLUSIONS:
SPECIFIC EXCLUSIONS:
PATRICK TILTON
RELOCATION OF APS TRANSFORMER & ELECTRICAL METER
TOTEM -LANTERN STRUCTURES (5) PER EACH COST $31,500.00
ALT ADD FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL TS101/TS102 -BUDGET ONLY
FIRE ALARM -FLOW AND TAMPER SWITCH
CONCRETE POLE BASES
HAWKEYE AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE
INCLUDED
EXCLUDED
INCLUDED
EXCLUDED
INCLUDED
EXCLUDED
ALT ADD TO SUPPLY AND INSTALL LIGHTS ON TOTEM LANTERN (5) PER DETAILS E502
157,500.00
GROUNDING
LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS AND DMX CONTROLS
10/27/2025
Reference:
DR. AJ CHANDLER PARK
Company:
WILLMENG CONSTRUCTION
Email:
pat@hawkeyeelectric.com
602-574-2977
Transmitted to:
SAM DUL
PATRICK TILTON
6100 W. ERIE ST
CHANDLER, AZ 85226
PHONE (480) 784.6800
PROPOSAL FOR
ELECTRICAL SERVICES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•